2007 Cadillac CTS/CTS-V Owner Manual M
1
This manual describes features that may be
available in this model, but your vehicle may not
be equipped with all of them. For example,
more than one entertainment system may be
offered or your vehicle may have been ordered
without a front passenger or rear seats.
Keep this manual in the vehicle, so it will be there
if it is needed while you are on the road. If the
vehicle is sold, leave this manual in the vehicle.
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,
CADILLAC, the CADILLAC Crest & Wreath,
and the name CTS are registered trademarks
of General Motors Corporation.
Canadian Owners
This manual includes the latest information at
the time it was printed. We reserve the right
to make changes after that time without notice.
For vehicles first sold in Canada, substitute
the name “General Motors of Canada Limited”
for Cadillac Motor Car Division whenever it
appears in this manual.
A French language copy of this manual can be
obtained from your dealer or from:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. 15864562 A First Printing
©2006 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
3
How to Use This Manual
{CAUTION:
Many people read the owner manual from
beginning to end when they first receive their
new vehicle. If this is done, it can help you learn
about the features and controls for the vehicle.
Pictures and words work together in the owner
manual to explain things.
These mean there is something that could
hurt you or other people.
In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard
is. Then we tell you what to do to help avoid
or reduce the hazard. Please read these cautions.
If you do not, you or others could be hurt.
Index
A good place to quickly locate information about
the vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual.
It is an alphabetical list of what is in the manual
and the page number where it can be found.
You will also find a
circle with a slash
through it in this book.
This safety symbol
means “Do Not,”
Safety Warnings and Symbols
“Do Not do this” or
“Do Not let this happen.”
There are a number of safety cautions in this
book. We use a box and the word CAUTION to
tell about things that could hurt you if you were
to ignore the warning.
4
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Vehicle Symbols
Also, in this manual you will find these notices:
The vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown
along with the text describing the operation or
information relating to a specific component,
control, message, gage, or indicator.
Notice: These mean there is something
that could damage your vehicle.
A notice tells about something that can damage
the vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be
covered by your vehicle’s warranty, and it could
be costly. But the notice will tell what to do to help
avoid the damage.
If you need help figuring out a specific name of
a component, gage, or indicator, reference
the following topics:
• Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1
• Features and Controls in Section 2
• Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3
• Climate Controls in Section 3
When you read other manuals, you might see
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors
or in different words.
There are also warning labels on the vehicle. They
use the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
• Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators in
Section 3
• Audio System(s) in Section 3
• Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5
5
These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle:
6
Front Seats
Manual Seats
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could
move forward in a sudden stop or crash.
That could cause injury to the person
sitting there. Always push and pull on the
seatback to be sure it is locked.
Your vehicle may have manual seats. To adjust
the seat, lift the bar under the front of the
seat to unlock it. Slide the seat to where you want
it and release the bar. Try to move the seat
back and forth with your body to be sure the seat
is locked in place.
8
• Raise or lower the rear part of the seat
cushion by moving the rear of the horizontal
control up or down.
Power Seats
• Raise or lower the entire seat by moving the
entire horizontal control up or down.
The vertical control is used for reclining your
seatback. See “Power Reclining Seatbacks” under
information.
If the vehicle has power seats, the controls used
to operate them are located on the outboard
side of the seats.
• Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding
the horizontal control forward or rearward.
• Raise or lower the front part of the seat
cushion by moving the front of the horizontal
control up or down.
9
Power Lumbar
Heated Seats
Your vehicle may have
this feature. The driver’s
and passenger’s
seatback lumbar support
can be adjusted by
moving the control
located on the outboard
side of the seat
If your vehicle has
heated front seats, the
buttons are located
on the climate
control panel.
cushions.
There is one button for the driver and one for the
front passenger. Each button has three settings,
LO, HI and off. The active setting appears on
the climate control panel display. The LO setting
warms the seatback and cushion until the seat
approximates normal body temperature. The
HI setting has a slightly higher temperature.
To increase or decrease support, hold the control
forward or rearward. Keep in mind that as your
seating position changes, as it may during
long trips, so should the position of your lumbar
support. Adjust the seat as needed.
10
To turn on the heated seats, press the button
once. The seat will heat to the HI setting. Press the
button again to switch to the LO setting. Pressing
the button a third time turns the system off.
The buttons for this
feature are located on
the driver’s door
armrest.
The heated seats can only be used when the
ignition is turned on. When the vehicle is turned
off, the heated seats automatically turn off. If
you wish to have the heated seats on once the
vehicle is restarted, press the button again.
Memory Seat and Mirrors
Use the following steps to program the buttons:
If your vehicle has the memory feature, you can
program and recall memory settings for the driver’s
seating and outside rearview mirror driving
positions. Different adjustments can be
programmed for two drivers.
1. Adjust the driver’s seat including the seatback
recliner and both outside mirrors.
2. Press and hold button 1 for at least
three seconds.
Two beeps will sound to confirm that the seat
and mirror positions have been saved.
3. Repeat the procedure for a second driver
using button 2.
11
If your vehicle has an automatic transmission, the
vehicle must be in PARK (P) to recall the stored
driving positions.
If you would like the stored driving positions to be
recalled when unlocking your vehicle with the
Remote Keyless Entry transmitter or after the key
is placed in the ignition, see DIC Vehicle
If your vehicle has a manual transmission and the
engine is running, the parking brake must be
set to recall the memory seat driving positions. The
stored driving positions can be recalled without
setting the parking brake if the vehicle is off.
To stop recall movement of the memory feature at
any time, press one of the power seat or mirror
controls.
Press one of the numbered memory buttons to
recall the stored setting. Each time a memory
button is pressed, a single beep will sound.
Two personalized exit positions can also be
programmed. Use the following steps to program
exit positions:
1. Press memory seat button 1 or the unlock
button on the RKE transmitter, that has the
number 1 on the back of it, to recall the driving
position.
Three chimes will sound and the setting will not
be recalled if you press button 1 or 2 when
the vehicle is not in PARK (P) on an automatic
transmission or the parking brake is not set on a
manual transission.
2. Adjust the driver’s seat to the desired exit
position.
12
3. Press and hold the exit button located above
buttons 1 and 2 on the driver’s door armrest
for at least three seconds.
If your vehicle has an automatic transmission, the
vehicle must be in PARK (P) to recall the exit
positions. If your vehicle has a manual transmission
and the engine is running, the parking brake must
be set to recall the stored exit positions.
Two beeps will sound to confirm that the exit
position has been saved.
Three chimes will sound and the exit setting will
not be recalled if you press the exit button
when the vehicle is not in PARK (P) on an
automatic transmission or the parking brake is not
set on a manual transmission.
4. Repeat the procedure for a second driver using
memory seat button 2 or the RKE transmitter,
that has the number 2 on the back of it.
To recall the stored exit positions, press and
release the exit button. One beep will sound, and
the seat will move to the stored exit position
for that driver. If an exit position has not been
stored for this driver, the seat will move all the way
back. The position of the outside mirrors does
not change for the exit position.
If you would like your stored exit position to be
recalled when unlocking the vehicle with the RKE
transmitter, or when the ignition is turned off
and the driver’s door is opened, see DIC Vehicle
13
If your front passenger’s seat has a manual
reclining seatback, the lever used to operate it is
located on the outboard side of the seat.
Reclining Seatbacks
Manual Reclining Seatbacks
{CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you
try to adjust a manual driver’s seat while
the vehicle is moving. The sudden
movement could startle and confuse you,
or make you push a pedal when you do
not want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only
when the vehicle is not moving.
To recline the seatback, do the following:
1. Lift the recline lever.
{CAUTION:
2. Move the seatback to the desired position,
then release the lever to lock the seatback
in place.
If the seatback is not locked, it could
move forward in a sudden stop or crash.
That could cause injury to the person
sitting there. Always push and pull on the
seatback to be sure it is locked.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it
is locked.
14
To return the seatback to an upright position, do
the following:
Power Reclining Seatbacks
1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure to
the seatback and the seatback will return to
the upright position.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it
is locked.
If your seats have power reclining seatbacks, use
the vertical power seat control located on the
outboard side of each seat.
• To recline the seatback, press the control
toward the rear of the vehicle.
• To raise the seatback, press the control
toward the front of the vehicle.
15
{CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when your
vehicle is in motion can be dangerous.
Even if you buckle up, your safety belts
cannot do their job when you are reclined
like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its job. In a
crash, you could go into it, receiving neck
or other injuries.
The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a
crash the belt could go up over your
abdomen. The belt forces would be there,
not at your pelvic bones. This could cause
serious internal injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is
in motion, have the seatback upright.
Then sit well back in the seat and wear
your safety belt properly.
Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is
moving.
16
Pull the head restraint
up to raise it. To lower
the head restraint,
Head Restraints
press the button,
located on the top of the
seatback, and push
the head restraint down.
All the head restraints can tilt forward and
rearward.
The rear head restraints can be removed from the
seatback. To do this, press the button, located
on the top of the seatback, and pull the head
restraint all the way out.
Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the
restraint is at the same height as the occupant’s
head. This position reduces the chance of a
neck injury in a crash.
17
2. There is a tab
located on the
outboard sides of
the seatback.
Rear Seats
Split Folding Rear Seat
Pull forward on the
tab to unlock the
seatback.
Your vehicle may have a split folding rear seat.
A split folding rear seat allows you to carry
long cargo by folding down part or all of the
rear seat.
Use the following steps to lower one or both of the
rear seatbacks:
1. Your vehicle may
have a detachable
anchor on the
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety
belts still fastened may cause damage to the
seat or the safety belts. Always unbuckle
the safety belts and return them to their normal
stowed position before folding a rear seat.
center safety belt.
Insert a tool
with a small tip into
the slot as shown
to unlatch the safety
belt buckle. Then
move the belt to the
side so it is not in
your way.
3. Fold the seatback down. This will allow you
direct access to the trunk.
18
To return the seatback to the upright position,
do the following:
CAUTION: (Continued)
rear seatback, always check to be sure
that the safety belts are properly routed
and attached, and are not twisted.
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could
move forward in a sudden stop or crash.
That could cause injury to the person
sitting there. Always push and pull on the
seatback to be sure it is locked.
2. Reconnect the
center safety
belt latch plate to
the buckle.
1. Lift the seatback up and push it back into place.
{CAUTION:
A safety belt that is improperly routed,
not properly attached, or twisted will
not provide the protection needed in a
crash.The person wearing the belt could
be seriously injured. After raising the
3. Make sure the seatback is locked into place
by pushing and pulling on it.
4. Repeat Steps 1 and 3 for the other seatback.
CAUTION: (Continued)
When the seatback is not in use, it should be
kept in the upright, locked position.
19
Safety Belts
{CAUTION:
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
Do not let anyone ride where he or she
cannot wear a safety belt properly. If you
are in a crash and you are not wearing a
safety belt, your injuries can be much
worse. You can hit things inside the
vehicle or be ejected from it. You can be
seriously injured or killed. In the same
crash, you might not be, if you are
buckled up. Always fasten your safety
belt, and check that your passengers’
belts are fastened properly too.
This part of the manual tells you how to use
safety belts properly. It also tells you some things
you should not do with safety belts.
20
In most states and in all Canadian provinces,
the law says to wear safety belts.
Here is why: They work.
{CAUTION:
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you
do have a crash, you do not know if it will be
a bad one.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a
cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle.
In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed. Do not allow people to ride in any
area of your vehicle that is not equipped
with seats and safety belts. Be sure
everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a safety belt properly.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can
be so serious that even buckled up, a person
would not survive. But most crashes are in
between. In many of them, people who buckle up
can survive and sometimes walk away. Without
belts they could have been badly hurt or killed.
After more than 40 years of safety belts in
vehicles, the facts are clear. In most crashes
buckling up does matter... a lot!
Your vehicle has a
light that comes on
as a reminder to
buckle up. See Safety
on page 192.
21
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast
as it goes.
Put someone on it.
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a
seat on wheels.
22
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle.
The rider does not stop.
The person keeps going until stopped by
something. In a real vehicle, it could be the
windshield...
23
or the instrument panel...
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle
does. You get more time to stop. You stop
over more distance, and your strongest bones
take the forces. That is why safety belts
make such good sense.
24
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far
from home, why should I wear safety belts?
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are
in an accident — even one that is not your
fault — you and your passengers can be hurt.
Being a good driver does not protect you
from things beyond your control, such as
bad drivers.
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after an
accident if I am wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a
safety belt or not. But you can unbuckle a
safety belt, even if you are upside down.
And your chance of being conscious during
and after an accident, so you can unbuckle
and get out, is much greater if you are belted.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)
of home. And the greatest number of serious
injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less
than 40 mph (65 km/h).
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should
Safety belts are for everyone.
I have to wear safety belts?
A: Airbags are in many vehicles today and will be
in most of them in the future. But they are
supplemental systems only; so they work
with safety belts — not instead of them.
Every airbag system ever offered for sale
has required the use of safety belts. Even if
you are in a vehicle that has airbags, you still
have to buckle up to get the most protection.
That is true not only in frontal collisions,
but especially in side and other collisions.
25
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
Driver Position
This part is only for people of adult size.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
Be aware that there are special things to know
about safety belts and children. And there
are different rules for smaller children and babies.
If a child will be riding in your vehicle, see
everyone’s protection.
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here is how
to wear it properly.
1. Close and lock the door.
2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight.
To see how, see “Seats” in the Index.
First, you will want to know which restraint
systems your vehicle has.
We will start with the driver position.
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across
you. Do not let it get twisted.
26
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let
the belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull
the belt across you more slowly.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it
clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is
secure. If the belt is not long enough,
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle
the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder belt.
27
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and
snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In
a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic
bones. And you would be less likely to slide under
the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt would
apply force at your abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder
belt should go over the shoulder and across the
chest. These parts of the body are best able
to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or
crash, or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the
retractor.
28
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder
belt is too loose. In a crash, you would
move forward too much, which could
increase injury. The shoulder belt should
fit against your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give
nearly as much protection this way.
29
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a
crash, the belt would go up over your
abdomen. The belt forces would be there,
not at the pelvic bones. This could cause
serious internal injuries. Always buckle
your belt into the buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
30
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear
the shoulder belt under your arm. In a
crash, your body would move too far
forward, which would increase the chance
of head and neck injury. Also, the belt
would apply too much force to the ribs,
which are not as strong as shoulder
bones. You could also severely injure
internal organs like your liver or spleen.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It
should be worn over the shoulder at all times.
31
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted
belt. In a crash, you would not have the full
width of the belt to spread impact forces. If
a belt is twisted, make it straight so it can
work properly, or ask your dealer to fix it.
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the
buckle. The belt should go back out of the way.
32
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out
of the way. If you slam the door on it, you can
damage both the belt and your vehicle.
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely
to be seriously injured if they do not wear
safety belts.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder
belt, and the lap portion should be worn as low as
possible, below the rounding, throughout the
pregnancy.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it
is more likely that the fetus will not be hurt
in a crash. For pregnant women, as for anyone,
the key to making safety belts effective is wearing
them properly.
33
Right Front Passenger Position
Rear Seat Passengers
To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s
page 26.
It is very important for rear seat passengers to
buckle up! Accident statistics show that unbelted
people in the rear seat are hurt more often in
crashes than those who are wearing safety belts.
The right front passenger’s safety belt works the
same way as the driver’s safety belt — except
for one thing.
Rear passengers who are not safety belted
can be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And
they can strike others in the vehicle who are
wearing safety belts.
If the belt stops before it reaches the buckle, tilt
the latch plate and keep pulling until you can
buckle the belt.
34
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All rear seat positions have lap-shoulder belts.
Here is how to wear one properly.
If the belt stops before it reaches the buckle,
tilt the latch plate and keep pulling until
you can buckle it.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is
secure.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle
the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across
you. Do not let it get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let
the belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull
the belt across you more slowly.
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it
clicks.
35
3. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the
buckle end of the belt as you pull up on the
shoulder part.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low
and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs.
In a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic
bones. And you would be less likely to slide
under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the
belt would apply force at your abdomen.
This could cause serious or even fatal injuries.
36
The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder
and across the chest. These parts of the body
are best able to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or
a crash, or if you pull the belt very quickly out
of the retractor.
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder
belt is too loose. In a crash, you would
move forward too much, which could
increase injury. The shoulder belt should
fit against your body.
To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.
37
There is one guide for each outboard passenger
position in the rear seat. Here is how to install
a comfort guide to the safety belt:
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides may provide
added safety belt comfort for older children
who have outgrown booster seats and for some
adults. When installed on a shoulder belt, the
comfort guide positions the belt away from
the neck and head.
1. Pull the elastic cord out from between the
edge of the seatback and the interior body
to remove the guide from its storage clip.
38
2. Slide the guide under and past the belt. The
elastic cord must be under the belt. Then, place
the guide over the belt and insert the two edges
of the belt into the slots of the guide.
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies
flat. The elastic cord must be under the belt
and the guide on top.
39
{CAUTION:
A safety belt that is not properly worn may
not provide the protection needed in a
crash. The person wearing the belt could
be seriously injured. The shoulder belt
should go over the shoulder and across
the chest. These parts of the body are
best able to take belt restraining forces.
4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt
page 34. Make sure that the shoulder
belt crosses the shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guide, squeeze
the belt edges together so that you can take
them out of the guide. Pull the guide upward to
expose its storage clip, and then slide the
guide onto the clip. Turn the guide and clip inward
and slide them in between the seatback and
the interior body, leaving only the loop of
the elastic cord exposed.
40
Safety Belt Pretensioners
Safety Belt Extender
Your vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for the
driver and right front passenger. Although you
cannot see them, they are located on the buckle
end of the safety belts. They help the safety
belts reduce a person’s forward movement in a
moderate to severe frontal and near frontal crash.
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you,
you should use it.
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealer
will order you an extender. When you go in to
order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so
the extender will be long enough for you. To
help avoid personal injury, do not let someone else
use it, and use it only for the seat it is made to
fit. The extender has been designed for adults.
Never use it for securing child seats. To wear it,
just attach it to the regular safety belt. For
more information see the instruction sheet that
comes with the extender.
Pretensioners work only once. If they activate
in a crash, you will need to get new ones,
and probably other new parts for your safety belt
system. See Replacing Restraint System Parts
41
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety
Child Restraints
belts?
Older Children
A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt
and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt
can provide. The shoulder belt should not
cross the face or neck. The lap belt should fit
snugly below the hips, just touching the
top of the thighs. It should never be worn over
the abdomen, which could cause severe or
even fatal internal injuries in a crash.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if
they are restrained in the rear seat.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can
strike other people who are buckled up, or can be
thrown out of the vehicle. Older children need
to use safety belts properly.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats
should wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
42
Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder
belt, but the child is so small that the
shoulder belt is very close to the child’s
face or neck?
A: If the child is sitting in a seat next to a
window, move the child toward the center of
the vehicle. Also see Rear Safety Belt
sitting in the center rear seat passenger
position, move the child toward the safety belt
buckle. In either case, be sure that the
shoulder belt still is on the child’s shoulder, so
that in a crash the child’s upper body would
have the restraint the belts provide.
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same
belt. The belt can not properly spread the
impact forces. In a crash, the two children
can be crushed together and seriously
injured. A belt must be used by only
one person at a time.
43
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is
behind the child. If the child wears the
belt in this way, in a crash the child might
slide under the belt. The belt’s force
would then be applied right on the child’s
abdomen. That could cause serious or
fatal injuries.
Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just
touching the child’s thighs. This applies belt force
to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash.
44
Infants and Young Children
{CAUTION:
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This
includes infants and all other children. Neither the
distance traveled nor the age and size of the
traveler changes the need, for everyone, to use
safety restraints. In fact, the law in every state
in the United States and in every Canadian
province says children up to some age must be
restrained while in a vehicle.
Children can be seriously injured or
strangled if a shoulder belt is wrapped
around their neck and the safety belt
continues to tighten. Never leave children
unattended in a vehicle and never allow
children to play with the safety belts.
Every time infants and young children ride in
vehicles, they should have the protection provided
by appropriate restraints. Young children should
not use the vehicle’s adult safety belts alone,
unless there is no other choice. Instead, they need
to use a child restraint.
45
{CAUTION:
People should never hold a baby in their
arms while riding in a vehicle. A baby
does not weigh much — until a crash.
During a crash a baby will become so
heavy it is not possible to hold it. For
example, in a crash at only 25 mph
(40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) baby will
suddenly become a 240 lb (110 kg) force
on a person’s arms. A baby should be
secured in an appropriate restraint.
46
{CAUTION:
Children who are up against, or very close
to, any airbag when it inflates can be
seriously injured or killed. Airbags plus
lap-shoulder belts offer protection for
adults and older children, but not for
young children and infants. Neither the
vehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbag
system is designed for them. Young
children and infants need the protection
that a child restraint system can provide.
47
Q: What are the different types of add-on
child restraints?
{CAUTION:
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by
the vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic
types. Selection of a particular restraint should
take into consideration not only the child’s
weight, height, and age but also whether or not
the restraint will be compatible with the motor
vehicle in which it will be used.
Newborn infants need complete support,
including support for the head and neck.
This is necessary because a newborn
infant’s neck is weak and its head weighs
so much compared with the rest of its
body. In a crash, an infant in a rear-facing
seat settles into the restraint, so the crash
forces can be distributed across the
strongest part of an infant’s body, the
back and shoulders. Infants always
should be secured in appropriate infant
restraints.
For most basic types of child restraints, there
are many different models available. When
purchasing a child restraint, be sure it is
designed to be used in a motor vehicle. If it is,
the restraint will have a label saying that it
meets federal motor vehicle safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions
that come with the restraint state the weight
and height limitations for a particular child
restraint. In addition, there are many kinds
of restraints available for children with
special needs.
48
Child Restraint Systems
{CAUTION:
The body structure of a young child is
quite unlike that of an adult or older child,
for whom the safety belts are designed. A
young child’s hip bones are still so small
that the vehicle’s regular safety belt may
not remain low on the hip bones, as it
should. Instead, it may settle up around
the child’s abdomen. In a crash, the belt
would apply force on a body area that is
unprotected by any bony structure. This
alone could cause serious or fatal injuries.
Young children always should be secured
in appropriate child restraints.
An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use
in a motor vehicle, is an infant restraint system
designed to restrain or position a child on a
continuous flat surface. Make sure that the infant’s
head rests toward the center of the vehicle.
49
A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint with
the seating surface against the back of the
infant. The harness system holds the infant in
place and, in a crash, acts to keep the infant
positioned in the restraint.
A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint
for the child’s body with the harness and also
sometimes with surfaces such as T-shaped
or shelf-like shields.
50
Q: How Should I Use a Child Restraint?
A: A child restraint system is any device designed
for use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat,
or position children. A built-in child restraint
system is a permanent part of the motor
vehicle. An add-on child restraint system is a
portable one, which is purchased by the
vehicle’s owner. To help reduce injuries, an
add-on child restraint must be secured in
the vehicle. With built-in or add-on child
restraints, the child has to be secured within
the child restraint.
When choosing an add-on child restraint, be
sure the child restraint is designed to be
used in a vehicle. If it is, it will have a label
saying that it meets federal motor vehicle
safety standards. Then follow the instructions
for the restraint. You may find these
instructions on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both.
A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed
to improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt
system. Some booster seats have a shoulder belt
positioner, and some high-back booster seats
have a five-point harness. A booster seat can also
help a child to see out the window.
51
A child can be endangered in a crash if the child
restraint is not properly secured in the vehicle.
Securing an Add-on Child Restraint
in the Vehicle
When securing an add-on child restraint, refer
to the instructions that come with the restraint
which may be on the restraint itself or in a booklet,
or both, and to this manual. The child restraint
instructions are important, so if they are not
available, obtain a replacement copy from the
manufacturer.
{CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed
in a crash if the child restraint is not
properly secured in the vehicle. Make sure
the child restraint is properly installed
in the vehicle using the vehicle’s safety
belt or LATCH system, following the
instructions that came with that restraint,
and also the instructions in this manual.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and
injure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly
secure any child restraint in your vehicle — even
when no child is in it.
To help reduce the chance of injury, the
child restraint must be secured in the vehicle.
Child restraint systems must be secured in vehicle
seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCH system.
52
Securing the Child Within the Child
Restraint
{CAUTION:
There are several systems for securing the child
within the child restraint. One system, the
A child can be seriously injured or killed
in a crash if the child is not properly
secured in the child restraint. Make sure
the child is properly secured, following the
instructions that came with that restraint.
three-point harness, has straps that come down
over each of the infant’s shoulders and buckle
together at the crotch. The five-point harness
system has two shoulder straps, two hip straps, and
a crotch strap. A shield may take the place of hip
straps. A T-shaped shield has shoulder straps that
are attached to a flat pad which rests low against
the child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type shield has
straps that are attached to a wide, shelf-like shield
that swings up or to the side.
Because there are different systems, it is important
to refer to the instructions that come with the
restraint. A child can be endangered in a crash if
the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint.
53
Where to Put the Restraint
CAUTION: (Continued)
Accident statistics show that children are safer if
they are restrained in the rear rather than the front
seat. We recommend that child restraints be
secured in a rear seat, including an infant riding in
a rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in a
forward-facing child seat and an older child riding
in a booster seat.
Even though the passenger sensing
system is designed to turn off the
passenger’s frontal airbag if the system
detects a rear-facing child restraint, no
system is fail-safe, and no one can
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend
that rear-facing child restraints be secured
in the rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
If you need to secure a forward-facing
child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as
far back as it will go. It is better to secure
the child restraint in a rear seat.
Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate
a rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sun
visor says, “Never put a rear-facing child seat
in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can
be seriously injured or killed if the right
front passenger’s airbag inflates. This is
because the back of the rear-facing child
restraint would be very close to the
inflating airbag.
Wherever you install a child restraint, be sure to
secure the child restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and
injure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly
secure any child restraint in your vehicle — even
when no child is in it.
CAUTION: (Continued)
54
Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints
have lower anchors and attachments or top
tether anchors and attachments.
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH)
The LATCH system holds a child restraint during
driving or in a crash. This system is designed
to make installation of a child restraint easier. The
LATCH system uses anchors in the vehicle and
attachments on the child restraint that are made for
use with the LATCH system
Lower Anchors
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraint
is properly installed using the anchors, or use
the vehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint,
following the instructions that came with that
restraint, and also the instructions in this manual.
When installing a child restraint with a top
tether, you must also use either the lower anchors
or the safety belts to properly secure the child
restraint. A child restraint must never be installed
using only the top tether and anchor.
Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into the
vehicle. There are two lower anchors for each
LATCH seating position that will accommodate a
child restraint with lower attachments (B).
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle,
you need a child restraint that has LATCH
attachments. The child restraint manufacturer will
provide you with instructions on how to use
the child restraint and its attachments. The
following explains how to attach a child restraint
with these attachments in your vehicle.
55
Some child restraints with top tethers are designed
for use with or without the top tether being attached.
Others require the top tether always to be attached.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing
child restraints have a top tether, and that the tether
be attached. In the United States, some child
restraints also have a top tether. Be sure to read
and follow the instructions for your child restraint.
Top Tether Anchor
If the child restraint does not have a top tether,
one can be obtained, in kit form, for many child
restraints. Ask the child restraint manufacturer
whether or not a kit is available.
Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor
Locations
A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child
restraint to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built
into the vehicle. The top tether attachment (B)
on the child restraint connects to the top tether
anchor in the vehicle in order to reduce the forward
movement and rotation of the child restraint
during driving or in a crash.
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with
top tether anchors.
j (Lower Anchor):
Seating positions with
two lower anchors.
Your child restraint may have a single tether (A)
or a dual tether (C). Either will have a single
attachment (B) to secure the top tether to
the anchor.
Rear Seat
56
To assist you in locating
the lower anchors, each
seating position with
lower anchors has
two labels, near the
crease between the
seatback and the seat
cushion, showing where
the anchors are located.
To assist you in locating
the top tether anchors,
the top tether anchor
symbol is located on
the trim cover.
Do not secure a child restraint in the right front
passenger’s position if a national or local law
requires that the top tether be attached, or if the
instructions that come with the child restraint
say that the top tether must be attached. There is
no place to attach the top tether in this position.
The top tether anchors are located under the
trim covers on the rear seatback filler panel.
Be sure to use an anchor located on the same
side of the vehicle as the seating position
where the child restraint will be placed.
Accident statistics show that children are safer
if they are restrained in the rear rather than
page 54 for additional information.
57
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
the LATCH System
{CAUTION:
Each top tether anchor and lower anchor
in the vehicle is designed to hold only
one child restraint. Attaching more than
one child restraint to a single anchor
could cause the anchor or attachment to
come loose or even break during a crash.
A child or others could be injured if this
happens. To help prevent injury to people
and damage to your vehicle, attach only
one child restraint per anchor.
{CAUTION:
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not
attached to anchors, the restraint will not
be able to protect the child correctly. In a
crash, the child could be seriously injured
or killed. Make sure that a LATCH-type
child restraint is properly installed using
the anchors, or use the vehicle’s safety
belts to secure the restraint, following the
instructions that came with that restraint,
and also the instructions in this manual.
58
Folding an empty rear seat with the safety
belts secured may cause damage to the safety
belt or the seat. When removing the child
restraint, always remember to return the safety
belts to their normal, stowed position before
folding the rear seat.
{CAUTION:
Children can be seriously injured or
strangled if a shoulder belt is wrapped
around their neck and the safety belt
continues to tighten. Secure any unused
safety belts behind the child restraint so
children cannot reach them. Pull the
shoulder belt all the way out of the
retractor to set the lock, if your vehicle has
one, after the child restraint has been
installed. Be sure to follow the instructions
of the child restraint manufacturer.
1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to
the lower anchors. If the child restraint does
not have lower attachments or the desired
seating position does not have lower anchors,
secure the child restraint with the top tether
and the safety belts. Refer to your child
restraint manufacturer instructions and the
instructions in this manual.
1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desired
seating position.
1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
Notice: Contact between the child restraint or
the LATCH attachment parts and the vehicle’s
safety belt assembly may cause damage to
these parts. Make sure when securing unused
safety belts behind the child restraint that
there is no contact between the child restraint
or the LATCH attachment parts and the
vehicle’s safety belt assembly.
1.3. Attach and tighten the lower
attachments on the child restraint to the
lower anchors.
59
2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends
that the top tether be attached, attach and
tighten the top tether to the top tether anchor,
if equipped. Refer to the child restraint
If the position you are
using does not have a
head restraint and
you are using a dual
tether, route the
instructions and the following steps:
tether over the
seatback.
2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
2.2. Press the ribbed area of the trim cover
to open the cover and expose the
anchor.
2.3. If you have an adjustable head restraint,
raise the head restraint.
2.4. Route, attach and tighten the top tether
according to your child restraint
instructions and the following
instructions:
If the position you are
using has an adjustable
head restraint and you
are using a dual tether,
route the tether under
the head restraint and in
between the head
If the position you are
using does not have a
head restraint and
you are using a single
tether, route the
restraint posts.
tether over the
seatback.
60
If the position you are
using has an adjustable
head restraint and you
are using a single tether,
route the tether under
the head restraint and in
between the head
Be sure to follow the instructions that came with
the child restraint. Secure the child in the child
restraint when and as the instructions say.
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and
shoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety belt
through or around the restraint. The child
restraint instructions will show you how.
restraint posts.
3. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Rear Seat Position
If your child restraint has the LATCH system, see
If your child restraint does not have the LATCH
system, you will be using the lap-shoulder
belt to secure the child restraint in this position.
Tilt the latch plate to adjust the belt if needed.
61
3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button
is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle
the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
4. To tighten the belt, push down on the child
restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt
to tighten the lap portion of the belt and
feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor.
If you are using a forward-facing child
restraint, you may find it helpful to use your
knee to push down on the child restraint
as you tighten the belt.
62
5. If your child restraint has a top tether,
attach and tighten the top tether to the
top tether anchor. Refer to the instructions
that came with the child restraint and to
step five under Lower Anchors and Tethers
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
Your vehicle has a right front passenger airbag.
A rear seat is a safer place to secure a
forward-facing child restraint. See Where to
6. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensing
system. The passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag when an infant in a rear-facing infant
seat or a small child in a forward-facing child
restraint or booster seat is detected. See
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 194
for more information on this including important
safety information.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the
vehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way.
The safety belt will move freely again and be
ready to work for an adult or larger child
passenger.
63
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a
rear-facing child seat in the front.” This is because
the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if the
airbag deploys.
CAUTION: (Continued)
Even though the passenger sensing
system is designed to turn off the
passenger’s frontal airbag if the system
detects a rear-facing child restraint, no
system is fail-safe, and no one can
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend
that rear-facing child restraints be secured
in the rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can
be seriously injured or killed if the right
front passenger’s airbag inflates. This is
because the back of the rear-facing child
restraint would be very close to the
inflating airbag. Be sure the airbag is off
before using a rear-facing child restraint
in the passenger’s position.
If you need to secure a forward-facing child
restraint in the right front seat position, move the
seat as far back as it will go before securing
the forward-facing child restraint. See Manual
CAUTION: (Continued)
64
If your child restraint has the LATCH system,
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure
the child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow
the instructions that came with the child restraint.
Secure the child in the child restraint when and as
the instructions say.
There is no top tether anchor in the right front
passenger’s position. Do not secure a child seat
in this position if a national or local law requires
that the top tether be anchored, or if the
instructions that come with the child restraint
say that the top tether must be anchored.
a top tether.
1. Your vehicle has a right front passenger’s
frontal airbag. See Passenger Sensing
rear-facing child restraints be secured in a rear
seat, even if the airbag is off. If your child
restraint is forward-facing, move the seat as
far back as it will go before securing the
child restraint in this seat. See Manual Seats
When the passenger sensing system has
turned off the right front passenger’s frontal
airbag, the off indicator in the passenger airbag
status indicator should light and stay lit
when you turn the ignition to ON or START.
on page 194.
65
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and
shoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety belt
through or around the restraint. The child
restraint instructions will show you how.
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button
is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle
the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
Tilt the latch plate to adjust the belt if needed.
66
6. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
7. If the airbag is off, the off indicator in the
rearview mirror will be lit and stay lit when
the key is turned to ON or START.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove
the child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the
child restraint.
If after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to
make sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not
pressing the child restraint into the seat cushion.
If this happens, slightly recline the vehicle’s
seatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible.
Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped
under the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,
adjust the head restraint.
5. To tighten the belt, pull up on the shoulder
belt while you push down on the child
restraint. You may find it helpful to use your
knee to push down on the child restraint
as you tighten the belt.
67
A thick layer of additional material such as a
blanket, or aftermarket equipment such as seat
covers heaters or massagers, located between the
seat cushion and the child restraint or small
occupant, can affect how the passenger sensing
system operates. Remove any additional material
from the seat cushion before reinstalling/securing
the child restraint or small occupant.
Airbag System
Your vehicle has six airbags:
• A frontal airbag for the driver and another
frontal airbag for the right front passenger.
• A seat-mounted side impact airbag for the
driver and another for the right front
passenger.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in
the child restraint in a rear seat position in
the vehicle and check with your dealer.
• A roof-mounted side impact airbag for the
driver and passenger directly behind the driver.
• A roof-mounted side impact airbag for the right
front passenger and the person seated directly
behind that passenger.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the
vehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way.
The safety belt will move freely again and be
ready to work for an adult or larger child
passenger.
Frontal airbags are designed to help reduce
the risk of injury from the force of an inflating
airbag. But these airbags must inflate very quickly
to do their job and comply with federal regulations.
68
Here are the most important things to know about
the airbag system:
CAUTION: (Continued)
inflate in rollover, rear crashes, or in many
side crashes. And, for some unrestrained
occupants, frontal airbags may provide
less protection in frontal crashes than
more forceful airbags have provided in
the past.
{CAUTION:
You can be severely injured or killed in a
crash if you are not wearing your safety
belt — even if you have airbags. Wearing
your safety belt during a crash helps
reduce your chance of hitting things
inside the vehicle or being ejected from it.
Airbags are “supplemental restraints” to
the safety belts. All airbags are designed
to work with safety belts but do not
replace them.
Seat-mounted side impact airbags and
roof-mounted side impact airbags are
designed to inflate in moderate to severe
crashes where something hits the side of
your vehicle. They are not designed to
inflate in frontal, in rollover or in rear
crashes. Everyone in your vehicle should
wear a safety belt properly — whether or
not there is an airbag for that person.
Frontal airbags for the driver and right
front passenger are designed to deploy
in moderate to severe frontal and near
frontal crashes. They are not designed to
CAUTION: (Continued)
69
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Anyone who is up against, or very close to,
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer the best protection for adults,
but not for young children and infants.
Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system nor
its airbag system is designed for them.
Young children and infants need the
protection that a child restraint system can
provide. Always secure children properly
in your vehicle. To read how, see Older
Both frontal and side impact airbags inflate
with great force, faster than the blink of an
eye. If you are too close to an inflating
airbag, as you would be if you were leaning
forward, it could seriously injure you.
Safety belts help keep you in position for
airbag inflation before and during a crash.
Always wear your safety belt even with
frontal airbags. The driver should sit as far
back as possible while still maintaining
control of the vehicle. Occupants should
not lean on or sleep against the door.
70
There is an airbag
readiness light on the
instrument panel cluster,
which shows the
Where Are the Airbags?
airbag symbol.
The system checks the airbag electrical system
for malfunctions. The light tells you if there is
an electrical problem. See Airbag Readiness
The driver’s frontal airbag is in the middle of the
steering wheel.
71
The right front passenger’s frontal airbag is in the
instrument panel on the passenger’s side.
The driver’s seat-mounted side impact airbag is in
the side of the driver’s seatback closest to the door.
72
The right front passenger’s seat-mounted side
impact airbag is in the side of the passenger’s
seatback closest to the door.
The roof-mounted side impact airbag for the driver
and the passenger directly behind the driver is
in the ceiling above the side windows.
73
{CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and
an airbag, the airbag might not inflate
properly or it might force the object into
that person causing severe injury or even
death. The path of an inflating airbag
must be kept clear. Do not put anything
between an occupant and an airbag, and
do not attach or put anything on the
steering wheel hub or on or near any
other airbag covering. Never secure
anything to the roof of your vehicle by
routing the rope or tie-down through any
door or window opening. If you do, the
path of an inflating airbag will be blocked.
Do not let seat covers block the inflation
path of a side impact airbag. The path of
an inflating airbag must be kept clear.
The roof-mounted side impact airbag for the front
passenger and the passenger directly behind
the front passenger is in the ceiling above the side
windows.
74
If the front of your vehicle goes straight into a wall
that does not move or deform, the threshold
level for the reduced deployment is about 12 to
16 mph (19 to 26 km/h), and the threshold level for
a full deployment is about 18 to 24 mph (29 to
38.5 km/h). The threshold level can vary, however,
with specific vehicle design, so that it can be
somewhat above or below this range.
When Should an Airbag Inflate?
The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal
airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to
severe frontal or near-frontal crashes. But they are
designed to inflate only if the impact exceeds a
predetermined deployment threshold. Deployment
thresholds take into account a variety of desired
deployment and non-deployment events and are
used to predict how severe a crash is likely to be in
time for the airbags to inflate and help restrain the
occupants. Whether your frontal airbags will or
should deploy is not based on how fast your vehicle
is traveling. It depends largely on what you hit, the
direction of the impact, and how quickly your
vehicle slows down.
Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash
speeds. For example:
• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a moving object.
• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash
speed than if the vehicle hits an object that
does not deform.
In addition, your vehicle has “dual stage” frontal
airbags, which adjust the restraint according
to crash severity. Your vehicle has an electronic
frontal sensor, which helps the sensing system
distinguish between a moderate frontal impact
and a more severe frontal impact. For moderate
frontal impacts, these airbags inflate at a level
less than full deployment. For more severe
frontal impacts, full deployment occurs.
• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole),
the airbags could inflate at a different crash
speed than if the vehicle hits a wide object
(like a wall).
• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle,
the airbags could inflate at a different crash
speed than if the vehicle goes straight into
the object.
75
Frontal airbags (driver and right front passenger)
are not intended to inflate during vehicle
rollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
In an impact of sufficient severity, the airbag
sensing system detects that the vehicle is
in a crash. The sensing system triggers a release
of gas from the inflator, which inflates the
airbag. The inflator, airbag, and related hardware
are all part of the airbag modules inside the
steering wheel, instrument panel, the side of the
front seatbacks closest to the door, and the ceiling
of the vehicle, near the side windows.
The side impact airbags are intended to inflate
in moderate to severe side crashes. A side impact
airbag will inflate if the crash severity is above
the system’s designed “threshold level.” The
threshold level can vary with specific vehicle
design. Side impact airbags are not intended to
inflate in frontal or near-frontal impacts, rollovers,
or rear impacts. A side impact airbag is intended
to deploy on the side of the vehicle that is struck.
How Does an Airbag Restrain?
In any particular crash, no one can say whether
an airbag should have inflated simply because of
the damage to a vehicle or because of what
the repair costs were. For frontal airbags, inflation
is determined by what the vehicle hits, the
angle of the impact, and how quickly the vehicle
slows down in frontal and near-frontal impacts.
For side impact airbags, inflation is determined by
the location and severity of the impact.
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the
steering wheel or the instrument panel. In
moderate to severe side collisions, even belted
occupants can contact the inside of the vehicle.
The airbag supplements the protection provided by
safety belts. Airbags distribute the force of the
impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper
body, stopping the occupant more gradually.
76
But the frontal airbags would not help you in many
types of collisions, including rollovers, rear
impacts, and many side impacts, primarily because
an occupant’s motion is not toward the airbag.
Side impact airbags would not help you in many
types of collisions, including many frontal or
near frontal collisions, rollovers, and rear impacts,
primarily because an occupant’s motion is not
toward those airbags.
What Will You See After an Airbag
Inflates?
After the frontal and seat-mounted side impact
airbags inflate, they quickly deflate, so quickly that
some people may not even realize the airbags
inflated. Roof-mounted side impact airbags
are designed to deflate more slowly and may still
be partially inflated minutes after the vehicle
comes to rest. Some components of the airbag
module — the steering wheel hub for the driver’s
airbag, the instrument panel for the right front
passenger’s airbag, the side of the seatback
closest to the door for seat-mounted side impact
airbags, and the area along the ceiling of your
vehicle near the side windows for roof-mounted
side impact airbags — may be hot for a short time.
Airbags should never be regarded as anything
more than a supplement to safety belts, and then
only in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal
collisions for the driver’s and right front
passenger’s frontal airbags, and only in moderate
to severe side collisions for side impact airbags.
77
The parts of the airbag that come into contact with
you may be warm, but not too hot to touch.
There may be some smoke and dust coming from
the vents in the deflated airbags. Airbag inflation
does not prevent the driver from seeing out of the
windshield or being able to steer the vehicle,
nor does it prevent people from leaving the vehicle.
Your vehicle has a feature that may automatically
unlock the doors, turn the interior lamps on when
the airbags inflate and turn on the hazard warning
flashers. You can lock the doors, turn the interior
lamps off, and turn the hazard warning flashers on
by using the controls for those features.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate the
airbag, windshields are broken by vehicle
deformation. Additional windshield breakage may
also occur from the right front passenger airbag.
{CAUTION:
• Airbags are designed to inflate only once.
After an airbag inflates, you will need some new
parts for the airbag system. If you do not get
them, the airbag system will not be there to help
protect you in another crash. A new system will
include airbag modules and possibly other
parts. The service manual for your vehicle
covers the need to replace other parts.
When an airbag inflates, there may be
dust in the air. This dust could cause
breathing problems for people with a
history of asthma or other breathing
trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the
vehicle should get out as soon as it is
safe to do so. If you have breathing
problems but cannot get out of the vehicle
after an airbag inflates, then get fresh air
by opening a window or a door. If you
experience breathing problems following
an airbag deployment, you should seek
medical attention.
• Your vehicle has a crash sensing and
diagnostic module which records information
after a crash. See Vehicle Data Collection
• Let only qualified technicians work on the
airbag system. Improper service can mean
that an airbag system will not work properly.
See your dealer for service.
78
The passenger sensing system will turn off the
right front passenger’s frontal airbag under certain
conditions. The driver’s airbags are not part of
the passenger sensing system.
Passenger Sensing System
Your vehicle has a passenger sensing system for
the right front passenger position. The passenger
airbag status indicator will be visible when you
turn your ignition key to ON or START. The words
ON and OFF or the symbol for on and off, will
be visible on the rearview mirror during the system
check. When the system check is complete,
either the word ON or the word OFF, or the symbol
for on or the symbol for off will be visible. See
The passenger sensing system works with
sensors that are part of the right front passenger’s
seat. The sensors are designed to detect the
presence of a properly-seated occupant and
determine if the passenger’s frontal airbag should
be enabled (may inflate) or not.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if
they are restrained in the rear rather than the front
seat. We recommend that child restraints be
secured in a rear seat, including an infant riding in
a rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in a
forward-facing child seat and an older child riding
in a booster seat.
United States
Canada
79
Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate
a rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sun
visor says, “Never put a rear-facing child seat
in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
CAUTION: (Continued)
Even though the passenger sensing
system is designed to turn off the
passenger’s frontal airbag if the system
detects a rear-facing child restraint, no
system is fail-safe, and no one can
{CAUTION:
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend
that rear-facing child restraints be secured
in the rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can
be seriously injured or killed if the right
front passenger’s airbag inflates. This is
because the back of the rear-facing child
restraint would be very close to the
inflating airbag.
If you need to secure a forward-facing
child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as
far back as it will go. It is better to secure
the child restraint in a rear seat.
CAUTION: (Continued)
80
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn
off the right front passenger’s frontal airbag if:
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove
the child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the
child restraint following the child restraint
manufacturer’s directions and refer to Securing a
on page 63.
• The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.
• The system determines that an infant is
present in a rear-facing infant seat.
• The system determines that a small child is
present in a forward-facing child restraint.
If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to
make sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not
pressing the child restraint into the seat cushion.
If this happens, slightly recline the vehicle’s
seatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible.
Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped
under the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,
adjust the head restraint.
• The system determines that a small child is
present in a booster seat.
• A right front passenger takes his/her weight off
of the seat for a period of time.
• The right front passenger seat is occupied by
a smaller person, such as a child who has
outgrown child restraints.
• There is a critical problem with the airbag
system or the passenger sensing system.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the
child restraint in a rear seat position in the
vehicle and check with your dealer.
When the passenger sensing system has turned
off the passenger’s frontal airbag, the off indicator
in the rearview mirror will light and stay lit to
remind you that the airbag is off. See Passenger
The passenger sensing system is designed to
enable (may inflate) the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag anytime the system senses
that a person of adult size is sitting properly
in the right front passenger’s seat. When the
81
passenger sensing system has allowed the airbag
to be enabled, the on indicator will light and
stay lit to remind you that the airbag is active.
For some children who have outgrown child
restraints and for very small adults, the passenger
sensing system may or may not turn off the right
front passenger’s frontal airbag, depending upon
the person’s seating posture and body build.
Everyone in your vehicle who has outgrown
child restraints should wear a safety belt
properly — whether or not there is an airbag for
that person.
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat, but the off indicator is lit, it
could be because that person is not sitting properly
in the seat. If this happens, turn the vehicle off
and ask the person to place the seatback in
the fully upright position, then sit upright in the
seat, centered on the seat cushion, with the
person’s legs comfortably extended. Restart the
vehicle and have the person remain in this position
for about two minutes. This will allow the system
to detect that person and then enable the
passenger’s airbag.
82
A thick layer of additional material such as a
blanket, or aftermarket equipment such as seat
covers, seat heaters and seat massagers
can affect how well the passenger sensing
system operates. Remove any additional material
from the seat cushion before reinstalling or
securing the child restraint or small occupant.
You may want to consider not using seat covers
or other aftermarket equipment if your vehicle
has the passenger sensing system. See Adding
on page 85 for more information about
modifications that can affect how the system
operates.
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light in the
instrument panel cluster ever comes on
and stays on, it means that something
may be wrong with the airbag system.
If this ever happens, have the vehicle
serviced promptly, because an adult-size
person sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat may not have the
protection of the frontal airbag. See
more on this, including important safety
information.
83
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle
{CAUTION:
Airbags affect how your vehicle should be
serviced. There are parts of the airbag system in
several places around your vehicle. You do
not want the system to inflate while someone is
working on your vehicle. Your dealer and the
service manual have information about servicing
your vehicle and the airbag system. To purchase a
service manual, see Service Publications
For up to 10 seconds after the ignition
key is turned off and the battery is
disconnected, an airbag can still inflate
during improper service. You can be
injured if you are close to an airbag when
it inflates. Avoid yellow connectors. They
are probably part of the airbag system. Be
sure to follow proper service procedures,
and make sure the person performing
work for you is qualified to do so.
The airbag system does not need regular
maintenance.
84
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get
my vehicle modified. How can I find out
whether this will affect my airbag system?
A: Changing or moving any parts of the
front seats, safety belts, the airbag sensing
and diagnostic module, the inside rearview
mirror, steering wheel, ceiling headliner, ceiling
and pillar garnish trim, or airbag wiring can
affect the operation of the airbag system.
If you have questions, call Customer
Q: Is there anything I might add to the front
or sides of the vehicle that could keep the
airbags from working properly?
A: Yes. If you add things that change your
vehicle’s frame, bumper system, front
end or side sheet metal or height, they may
keep the airbag system from working properly.
Also, the airbag system may not work
properly if you relocate any of the airbag
sensors. If you have any questions about this,
you should contact Customer Assistance
before you modify your vehicle. The phone
numbers and addresses for Customer
Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure in this manual.
page 482.
Assistance. The phone numbers and
addresses for Customer Assistance are in
Step Two of the Customer Satisfaction
Procedure in this manual. See Customer
85
Notice: If you damage the covering for the
driver’s or the right front passenger’s airbag,
or the airbag covering on the driver’s and
right front passenger’s seatback, or the side
impact airbag covering on the ceiling near the
side windows, the bag may not work properly.
You may have to replace the airbag module
in the steering wheel, both the airbag module
and the instrument panel for the right front
passenger’s airbag, the airbag module
and seatback for the driver’s and right front
passenger’s seat-mounted side impact airbags,
or side impact airbag module and ceiling
covering for the roof-mounted side impact
airbag. Do not open or break the airbag
coverings.
Restraint System Check
Checking the Restraint Systems
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder
light and all your belts, buckles, latch plates,
retractors and anchorages are working properly.
Look for any other loose or damaged safety
belt system parts. If you see anything that might
keep a safety belt system from doing its job, have
it repaired. Keep safety belts clean and dry.
information.
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in
a crash. They can rip apart under impact forces.
If a belt is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
Also look for any opened or broken airbag
covers, and have them repaired or replaced. The
airbag system does not need regular maintenance.
86
If belts are cut or damaged, replace them.
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
Collision damage also may mean you will need to
have LATCH system, safety belt or seat parts
repaired or replaced. New parts and repairs may
be necessary even if the belt or LATCH system
was not being used at the time of the collision.
{CAUTION:
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag
system parts. See the part on the airbag system
earlier in this section.
A crash can damage the restraint systems
in your vehicle. A damaged restraint
system may not properly protect the
person using it, resulting in serious injury
or even death in a crash. To help make
sure your restraint systems are working
properly after a crash, have them
If the frontal airbags inflate, you will also need to
replace the driver’s and right front passenger’s
safety belt buckle assembly. Be sure to do
so. Then the new buckle assembly will be there to
help protect you in a collision.
inspected and any necessary
After a crash you may need to replace the driver
and front passenger’s safety belt buckle
replacements made as soon as possible.
assemblies, even if the frontal airbags have not
deployed. The driver and front passenger’s safety
belt buckle assemblies contain the safety belt
pretensioners. Have your safety belt pretensioners
checked if your vehicle has been in a collision,
or if your airbag readiness light stays on after you
start your vehicle or while you are driving. See
If you have had a crash, do you need new belts or
LATCH system parts?
After a very minor collision, nothing may be
necessary. But if the belts were stretched, as they
would be if worn during a more severe crash,
then you need new parts.
If the LATCH system was being used during a
more severe crash, you may need new LATCH
system parts.
87
✍ NOTES
88
Section 2
Features and Controls
90
One key works all of the
lock cylinders on the
vehicle.
Remote Keyless Entry System
Your keyless entry system operates on a radio
frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry
Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Your vehicle has an Immobilizer Vehicle
Theft-Deterrent System. The key has a
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
transponder in the key head that matches a
decoder in the vehicle’s steering column. If a
replacement key or any additional key is needed,
you must purchase it from your dealer. The
key will have PK3+ stamped on it. Keep the bar
code tag that came with the original keys. Give this
tag to your dealer if you need a new key made.
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in your
vehicle, you may have to damage the vehicle
to get in. Be sure you have spare keys.
Changes or modifications to this system by other
than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
In an emergency, contact Cadillac Roadside
92
At times you may notice a decrease in operating
range. This is normal for any remote keyless entry
system. If the transmitter does not work or if you
have to stand closer to your vehicle for the
transmitter to work, try this:
Remote Keyless Entry System
Operation
With this feature, you can lock and unlock the
doors or the trunk and turn on your vehicle’s
interior lamps from about 10 feet (3 m) away using
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
supplied with your vehicle.
• Check the distance. You may be too far from
your vehicle. You may need to stand closer
during rainy or snowy weather.
• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects
may be blocking the signal. Take a few steps
to the left or right, hold the transmitter
higher, and try again.
Q (Lock): Press this
symbol on the RKE
transmitter to lock the
doors. This also
arms the theft-deterrent
system.
• Check to determine if battery replacement is
necessary. See “Battery Replacement”
• If you are still having trouble, see your dealer
or a qualified technician for service.
You can program your vehicle so that the exterior
lamps will flash and/or the horn will sound
when you lock the doors with the RKE transmitter.
for more information on programming this feature.
93
W(Unlock): Press this symbol on the RKE
transmitter to unlock the driver’s door. This also
disarms the theft-deterrent system. Press the
button again to unlock the other doors.
Matching Transmitter(s) to Your
Vehicle
Each RKE transmitter is coded to prevent another
transmitter from unlocking your vehicle. If a
transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can be
purchased through your dealer. Remember to
bring any remaining transmitters with you when
you go to your dealer. When the dealer matches
the replacement transmitter to your vehicle,
any remaining transmitters must also be matched.
Once your dealer has coded the new transmitter,
the lost transmitter will not unlock your vehicle.
Each vehicle can have a maximum of four
transmitters matched to it.
You can program your vehicle so that the exterior
lamps will flash when you unlock the doors
with the RKE transmitter. See DIC Vehicle
on programming this feature.
L(Panic Alarm): The RKE transmitter has an
instant panic alarm. Press this button when
the ignition is turned off. The horn will sound and
the exterior lamps will flash for up to 30 seconds.
To stop the instant panic alarm, press this
button again or turn the ignition to ON.
V(Trunk): Press and hold this button for
approximately one second to open the trunk.
The RKE transmitter can be used to recall
the memory settings for up to two drivers. For
more information, see DIC Vehicle Personalization
page 11.
94
Battery Replacement
Under normal use, the battery in the RKE
transmitter should last about four years.
The battery is weak if the transmitter will not work
at the normal range in any location. If you have
to get close to your vehicle before the transmitter
works, it is probably time to change the battery.
Notice: When replacing the battery, use
care not to touch any of the circuitry. Static
from your body transferred to these surfaces
may damage the transmitter.
1. Use a flat thin object to pry open the
transmitter.
3. Insert the new battery as the instructions
under the cover indicate.
2. Remove the old battery, but do not use a
metal object.
4. Snap the front and the back of the transmitter
together. Make sure the cover is on tightly, so
water will not get in.
5. Press any button on the RKE transmitter to
resynchronize the transmitter.
6. Test the operation of the transmitter with the
vehicle.
95
Doors and Locks
CAUTION: (Continued)
Door Locks
• Young children who get into unlocked
vehicles may be unable to get out.
A child can be overcome by extreme
heat and can suffer permanent injuries
or even death from heat stroke.
Always lock your vehicle whenever
you leave it.
• Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down
or stop your vehicle. Locking your
doors can help prevent this from
happening.
{CAUTION:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
• Passengers, especially children, can
easily open the doors and fall out of a
moving vehicle. When a door is
locked, the handle will not open it.
You increase the chance of being
thrown out of the vehicle in a crash if
the doors are not locked. So, wear
safety belts properly and lock the
doors whenever you drive.
There are several ways to lock and unlock your
vehicle.
CAUTION: (Continued)
Because your vehicle has the theft-deterrent
system, you must unlock the doors from the
outside with the key or Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter to avoid setting off the alarm.
If the windows are down and the doors are locked,
do not reach in to manually unlock the vehicle
because you will set off the alarm.
96
From the inside, use the
manual lock levers
located on the door
panels near the
Power Door Locks
The power door lock
switches are located on
the front doors.
windows.
Push down on the manual lock lever to lock the
door. To unlock the door, pull up on the lever.
Central Door Unlocking System
Press the bottom part of the power door lock
switch to lock or the top of the switch to unlock all
the doors at once.
Your vehicle has a central door unlocking feature.
When unlocking the driver’s door, you can
unlock the other doors by holding the key in the
turned position for a few seconds or by quickly
turning the key twice in the lock cylinder.
The rear doors do not have power door lock
switches. You must use the manual levers to lock
and unlock the rear doors when riding in the
rear seat.
97
Delayed Locking
Programmable Automatic
Door Locks
If your vehicle has an automatic transmission, the
vehicle is programmed so that the doors will
lock automatically when all doors are closed, the
ignition is on, and the shift lever is moved out
of PARK (P). The doors will automatically unlock
when you stop the vehicle and move the shift lever
back into PARK (P).
With this feature, you can delay the actual locking
of the doors.
When the power door lock switch or the lock
button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter is pressed when the key is not in the
ignition and the driver’s door is opened, a
chime will sound three times indicating that
delayed locking is active.
If your vehicle has a manual transmission, the
vehicle is programmed so that the doors will lock
automatically after the vehicle speed reaches
5 mph (8 km). The doors will automatically unlock
when the ignition is turned off and the key is
removed from the ignition.
If someone needs to exit the vehicle once the doors
are locked, have that person use the manual lever
or power door lock switch. When the door is closed
again, it will not lock automatically. Use the manual
lever or the power door lock switch to lock the door.
The power door locks can be programmed
through prompts displayed on the Driver
Information Center (DIC). These prompts allow
you to choose various lock and unlock settings.
For more information on programming, see
When all the doors are closed, the doors will lock
automatically after five seconds. If a door is
reopened before five seconds have elapsed, the
five second timer will reset itself once all the doors
are closed again.
You can press the door lock switch or the lock
button on the RKE transmitter again to override
this feature and lock the doors immediately.
You can turn this feature off using the Driver
Information Center (DIC). When delayed locking is
off, the doors will lock immediately when you
press the power door lock switch or the lock button
on the RKE transmitter. See DIC Vehicle
98
The rear doors on your vehicle cannot be opened
from the inside when this feature is in use.
Rear Door Security Locks
Your vehicle has rear door security locks that
prevent passengers from opening the rear doors
on your vehicle from the inside.
When you want to open a rear door when the
security lock is on, do the following:
1. Unlock the door using the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter, the front door power
lock switch or by lifting the rear door
manual lock.
The rear door security
locks are located on the
inside edge of each
rear door. You
must open the rear
doors to access them.
2. Then open the door from the outside.
To cancel the rear door security lock, do the
following:
1. Unlock the door and open it from the outside.
2. Insert your key into the slot next to the
rear door security lock label and turn it
to disengage the lock.
3. Repeat the steps for the other lock.
To use these locks, do the following:
The rear door locks will now work normally.
1. Insert your key into the slot next to the rear
door security lock label and turn it to engage
the lock.
2. Close the door.
3. Repeat the steps for the other rear door.
99
Lockout Protection
Trunk
If you press the power door lock switch when the
key is in the ignition and any door is open, all
the doors will lock and only the driver’s door will
unlock. If you close the doors, you can lock
them using the remote keyless entry transmitter.
Be sure to remove the key from the ignition
when locking your vehicle.
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to drive with the trunk
lid open because carbon monoxide (CO)
gas can come into your vehicle. You
cannot see or smell CO. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death. If you
must drive with the trunk lid open or if
electrical wiring or other cable connections
must pass through the seal between the
body and the trunk lid:
This feature can be overridden by pressing
the lock button on the remote keyless entry
transmitter or by pressing the power lock switch a
second time.
• Make sure all other windows are shut.
• Turn the fan on your heating or cooling
system to its highest speed and select
the control setting that will force
outside air into your vehicle.
See Climate Control System.
• If you have air outlets on or under
the instrument panel, open them all
the way.
100
If your vehicle has the rear seat pass-through
door, do the following:
Trunk Lock Release
The remote trunk
1. Fold the rear armrest down and open the
pass-through door. See “Rear-Seat Pass
Through” following for more information.
release button is located
on the lower portion
of the driver’s door.
2. Reach upward through the opening to locate
the emergency trunk release handle. See
“Emergency Trunk Release Handle” for more
information.
3. Pull forward on the trunk release handle to
open the trunk lid.
If your vehicle has the split folding rear seat, do
the following:
To use the remote trunk release, the shift lever
must be in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) for a
vehicle with an automatic transmission. The shift
lever must be in NEUTRAL, with the parking brake
set for a vehicle with a manual transmission.
information.
2. Reach upward through the opening to locate
the trunk release handle.
Press the button to open the trunk. You can also
press the button with the trunk symbol on the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to open
the trunk.
3. Pull forward on the trunk release handle to
open the trunk lid.
If your vehicle is ever without power, you can still
access the trunk area. Use one of the following
procedures to manually open the trunk.
101
Rear-Seat Pass Through
Emergency Trunk Release Handle
If your vehicle has the rear seat-pass through
door, you can access the trunk without opening the
trunk lid. This is especially useful when
transporting long items.
To open the door, pull down the rear seat armrest.
Then pull the lever all the way down to release
the door.
To close the door, push it up and back into place.
Then try to open the door without pulling up on
the lever to make sure it is locked into place.
Notice: Do not use the emergency trunk
release handle as a tie-down or anchor point
when securing items in the trunk as it
could damage the handle. The emergency
trunk release handle is only intended to aid a
person trapped in a latched trunk, enabling
them to open the trunk from the inside.
There is a glow-in-the-dark emergency trunk
release handle located on the back wall of the
trunk. This handle will glow following exposure to
light. Pull the release handle toward the front
of the vehicle to open the trunk from the inside.
102
Windows
{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets
in a vehicle with the windows closed is
dangerous. They can be overcome by the
extreme heat and suffer permanent
injuries or even death from heat stroke.
Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or a
pet alone in a vehicle, especially with the
windows closed in warm or hot weather.
103
Express-Down Window
Power Windows
Press the down arrow on the switch to the second
position to activate the express-down feature.
To stop the window as it is lowering, press
the down arrow on the switch again.
The power window
switches are located on
the armrest near
each window.
Express-Up Window
This feature is only on front power windows. Press
the up arrow on the switch to the second position
to activate the express-up feature. To stop the
window as it is raising, press the up arrow again.
Programming the Power Windows
If the battery on your vehicle has been recharged,
disconnected, or is not working, you will need
to reprogram each front power window for
the express-up feature to work. Before
reprogramming, replace or recharge your
vehicle’s battery.
Press the up or down arrows on the switches to
raise or lower the windows.
Your vehicle has Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
that allows you to use the power windows for up
to 10 minutes once the ignition has been
turned off. For more information, see Retained
104
To program each window, follow these steps:
Express Window Anti-Pinch Override
1. With the ignition in ACCESSORY, ON or when
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is active,
press and hold the down arrow on the
power window switch until the window has
fully opened.
{CAUTION:
If express override is activated, the
window will not reverse automatically.
You or others could be injured and the
window could be damaged. Before you
use express override, make sure that all
people and obstructions are clear of the
window path.
2. Press the up arrow on the power window
switch until the window is fully closed.
3. Continue holding the up arrow on the switch
for approximately two seconds after the
window is completely closed.
The window is now reprogrammed. Repeat the
process for the other front window.
In an emergency, the anti-pinch feature can be
overridden in a supervised mode. Hold the window
switch all the way down in the express position.
The window will rise for as long as the switch
is held. Once the switch is released, the express
mode is re-activated.
Express Window Anti-Pinch Feature
If any object is in the path of the window when the
express-up is active, the window will stop at the
obstruction and automatically reverse to a
preset factory position. Weather conditions such
as severe icing may also cause the window
to automatically reverse. The window will return to
normal operation once the obstruction or
condition is removed.
In this mode, the window can still close on an
object in its path. Use care when using the
override mode.
105
Window Lockout
Sun Visors
This feature allows you to disable the passenger
window switches.
Swing down the primary visor to block out glare.
It can also be detached from the center mount and
moved to the side to block glare from that
direction.
The passenger window
lockout button is located
below the power
window switches on the
driver’s door armrest.
The driver’s visor may also have buttons for a
built-in garage door opener. See Universal Home
information.
Lighted Visor Vanity Mirror
Pull the visor down and lift the cover to access the
mirror. A light comes on when the cover is lifted
and goes out when it is closed.
Press the button to disable the passenger window
controls. The light on the button will illuminate,
indicating that the feature is in use. The passenger
windows still can be raised or lowered using the
driver’s window switches when the lockout feature
is active.
To restore power to the passenger windows, press
the button again. The light on the button will go out.
You can program this feature to disable all
passenger windows or only the rear passenger
windows. See DIC Vehicle Personalization
on page 239 for more information.
106
To arm the system, do the following:
Theft-Deterrent Systems
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some
cities. Although your vehicle has a number of
theft-deterrent features, we know that nothing we
put on it can make it impossible to steal.
1. Lock the door using the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter or the power door
lock switch.
2. Close all the doors. The security light will
come on. It should go off within approximately
30 seconds. Your security system is now
armed.
Theft-Deterrent System
If a door or a trunk is opened without a key or a
RKE transmitter, the horn will sound and the lamps
will flash for up to 30 seconds.
If your vehicle has this
feature, the security
light is located on
the instrument panel
cluster.
The theft-deterrent system will not arm if you lock
the doors with a key or use the manual door
lock. It activates only if you use the RKE
transmitter or the power lock on the door.
If the ignition is off and a door is open, the
security light will flash, reminding you to arm the
theft-deterrent system.
107
To avoid activating the alarm by accident do the
following:
Testing the Alarm
1. Roll down the window, then get out of the
vehicle, keeping the door open.
• Lock the door with the key or the manual door
lock after the doors are closed if you do not
want to arm the theft-deterrent system.
2. From outside of the vehicle, with the door
open, lock the vehicle using the power door
lock switch or the RKE transmitter and
close the door. Wait approximately 30 seconds
until the security light goes off.
• Always unlock a door with a key or use the
RKE transmitter. Pressing the unlock button
on the RKE transmitter disables the
theft-deterrent system.
3. Reach in and unlock the door using the
manual lock and open the door. The horn
will sound and the exterior lamps will flash.
Unlocking a door any other way will activate
the alarm when a door or the trunk is opened.
If you activate the alarm by accident, unlock the
driver’s door with your key. You can also turn
off the alarm by using the unlock button on
the RKE transmitter, or by starting the vehicle with
a valid key.
The alarm can be turned off by unlocking the
driver’s door with the key, using the unlock button
on the RKE transmitter or by starting the car
with a valid key.
If the alarm does not sound when it should, check
to see if the horn works. The horn fuse may be
blown. To replace the fuse, see Fuses and Circuit
need to be replaced, you may need to have your
vehicle serviced.
To reduce the possibility of theft, always arm the
theft-deterrent system when leaving your vehicle.
108
Immobilizer
Immobilizer Operation
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
Your vehicle has a
passive theft-deterrent
system.
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
The system works when the key is turned to ON.
The key uses a transponder that matches an
immobilizer control unit in your vehicle. Only the
correct key will start the vehicle. If the key is ever
damaged, you may not be able to start your
vehicle.
Changes or modifications to this system by other
than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
109
When trying to start the vehicle, if the engine does
not start and the security light comes on, the
key may have a damaged transponder. Turn the
ignition off and try again.
To program a new key do the following:
1. Verify that the new key has PK3+
stamped on it.
2. Insert the current driver’s key in the ignition
and start the engine. If the engine will not
start see your dealer for service.
3. After the engine has started, turn the key to
OFF, and remove the key.
If the engine still does not start, and the key
appears to be undamaged, try another ignition
key. At this time, you may also want to check the
page 447. If the engine still does not start with the
other key, your vehicle needs service. If your
vehicle does start, the first key may be faulty. See
your dealer who can service the theft-deterrent
system and have a new key made.
4. Insert the key to be programmed and turn it to
ON within ten seconds of removing the
previous key.
5. The security light will turn off once the key
has been programmed. It may not be
apparent that the security light went on due to
how quickly the key is programmed.
It is possible for the theft-deterrent system decoder
to learn the transponder value of a new or
replacement key. Up to 10 additional keys may be
programmed for the vehicle. The following
6. Repeat the Steps 1 through 4 if additional
keys are to be programmed.
procedure is for programming additional keys only.
If the security light comes on and stays on while
driving, you will be able to restart the engine if you
turn it off. The theft-deterrent system, however,
is not working properly and must be serviced
by your dealer. Your vehicle is not protected by
the theft-deterrent system at this time.
Canadian Owners: If you lose or damage your
keys, only a GM dealer can service the
theft-deterrent system to have new keys made.
To program additional keys you will require two
current driver’s keys. You must add a step to the
following procedure. After Step 2, repeat Steps 1
and 2 with the second current driver’s key. Then
continue with Step 3.
In an emergency, contact Cadillac Roadside
110
If these procedures are not followed, your
Starting and Operating Your
Vehicle
engine, axle, or other parts could be damaged.
Avoid making hard stops for the first
200 miles (322 km) or so. During this time your
new brake linings are not yet broken in.
Hard stops with new linings can mean
premature wear and earlier replacement. Follow
this break-in guideline every time you get
new linings.
New Vehicle Break-In
Notice: Your vehicle does not need an
elaborate break-in. But it will perform better in
the long run if you follow these guidelines
for the first 500 miles (805 km):
Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See
towing capabilities of your vehicle and more
information.
• Do not drive at any one constant speed,
fast or slow.
• Do not exceed 70 mph (113 km/h).
Following break-in, engine speed and load can
be gradually increased.
• Do not make full-throttle starts; also refrain
from using the full throttle while driving.
Avoid downshifting to brake, or slow,
the vehicle.
111
A (OFF): This is the only position in which the
key can be inserted or removed. This position
locks the ignition and shifter on automatic
transmission vehicles, and the ignition and steering
wheel on manual transmission vehicles.
Ignition Positions
With the key in the ignition switch, you can turn
the key to four different positions.
B (ACCESSORY): This position allows you to use
things like the radio and the windshield wipers
when the engine is off. This position will allow you
to turn off the engine.
C (ON): This position is for driving. If your vehicle
has an automatic transmission and you turn off
the engine, the transmission will lock. If you need
to shift the transmission out of PARK (P), the
ignition key has to be in ACCESSORY or ON.
The battery could be drained if you leave the key
in the ACCESSORY or ON position with the
engine off. You may not be able to start your
vehicle if the battery is allowed to drain for
an extended period of time.
Notice: Using a tool to force the key from its
cylinder could cause damage or break the
key. Use the correct key and turn the key only
with your hand. Make sure the key is all the
way in. If it is and you have a manual
transmission vehicle, turn the steering wheel
left and right while you turn the key hard.
If none of this works, then your vehicle needs
service.
D (START): This position starts the engine.
112
Key In the Ignition
Key Release Button (Manual
Transmission)
Never leave your vehicle with the keys inside, as it
is an easy target for joy riders or thieves. If you
leave the key in the ignition and park your vehicle,
a chime will sound, when you open the driver’s
door. Always remember to remove the key
from the ignition and take it with you. This will lock
the ignition and transmission. Also, always
remember to lock the doors.
The key cannot be
removed from the
ignition of a manual
transmission vehicle,
unless the key release
button is used.
The battery could be drained if you leave the key
in the ignition while your vehicle is parked.
You may not be able to start your vehicle after it
has been parked for an extended period of time.
To remove the key, do the following:
1. Turn the key to ACCESSORY.
2. Press and release the button and then turn
the key to OFF.
Do not hold the button in while turning the key
to OFF.
3. Pull the key straight out of the ignition switch.
113
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
Starting the Engine
The following accessories on your vehicle may be
used for up to 10 minutes after the ignition key
is turned from ON to OFF:
Automatic Transmission
Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N). Your engine will not start
in any other position — that is a safety feature.
To restart when you are already moving, use
NEUTRAL (N) only.
• Radio
• Power Windows
• Audio Steering Wheel Controls
(CTS, if programmed)
Notice: Do not try to shift to PARK (P) if
your vehicle is moving. If you do, you could
damage the transmission. Shift to PARK (P)
only when your vehicle is stopped.
• Sunroof
Power to these accessories stops after 10 minutes
or if a door is opened. If an additional 10 minutes
of power is needed, close all the doors and
turn the ignition key to ON and then back to OFF.
114
prevent cranking motor damage. To prevent
starter-motor gear damage, this system
also prevents cranking if the engine is already
running. The engine cranking can be
stopped by turning the ignition switch to the
ACCESSORY or OFF position.
Manual Transmission
The shift lever should be in NEUTRAL and the
parking brake engaged. Hold the clutch pedal to the
floor and start the engine. Your vehicle will not start
if the clutch pedal is not all the way down — that is
a safety feature.
2. If your engine will not start, or starts but then
stops, it could be flooded with too much
gasoline. Try pushing your accelerator pedal
all the way to the floor and holding it there
as you turn the key to START. If the vehicle
starts briefly but then stops again, do the
same thing.
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn
your ignition key to START. Then, let go of
the key; the engine will start automatically.
The idle speed will go down as your engine
gets warm. Do not race the engine
immediately after starting it. Operate the
engine and transmission gently until the oil
warms up and lubricates all moving parts.
Notice: Your engine is designed to work with
the electronics in your vehicle. If you add
electrical parts or accessories, you could
change the way the engine operates. Before
adding electrical equipment, check with
your dealer. If you do not, your engine might
not perform properly. Any resulting damage
would not be covered by your vehicle’s
warranty.
Your vehicle has a Computer-Controlled
Cranking System. This feature assists in
starting the engine and protects the electrical
system. If the ignition key is turned to the
START position, and then released when the
engine begins cranking, the engine will
continue cranking until the vehicle starts or
until it exceeds the maximum cranking
time allowed, approximately 15 seconds to
115
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
Your vehicle may have an engine coolant heater.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical
cord. For the 2.8L V6 and the 3.6L V6
engines, the cord is located in the engine
compartment on the passenger’s side of the
vehicle in front of the fuse block. For the
6.0L V8 engine, the cord is located in
the engine compartment on the driver’s side
of the vehicle near the inner fender and above
the strut.
In very cold weather, 0°F (−18°C) or colder,
the engine coolant heater can help. You will get
easier starting and better fuel economy during
engine warm-up.
Usually, the coolant heater should be plugged in a
minimum of four hours prior to starting your
vehicle. At temperatures above 32°F (0°C), use of
the coolant heater is not required. Your vehicle
may also have an internal thermostat in the
plug end of the cord. This will prevent operation of
the engine coolant heater when the temperature
is at or above 0°F (−18°C) as noted on the cord.
Remove the plastic cap to access the plug.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC
outlet.
116
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug
and store the cord as it was before to keep it
away from moving engine parts. If you do
not, it could be damaged.
{CAUTION:
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded
outlet could cause an electrical shock.
Also, the wrong kind of extension cord
could overheat and cause a fire. You
could be seriously injured. Plug the cord
into a properly grounded three-prong
110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will not
reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong
extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.
How long should you keep the coolant heater
plugged in? The answer depends on the outside
temperature, the kind of oil you have, and some
other things. Instead of trying to list everything here,
we ask that you contact your dealer in the area
where you will be parking your vehicle. The dealer
can give you the best advice for that particular area.
117
Automatic Transmission Operation
The shift lever is located on the center console
between the front seats.
{CAUTION:
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P)
with the parking brake firmly set. Your
vehicle can roll.
There are several
different positions for
the shift lever.
Do not leave your vehicle when the engine
is running unless you have to. If you have
left the engine running, the vehicle can
move suddenly. You or others could be
injured. To be sure your vehicle will not
move, even when you are on fairly level
ground, always set your parking brake
and move the shift lever to PARK (P).
page 328.
PARK (P): This position locks the rear wheels. It
is the best position to use when you start the
engine because your vehicle cannot move easily.
118
Make sure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P)
before starting the engine. Your vehicle has an
automatic transmission shift lock control system.
You must fully apply your regular brakes first
and then press the shift lever button before you
can shift from PARK (P) when the ignition key is in
ON. If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease
pressure on the shift lever and push the shift lever
all the way into PARK (P) as you maintain
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, the engine does
not connect with the wheels. To restart when
you are already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.
You can also use NEUTRAL (N) when your
vehicle is being towed.
{CAUTION:
brake application. Then press the shift lever button
and move the shift lever into another gear. See
Shifting into a drive gear while your
engine is running at high speed is
dangerous. Unless your foot is firmly on
the brake pedal, your vehicle could move
very rapidly. You could lose control and
hit people or objects. Do not shift into a
drive gear while your engine is running at
high speed.
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your
vehicle is moving forward could damage
the transmission. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Shift to
REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is
stopped.
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) or
At low vehicle speeds, you can also use
REVERSE (R) to rock your vehicle back and forth
to get out of snow, ice, or sand without damaging
your transmission. See If Your Vehicle is Stuck
additional information.
NEUTRAL (N) with the engine running at high
speed may damage the transmission. The
repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Be sure the engine is not running at high
speed when shifting your vehicle.
119
DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving. It
provides the best fuel economy for your vehicle. If
you need more power for passing, and you are:
Driver Shift Control (DSC)
Notice: If you drive your vehicle at high
RPMs without upshifting while using Driver
Shift Control (DSC), you could damage
your vehicle. Always upshift when necessary
while using DSC.
• Going less than 35 mph (55 km/h), push
the accelerator pedal about halfway down.
• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push
the accelerator all the way down.
Your automatic transmission has a Driver Shift
Control (DSC) feature that allows you to change
gears similar to a manual transmission. To use the
DSC feature:
The transmission will shift down to a lower
gear and have more power.
Downshifting the transmission in slippery road
conditions could result in skidding, see Skidding
1. Slide the shift lever over from DRIVE (D) to
the right into the DSC area.
The sport mode light in
the instrument panel
cluster will come on.
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the
vehicle in one place on a hill using only the
accelerator pedal may damage the
transmission. If you are stuck, do not spin the
tires. When stopping on a hill, use the
brakes to hold the vehicle in place.
120
If you do not move the shift lever forward or
rearward, the vehicle will be in sport mode.
When you are in the sport mode the vehicle
will still shift automatically. While driving
in sport mode, the transmission may remain in
a gear longer than it would in the normal
driving mode based on braking, throttle input,
and vehicle lateral acceleration.
The transmission will only allow you to shift into
gears appropriate for the vehicle speed and engine
Revolutions Per Minute (RPM). The transmission
will not automatically shift to the next higher
gear if the engine RPM is too high.
If shifting is prevented for any reason, the currently
selected gear will flash multiple times, indicating
that the transmission has not shifted gears.
2. To enter the DSC mode, press the shift lever
forward to upshift or rearward to downshift.
While in the DSC mode, the transmission will
automatically downshift when the vehicle comes to
a stop and while quickly applying the accelerator
to increase speed. This will allow for more
power during take-off.
The odometer on the instrument panel cluster will
change from the mileage to a number indicating
the requested gear range when moving the
shift lever forward or rearward. See Speedometer
on the odometer.
When accelerating your vehicle from a stop in
snowy and icy conditions, you may want to shift
into second gear. A higher gear ratio allows you to
gain more traction on slippery surfaces.
While using the DSC feature, the vehicle will have
firmer shifting and increased performance. You
can use this for sport driving or when climbing or
descending hills, to stay in gear longer, or to
down shift for more power or engine braking.
121
Here is how to operate your transmission:
Manual Transmission Operation
FIRST (1): Press the clutch pedal and shift into
FIRST (1). Then slowly let up on the clutch
pedal as you press the accelerator pedal.
If your vehicle has a manual transmission, the shift
lever is located on the center console between
the front seats. The following explains how
to operate the manual transmission.
For the CTS, you can shift into FIRST (1) when
you are going less than 25 mph (40 km/h). If
you come to a complete stop and it is hard to shift
into FIRST (1), put the shift lever in NEUTRAL
and let up on the clutch. Press the clutch
pedal back down. Then shift into FIRST (1).
For the CTS-V, you can shift into FIRST (1) when
you are going less than 40 mph (64 km/h).
SECOND (2): Press the clutch pedal as you let
up on the accelerator pedal and shift into
SECOND (2). Then, slowly let up on the clutch
pedal as you press the accelerator pedal.
CTS
CTS-V
THIRD (3), FOURTH (4), FIFTH (5) and
SIXTH (6): Shift into THIRD (3), FOURTH (4),
FIFTH (5) and SIXTH (6) the same way you do for
SECOND (2). Slowly let up on the clutch pedal
as you press the accelerator pedal.
These are the shift patterns for the six-speed
manual transmissions.
To stop, let up on the accelerator pedal and press
the brake pedal. Just before the vehicle stops,
press the clutch pedal and the brake pedal,
and shift to NEUTRAL.
122
NEUTRAL: Use this position when you start or
idle your engine. Your shift lever is in NEUTRAL
when it is centered in the shift pattern, not in
any gear.
Shift Speeds (Manual Transmission)
{CAUTION:
REVERSE (R): To back up, press down the
clutch pedal, completely stop the vehicle, and shift
into REVERSE (R). Let up on the clutch pedal
slowly while pressing the accelerator pedal.
If you skip a gear when you downshift,
you could lose control of your vehicle.
You could injure yourself or others. Do
not shift down more than one gear at a
time when you downshift.
For the CTS, pull the shift lever quickly to the left
and then forward into gear.
For the CTS-V, the transmission has a safety
feature that prevents you from shifting into
REVERSE (R) while the vehicle is driven at
speeds greater than 3 mph (5 km/h). You will be
locked out if you try to shift into REVERSE (R)
while your vehicle is moving faster than 3 mph
(5 km/h). If you have turned your ignition off and
wish to park your vehicle in REVERSE (R),
you will have to overcome the lockout mechanism
by moving the shift lever quickly to the right,
and immediately forward into gear using more
force than a normal shift.
Notice: If you skip more than one gear when
you downshift, or if you race the engine
when you release the clutch pedal while
downshifting, you could damage the engine,
clutch, driveshaft or the transmission. Do
not skip gears or race the engine when
downshifting.
If the vehicle speed drops below 20 mph
(32 km/h), or if the engine is not running smoothly,
you should downshift to the next lower gear.
You may have to downshift two or more gears to
keep the engine running smoothly or for good
performance.
123
This message comes on when:
Skip Shift (CTS-V)
• The engine coolant temperature is higher than
169°F (76°C) and you are going 15 to 19 mph
(24 to 31 km/h).
1r4: This message may appear in the message
center in the speedometer during light throttle, low
speed maneuvers (15 to 19 mph (24 to 31 km/h)).
When this message appears, you can only shift
from FIRST (1) to FOURTH (4) instead of
FIRST (1) to SECOND (2).
• You are pressing the accelerator pedal less
then a quarter of the way down.
Parking Brake
page 217 for more information.
The parking brake pedal
is located on the lower
portion of the instrument
panel to the left of the
steering wheel.
During the shift from FIRST (1) to FOURTH (4),
pull the shift lever straight back using light force on
the shift lever. You must complete the shift into
FOURTH (4) to turn off this feature. This helps get
the best possible fuel economy. The skip shift
feature is turned backed on when the vehicle is at
a complete stop and the digital speedometer
reads 0 mph (0 km/h).
Notice: Forcing the shift lever into
any gear except FOURTH (4), when the
One – to – Four Shift message comes on,
may damage the transmission. Shift only
from FIRST (1) to FOURTH (4) when the
One – to – Four Shift message comes on.
To set the parking brake, hold the regular brake
pedal down with your right foot and push the
parking brake pedal down with your left foot.
124
If the ignition is on, the brake system warning light
on the instrument panel cluster should come
on. If it does not, you need to have your vehicle
serviced. See Brake System Warning Light
on page 197 for more information.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause
premature wear or damage to brake system
parts. Verify that the parking brake is fully
released and the brake warning light is
off before driving.
A warning chime will sound if the parking brake is
set, the ignition is on, and the vehicle begins to
move. To stop the chime, fully release the parking
brake.
If you are towing a trailer and parking on a hill,
information.
To release the parking brake, pull the release
lever located to the left of the steering wheel on
the instrument panel.
125
To shift into PARK (P), use the following steps:
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot.
Shifting Into Park (P)
(Automatic Transmission)
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by
pressing the button on the front of the
shift lever while pushing the lever all the way
toward the front of the vehicle. Release
the button.
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your
vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly
set. Your vehicle can roll. If you have left
the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured.
To be sure your vehicle will not move,
even when you are on fairly level ground,
use the steps that follow. If you are
page 328.
3. With your right foot still holding the brake
pedal down, set the parking brake with
for more information.
4. Turn the key to OFF.
5. Remove the key from the ignition switch and
take it with you. If you can leave your vehicle
with the key in your hand, the vehicle is in
PARK (P).
126
Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine
Running (Automatic Transmission)
Torque Lock (Automatic Transmission)
If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift
your transmission into PARK (P) properly,
the weight of the vehicle may put too much force
on the parking pawl in the transmission. You
may find it difficult to pull the shift lever out
of PARK (P). This is called “torque lock.” To
prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and then
shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave
the driver’s seat. To find out how, see “Shifting Into
PARK (P)” listed previously.
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle
with the engine running. Your vehicle
could move suddenly if the shift lever is
not fully in PARK (P) with the parking
brake firmly set. And, if you leave the
vehicle with the engine running, it could
overheat and even catch fire. You or
others could be injured. Do not leave your
vehicle with the engine running.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have
another vehicle push yours a little uphill to
take some of the pressure from the parking pawl
in the transmission, so you can pull the shift
lever out of PARK (P).
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P)
and your parking brake is firmly set before you
leave it. After you have moved the shift lever into
PARK (P), hold the regular brake pedal down.
Then, see if you can move the shift lever
away from PARK (P) without first pushing the
button on the shift lever. If you can, it means that
the shift lever was not fully locked into PARK (P).
127
Shifting Out of Park (P)
Parking Your Vehicle
(Manual Transmission)
Your vehicle has an automatic transmission shift
lock control system.
Before you get out of your vehicle, place the shift
lever in REVERSE (R) and firmly apply the
parking brake. Turn the ignition key to OFF, press
the release button and remove the key. See
page 112 for more information.
To shift out of PARK (P):
1. Apply the regular brake pedal.
2. Then press the shift lever button.
3. Move the shift lever to the desired gear.
If you are still unable to shift out of PARK (P):
1. Fully release the shift lever button.
page 328.
2. While holding down the brake pedal, press
the shift lever button again.
3. Move the shift lever to the desired gear.
If you still cannot move the shift lever from
PARK (P), consult your dealer.
128
Engine Exhaust
CAUTION: (Continued)
• Your vehicle was damaged when
driving over high points on the road
or over road debris.
• Repairs were not done correctly.
• Your vehicle or exhaust system has
been modified improperly.
{CAUTION:
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the
gas carbon monoxide (CO), which you
cannot see or smell. It can cause
unconsciousness and death.
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into
your vehicle:
• Drive it only with all the windows
down to blow out any CO; and
• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
You might have exhaust coming in if:
• Your exhaust system sounds strange
or different.
• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
• Your vehicle was damaged in a
collision.
CAUTION: (Continued)
130
Running the Engine While Parked
{CAUTION:
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if
you ever have to, here are some things to know.
It can be dangerous to get out of your
vehicle if the automatic transmission shift
lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. Do not leave your vehicle when the
engine is running unless you have to.
If you have left the engine running, the
vehicle can move suddenly. You or others
could be injured. To be sure your vehicle
will not move, even when it is on fairly
level ground, always set the parking brake
and move the automatic transmission
shift lever to PARK (P), or the manual
transmission shift lever to NEUTRAL.
{CAUTION:
Idling the engine with the climate control
system off could allow dangerous exhaust
into your vehicle. See the earlier caution
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let
deadly carbon monoxide (CO) into your
vehicle even if the climate control fan is at
the highest setting. One place this can
happen is a garage. Exhaust — with
CO — can come in easily. NEVER park in
a garage with the engine running.
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle will
not move. See Shifting Into Park (P) (Automatic
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.
If you are parking on a hill and if you are pulling a
131
Passenger Airbag Indicator
Mirrors
The mirror may have a passenger airbag indicator
on the mirror glass, just above the buttons. If
the vehicle has this feature, the mirror will display
the word ON, or an airbag symbol in Canada,
when the passenger airbag is enabled. See
information.
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with OnStar®
The vehicle may have an automatic dimming
inside rearview mirror with OnStar® controls. For
Cleaning the Mirror
O(On/Off): The on/off button, located on the
lower left side of the mirror, is used for the
automatic dimming functions of the rearview mirror.
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or
similar material dampened with glass cleaner.
Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror
as that may cause the liquid cleaner to enter
the mirror housing.
Mirror Operation
The automatic dimming feature comes on each
time the vehicle is started. Automatic dimming
reduces the glare of lights from behind the vehicle.
To turn the automatic dimming feature on or off,
press and release the on/off button. The indicator
light will come on when this feature is on.
132
Compass Operation
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with OnStar® and Compass
Press the on/off button once to turn the compass
on or off.
The vehicle may have an automatic dimming
inside rearview mirror with a compass and
OnStar® controls. For more information about
When the ignition and the compass feature are
on, the compass will show two character boxes for
approximately two seconds. After two seconds,
the mirror will display the current compass
direction.
The mirror has an eight-point compass display in
the upper right corner of the mirror. When on,
the compass automatically calibrates, or sets the
driving direction, as the vehicle is driven. If the
vehicle has the navigation option, the direction the
vehicle is facing will be displayed on the
navigation screen.
Compass Calibration
If after two seconds the display does not show a
compass direction, (N for North for example), there
may be a strong magnetic field interfering with
the compass. Such interference may be caused by
a magnetic antenna mount, note pad holder, or
similar object. If the letter C appears in the
compass window, the compass may need to be
reset or calibrated.
O(On/Off): The on/off button is located on the
lower left side of the mirror and is used for
the automatic dimming and compass functions of
the rearview mirror.
The mirror can be calibrated by driving the vehicle
in circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until the
display reads a direction.
Mirror Operation
The automatic dimming feature comes on each
time the vehicle is started.
The compass can be calibrated by pressing and
holding the on/off button until a C is shown in
the compass display.
To turn the automatic dimming feature on or off,
press the on/off button. The indicator light will
illuminate when this feature is on.
133
Compass Variance
Compass variance is the difference between
earth’s magnetic north and true geographic north.
If the mirror is not adjusted for compass
variance, the compass could give false readings.
The mirror is set in zone eight upon leaving
the factory. It will be necessary to adjust the
compass to compensate for compass variance if
the vehicle is driven outside zone eight. Under
certain circumstances, such as a long distance,
cross-country trip, it will be necessary to adjust the
compass variance.
To adjust for compass variance, do the following:
1. Find your current location and variance
zone number on the zone map that follows.
2. Press and hold the on/off button until a zone
number appears on the display.
3. Once the zone number appears on the
display, press the on/off button quickly
until you reach the correct zone number.
If C appears in the compass window,
the compass may need calibration. See
“Compass Calibration” listed previously.
134
Passenger Airbag Indicator
Outside Power Mirrors
The mirror may have a passenger airbag indicator
on the mirror glass, just above the buttons.
If the vehicle has this feature, the mirror will
display the word ON, or an airbag symbol
in Canada, when the passenger airbag is enabled.
more information.
The control on the
driver’s door armrest
operates both outside
rearview mirrors.
Cleaning the Mirror
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or
similar material dampened with glass cleaner.
Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror
as that may cause the liquid cleaner to enter
the mirror housing.
Press the left or right mirror symbol on the
selector switch to choose the driver’s side or
passenger’s side mirror. The center position turns
the control off so that the mirrors will not move
if the control pad is touched.
135
Once a mirror is selected, use the arrows on the
control pad to move the mirror to the correct
direction. Adjust each mirror so you can see the
side of your vehicle and the area behind your
vehicle.
Outside Curb View Assist Mirror
If the vehicle has the memory seat and mirrors,
the passenger’s mirror can be tilted to a
preselected position when the vehicle is shifted
into REVERSE (R). Use this outside curb
view assist feature to view the curb when parallel
parking.
The mirrors can be manually folded inward to
prevent damage when going through an automatic
car wash. To fold, push the mirror toward the
vehicle. To return the mirror to its original position,
push outward. Be sure to return both mirrors to
their original unfolded position before driving.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (R)
and after a five-second delay, the passenger’s
mirror will return to its original position.
If further adjustment is needed after the mirror is
in a tilted position, the mirror controls can be used.
more information.
If the vehicle has the memory package, the mirrors
can be programmed for personalization and
curb view assist. For more information, see
The outside curb view assist can be turned or off
through the Driver Information Center (DIC).
more information.
136
OnStar® System
Outside Convex Mirror
{CAUTION:
A convex mirror can make things (like
other vehicles) look farther away than
they really are. If you cut too sharply into
the right lane, you could hit a vehicle on
your right. Check your inside mirror or
glance over your shoulder before
changing lanes.
OnStar® uses several innovative technologies and
live advisors to provide you with a wide range
of safety, security, information, and convenience
services. If your airbags deploy, the system is
designed to make an automatic call to OnStar®
Emergency where OnStar® advisors can request
emergency services be sent to your location.
If you lock your keys in the vehicle, call OnStar®
at 1-888-4-ONSTAR and they can send a signal to
unlock your doors. If you need roadside
The passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convex
mirror’s surface is curved so that more can be
seen from the driver’s seat. The mirror does not
have a dimming feature.
assistance, press the OnStar® button and they
can contact Roadside Service for you.
Outside Heated Mirrors
When the rear window defogger is turned on, it
also warms both outside rearview mirrors to
help clear them of fog or ice. See “Rear Window
Defogger” under Dual Climate Control System
on page 180 for more information.
137
A complete OnStar® Owner’s Guide and the
Terms and Conditions of the OnStar® Subscription
Service Agreement are included in the vehicle’s
OnStar® Subscriber Information packet located in
your vehicle. For more information, visit
www.onstar.com or www.onstar.ca, contact
OnStar® at 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827), or
press the OnStar® button to speak with an
OnStar® advisor 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
• Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert
• OnStar® Vehicle Diagnostics
• OnStar® Hands-Free Calling
• OnStar® Virtual Advisor
Directions & Connections® Plan
• All Safe & Sound Plan Services
• Driving Directions
OnStar® Services
• RideAssist
For new vehicles that have OnStar®, the Safe &
Sound Plan is included for one year from the date
of purchase. You can extend this plan beyond
the first year, or upgrade to the Directions &
Connections® Plan to meet your needs. For more
information, press the OnStar® button to speak
with an advisor.
• Information and Convenience Services
OnStar® Hands-Free Calling
OnStar® Hands-Free Calling allows OnStar®
subscribers to make and receive calls using voice
commands at the touch of a button. Hands-Free
Calling is fully integrated into the vehicle, and may
be used with Pre-Paid Minute Packages or
linked to a cell phone through OnStar® Shared
Minutes Plan. To find out more, refer to the
OnStar® Owner’s Guide, visit www.onstar.com or
www.onstar.ca, or speak with an OnStar®
advisor by pressing the OnStar® button or calling
1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).
Safe & Sound Plan
• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment
• Emergency Services
• Roadside Assistance
• Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance
• AccidentAssist
138
OnStar® Virtual Advisor
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
Your vehicle may have Virtual Advisor. It is a
feature of OnStar® Hands-Free Calling that uses
your minutes to access weather, local traffic
reports, and stock quotes. By pressing the phone
button and giving a few simple voice commands,
you can browse through the various topics.
Customize your information profile at
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
www.myonstar.com. See the OnStar® Owner’s
guide for more information.
The FCC Grant of Equipment Authorization
Certificate number is KOBGTE05A.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
Universal Home Remote
System
1. This device may not cause interference.
Universal Home Remote System
(With Three Round LED)
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
The Universal Home Remote System provides a
way to replace up to three hand-held
Radio-Frequency (RF) transmitters used to
activate devices such as garage door openers,
security systems, and home lighting.
The Canadian Registration ID number is
3521A-GTE05A.
Changes or modifications to this system by other
than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
139
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
Universal Home Remote System
(With One Triangular LED)
The Universal Home Remote System provides a
way to replace up to three hand-held
radio-frequency (RF) transmitters used to activate
devices such as garage door openers, security
systems, and home lighting.
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
The Canadian Registration ID number is
2791021849A.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
Changes or modifications to this system by other
than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
The FCC Grant of Equipment Authorization
Certificate number is CB2SAHL3.
140
This system provides a way to replace up to three
remote control transmitters used to activate
devices such as garage door openers, security
systems, and home lighting.
Universal Home Remote System
Operation (With Three Round LED)
Do not use the this system with any garage door
opener that does not have the stop and reverse
feature. This includes any garage door opener
model manufactured before April 1, 1982.
Read the instructions completely before attempting
to program the transmitter. Because of the steps
involved, it may be helpful to have another
person available to assist you in programming the
transmitter.
Your vehicle may have the Universal Home Remote
System. If there are three round Light Emitting
Diode (LED) above the Universal Home Remote
System buttons, follow the instructions below. If
there is one triangular LED above the Universal
Home Remote System buttons, follow the
instructions under Universal Home Remote System
Operation (with one triangular LED).
141
Be sure to keep the original remote control
transmitter for use in other vehicles, as well as, for
future programming. You only need the original
remote control transmitter for fixed code
programming. It is also recommended that upon
the sale or lease termination of the vehicle,
the programmed buttons should be erased for
security purposes. See “Erasing your Universal
Home Remote Buttons” later in this section.
Be sure that people and objects are clear of the
garage door or security device you are
programming. When programming a garage door,
it is advised to park outside of the garage.
If you do not know if your garage door opener is a
fixed code or rolling code device, open your
garage door opener’s remote control battery cover.
Your garage door opener is a fixed code device
if there is a panel of switches. If not, your
garage door opener is a rolling code device.
142
Programming Universal Home
Remote — Fixed Code
Fixed Code garage door openers are used for
garage doors produced prior to 1996. Fixed code
uses the same coded signal every time, which
is manually programmed by setting DIP switches
for a unique personal code.
To program up to three channels,
1. Remove the battery cover of the hand-held
transmitter.
Example of Switch Settings
2. Write down the eight to 12 coding switch
settings from left to right. When the switch
is in the up position, write “on,” and when a
switch is in the down position, write “off”.
If a switch is set between the up and down
position, write “middle”.
3. Enter these positions into the Universal Home
Remote System as follows.
Press and release all three buttons at the same
time to put the device into programming mode.
143
5. After entering the switch settings, press and
release all three buttons at the same time.
The indicator lights will turn on.
6. Press and hold the button you would like to
use to control the garage door until the
garage door moves. The indicator light above
the selected button should slowly blink.
You may need to hold the button from five to
55 seconds.
7. Immediately release the button when the
garage door moves. The indicator light will
blink rapidly until programming is complete.
8. Press and release the button again. The
garage door should move, confirming that
programming is successful and complete.
4. The indicator light will blink slowly. In order
from left to right, and within two and one-half
minutes, enter each switch setting into the
Universal Home Remote System. Push
one button for each switch as follows:
To program another device such as an additional
garage door opener, a security device, or
home lighting, repeat Steps 1–8, choosing a
different function button in Step 7 than what you
used for the garage door opener.
• Left button = “on” switch position.
• Right button = “off” switch position.
• Middle button = “middle” switch position.
144
Programming Universal Home
Remote — Rolling Code
Rolling code garage door openers are used for
garage doors produced after 1996 and are
code protected. Rolling code means the coded
signal is changed every time your remote control
garage door opener is used.
Programming a rolling code garage door opener
involves time-sensitive actions, so read the
entire procedure before you begin. If you do not
follow these actions, the device will time out
and you will have to repeat the procedure.
Follow these steps to program up to
three channels:
2. Go to the garage. Locate the garage door
motor head and press and release the
“learn” button.
1. Press the two outside buttons at the same
time for one to two seconds, and immediately
release them.
After pressing the “learn” button, you
have 10 to 30 seconds to complete Step 4
depending on your garage control unit. If you
cannot locate the “learn” button, refer to
the owners guide for your garage door opener.
145
3. Press and hold the button you would like to
use to control the garage door until the
garage door moves. The indicator light, above
the selected button, should slowly blink.
You may need to hold the button from five to
20 seconds.
Reprogramming Universal Home
Remote Buttons
You can reprogram any of the three buttons by
repeating the instructions.
Erasing Universal Home Remote
Buttons
4. Immediately release the button when the
garage door moves. The indicator light will
blink rapidly until programming is complete.
You should erase the programmed buttons when
you sell the vehicle or terminate your lease.
5. Press and release the button again. The
garage door should move, confirming that
programming is successful and complete.
To erase either rolling code or fixed code on the
Universal Home Remote device, do the following:
To program another device such as an additional
garage door opener, a security device, or
home lighting, repeat Steps 1–6, choosing a
different function button in Step 4 than what you
used for the garage door opener.
1. Press and hold the two outside buttons at
the same time for approximately 20 seconds,
until the indicator lights, located directly
above the buttons, begin to blink rapidly.
2. Once the indicator lights begin to blink,
release both buttons. The codes from all
button will be erased.
Using Universal Home Remote
Press and hold the appropriate button for at least
half of a second. The indicator light will come
on while the signal is being transmitted.
For additional information on Universal Home
Remote, see Customer Assistance Offices
on page 486.
146
Read the instructions completely before attempting
to program the Universal Home Remote.
Because of the steps involved, it may be helpful to
have another person available to assist you in
the programming steps.
Universal Home Remote System
Operation (With One Triangular LED)
Keep the original hand-held transmitter for use in
other vehicles as well as for future Universal
Home Remote programming. It is also
recommended that upon the sale of the vehicle,
the programmed Universal Home Remote buttons
should be erased for security purposes. See
“Erasing Universal Home Remote Buttons” later in
this section or, for assistance, see Customer
Your vehicle may have the Universal Home
Remote System. If there is one triangular Light
Emitting Diode (LED) above the Universal
Home Remote buttons, follow the instructions
below. If your vehicle has three round LED above
the Universal Home Remote buttons, follow the
instructions under Universal Home Remote System
Operation (With three round LED).
Be sure that people and objects are clear of the
garage door or gate operator you are
programming. When programming a garage door,
it is advised to park outside of the garage.
Do not use the Universal Home Remote with any
garage door opener that does not have the
stop and reverse feature. This includes any garage
door opener model manufactured before April 1,
1982. If you have a newer garage door opener
with rolling codes, please be sure to follow
Steps 6 through 8 to complete the programming of
your Universal Home Remote Transmitter.
It is recommended that a new battery be installed
in your hand-held transmitter for quicker and
more accurate transmission of the radio-frequency
signal.
147
4. The indicator light will flash slowly at first and
then rapidly after Universal Home Remote
successfully receives the frequency signal
from the hand-held transmitter. Release both
buttons.
Programming Universal Home Remote
Follow these steps to program up to
three channels:
1. Press and hold down the two outside
Universal Home Remote buttons, releasing
only when the Universal Home Remote
indicator light begins to flash, after
5. Press and hold the newly-trained Universal
Home Remote button and observe the
indicator light.
20 seconds. Do not hold down the buttons for
longer than 30 seconds and do not repeat
this step to program a second and/or
third hand-held transmitter to the remaining
two Universal Home Remote buttons.
If the indicator light stays on continuously,
programming is complete and your device
should activate when the Universal Home
Remote button is pressed and released.
To program the remaining two Universal Home
Remote buttons, begin with Step 2 under
“Programming Universal Home Remote.”
Do not repeat Step 1 as this will erase all of
the programmed channels.
If the indicator light blinks rapidly for
two seconds and then turns to a constant light,
continue with Steps 6 through 8 following to
complete the programming of a rolling-code
equipped device, most commonly, a garage
door opener.
2. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter
about 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the
Universal Home Remote buttons while
keeping the indicator light in view.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the
desired Universal Home Remote button
and the hand-held transmitter button. Do not
release the buttons until Step 4 has been
completed.
Some entry gates and garage door openers
may require you to substitute Step 3 with
the procedure noted in “Gate Operator and
Canadian Programming” later in this section.
148
6. Locate in the garage, the garage door opener
receiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn”
or “Smart” button. This can usually be
found where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the motor-head unit.
Gate Operator and Canadian
Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter
signals to time out or quit after several seconds
of transmission. This may not be long enough
for Universal Home Remote to pick up the signal
during programming. Similarly, some U.S. gate
operators are manufactured to time out in
the same manner.
7. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or
“Smart” button. The name and color of
the button may vary by manufacturer.
You will have 30 seconds to start Step 8.
8. Return to the vehicle. Firmly press and hold
the programmed Universal Home Remote
button for two seconds, then release. Repeat
the press/hold/release sequence a second
time, and depending on the brand of the
garage door opener, or other rolling code
device, repeat this sequence a third time to
complete the programming.
If you live in Canada, or you are having difficulty
programming a gate operator or garage door
opener by using the “Programming Universal
Home Remote” procedures, regardless of where
you live, replace Step 3 under “Programming
Universal Home Remote” with the following:
Continue to press and hold the Universal Home
Remote button while you press and release every
two seconds (cycle) the hand-held transmitter
button until the frequency signal has been
successfully accepted by the Universal Home
Remote. The Universal Home Remote indicator
light will flash slowly at first and then rapidly.
Proceed with Step 4 under “Programming
Universal Home Remote” to complete.
The Universal Home Remote should now
activate your rolling-code equipped device.
To program the remaining two Universal
Home Remote buttons, begin with Step 2 of
“Programming Universal Home Remote.” You do
not want to repeat Step 1, as this will erase
all previous programming from the Universal Home
Remote buttons.
149
Using Universal Home Remote
Reprogramming a Single Universal
Home Remote Button
Press and hold the appropriate Universal Home
Remote button for at least half of a second.
The indicator light will come on while the signal is
being transmitted.
To program a device to Universal Home Remote
using a Universal Home Remote button
previously trained, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired Universal Home
Remote button. Do not release the button.
Erasing Universal Home Remote
Buttons
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after
20 seconds. While still holding the Universal
Home Remote button, proceed with Step
2 under “Programming Universal Home
Remote” shown earlier in this section.
To erase programming from the three Universal
Home Remote buttons do the following:
1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons
until the indicator light begins to flash, after
20 seconds. Do not hold the two outside
buttons for longer than 30 seconds.
For additional information on Universal Home
Remote, see Customer Assistance Offices
on page 486.
2. Release both buttons.
The Universal Home Remote is now in the training
(learning) mode and can be programmed at any
time beginning with Step 2 under “Programming
Universal Home Remote” shown earlier in
this section.
Individual buttons cannot be erased, but they can
be reprogrammed. See “Reprogramming a
Single Universal Home Remote Button” following
this section.
150
Center Console Storage Area
(CTS Only)
Storage Areas
Glove Box
Your vehicle may have a center console with a
storage tray, a storage compartment, a dual
cupholder with a removable rubber liner and an
armrest. To access the storage area, pull up
on the latch located at the front of the armrest.
To open the glove box, lift up on the lever.
Use your door key to lock or unlock it.
Cupholder(s)
There are two cupholders for the front seat
passengers. They are located in the center
console.
Map Pocket
The map/storage pockets are located on each
door as well as on the back of the front seatbacks.
There are two cupholders located in the rear seat
center armrest. Pull the armrest down to access
the cupholders.
151
The vehicle has threaded nuts that are covered
with a plastic cap on the roof rails, that indicate the
mounting locations for a roof rack or luggage
carrier. Open the doors to access these locations.
Remove the plastic cap before attaching a roof
rack or luggage carrier.
Roof Rack
{CAUTION:
If you try to carry something on top of
your vehicle that is longer or wider than
the luggage carrier — like paneling,
For more information on purchasing the
rack/carrier as well as installation information,
contact your dealer.
plywood, a mattress and so forth — the
wind can catch it as you drive along. This
can cause you to lose control. What you
are carrying could be violently torn off,
and this could cause you or other drivers
to have a collision, and of course damage
your vehicle. You may be able to carry
something like this inside. But, never
carry something longer or wider than the
luggage carrier on top of your vehicle.
Convenience Net
The convenience net attaches to the floor and
back wall of the trunk using four anchor points
which allows the net to be used two ways. It can
be attached like a hammock or anchored to
lay flat across the floor of the trunk. Put small
loads, like grocery bags, behind the net. It can help
keep them from falling over during sharp turns
or quick starts and stops.
The net is not for larger, heavier loads. Store them
in the trunk as far forward as you can. When
not using the net, hook the net to the tabs securing
it to the sill plate.
152
P(Comfort Stop): Turn the control clockwise
to this position to open the glass panel about
three quarters of the way. The sunshade will open
with the glass panel, or it can be opened
manually.
Sunroof
Your vehicle may have a power sunroof. It will
operate when the ignition is turned on, or in
ACCESSORY, or when Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) is active. See Retained Accessory
This is called the comfort stop position. It provides
less wind noise than the full-open position.
The sunroof controls are
located on the overhead
console.
A(Full Open): Turn the control clockwise to
this position to open the glass panel all the
way. The sunshade will open with the glass panel,
or it can be opened manually.
I(Vent): Turn the control counterclockwise to
this position to use the vent feature. The glass
panel will tilt upward from the vehicle. The
sunshade must be opened manually.
?(Close): Turn the control to this position to
close the sunroof. The sunshade must be
closed manually.
@(Half Open): Turn the control clockwise to
this position to open the glass panel half way. The
sunshade will open with the glass panel, or it
can be opened manually.
153
Anti-Pinch Feature
Anti-Pinch Feature Override
If an object is in the path of the sunroof when it is
closing, the anti-pinch feature will detect the
object and stop the sunroof from closing at the
point of the obstruction. The sunroof will then
return to the full-open or vent position. To close
the sunroof once it has re-opened, turn the control
to the closed position.
A condition may exist that causes the anti-pinch
feature of the sunroof to activate due to weather or
an obstruction. In an emergency, the anti-pinch
feature can be overridden in a supervised mode.
To override the anti-pinch feature rotate the
sunroof control to the closed position, then press
the control upward and continue pressing
upward until the sunroof reaches the desired
position.
In this mode, the sunroof can still close on an
object in its path. Use care when using the
override mode.
154
Section 3
Instrument Panel
156
✍ NOTES
157
The main components of the instrument panel are the following:
H. Voice Recognition Button (If Equipped).
See Navigation System Supplement.
I. Audio Volume Knob and Source Button
(CTS Only). See Audio Steering Wheel
J. Storage Compartment or Ashtray (If Equipped).
page 179.
L. Accessory Power Outlet or Cigarette Lighter
(If Equipped). See Accessory Power Outlet(s)
C. Reconfigurable Steering Wheel Controls (CTS)
(If Equipped) or Message Center Controls
(CTS-V). See Reconfigurable Steering Wheel
Steering Wheel Climate Controls (CTS). See
on page 187. Traction Control Disable Button
(CTS-V). See Traction Control System
G. Audio (Base Audio System) or Audio/Navigation
page 281.
Traction Control Disable Button (CTS). See
(CTS-V) on page 297
159
Hazard Warning Flashers
Other Warning Devices
Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others.
They also let police know you have a problem.
Your front and rear turn signal lamps will flash on
and off.
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set them up
at the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m)
behind your vehicle.
Horn
The hazard warning
flasher button is located
in the center of the
instrument panel.
Press near or on the horn symbols on your
steering wheel pad to sound the horn.
Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what
position your key is in, and even if the key is
not in the ignition switch.
Press the button to make the front and rear turn
signal lamps flash on and off. Press the button
again to turn the flashers off.
When the hazard warning flashers are on, your
turn signals will not work.
160
Tilt Wheel
Reconfigurable Steering Wheel
Controls (SWC) (CTS)
A tilt wheel allows you to adjust the steering wheel
before you drive. You can raise it to the highest
level to give your legs more room when you
exit and enter the vehicle.
If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to
customize the four steering wheel controls to work
with the OnStar®, the climate controls, audio,
and traction control systems.
The controls for this
feature are located on
the left spoke of
the steering wheel.
If your vehicle has the base audio system, do the
following:
The lever that allows you to tilt the steering wheel
is located on the left side of the steering column.
1. Access the main menu of the audio system by
pressing the TUNE/SEL (SELECT) knob
To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and
pull the lever. Then move the steering wheel to a
comfortable position and release the lever to
lock the wheel in place.
located at the lower right of the audio system.
2. Scroll through the menu by turning the knob.
161
3. When SETUP appears on the display, press
the knob once to select it.
3. Press the multi-function button next to Prog
SWC located at the right of the screen.
4. Scroll through the SETUP menu by turning
the knob.
4. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob to scroll through the
available functions.
5. When CONFIGURE SWC KEYS appears on
the display, press the knob once to select it.
5. Once the function desired is highlighted, press
and hold the multi-function button next to the
control you want to program (1, 2, 3 or 4).
The buttons are located at the right of
the display.
6. Scroll through the buttons (1, 2, 3 or 4). Press
the knob to select the desired number.
7. Choose a new function for the control by
scrolling through the list of available functions.
When a control is successfully programmed,
the function you selected will appear next
to the number of the control at the right of the
display.
8. Once you have highlighted your choice, press
the knob once to select it.
The control you selected is now programmed
with the function you selected.
6. Press the multi-function button next to the
Back prompt to exit each menu. To program
another control, repeat the procedure.
9. Press the CLR (CLEAR) button to exit each
menu. To program another control, repeat the
procedure.
When a control is programmed with a function,
that function cannot be used with any other control.
It becomes available again only when another
function is programmed to the control.
If your vehicle has the Navigation system, do the
following:
1. Press the MAIN button located to the lower
left of the display.
2. Press the multi-function button next to the
Setup prompt at the right of the display.
162
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or
down. The lever returns automatically when
the turn is complete.
An arrow on the
instrument panel cluster
will flash in the
direction of the turn or
lane change.
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
• G Turn and Lane-Change Signals. See
• 3 Headlamp High/Low Beam-Changer.
on page 164.
Raise or lower the lever until the arrow starts to
flash to signal a lane change. Hold it there until the
lane change is complete. The lever returns to its
original position when it is released.
Rapid flashing of arrows when signaling for a turn
or lane change may be caused by a burned-out
signal bulb. Other driver’s will not see the signal.
page 164.
Replace burned-out bulbs to help avoid possible
accidents. Check the fuse and for burned-out bulbs
if the arrow fails to work when signaling a turn.
more information.
page 168.
163
Turn Signal On Chime
Flash-to-Pass
If the turn signal is left on for about 1 mile (1.6 km),
a warning chime will sound and the Turn Signal
On message will appear on the Driver Information
Center (DIC) display. See “Turn Signal On”
for more information.
This feature allows you to use the high-beam
headlamps to signal the driver in front of you that
you want to pass.
Pull and hold the turn signal/multifunction lever
toward you to use this feature. When you do this,
the following will occur:
• If the headlamps are off, in low-beam or in
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) mode, the
high-beam headlamps will turn on. They will
stay on as long as you hold the lever
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
Push forward on the turn signal/multifunction
lever to change the headlamps from low to high
beam. Pull the lever back and then release it
to change from high to low beam.
there. Release the lever to turn them off.
• If the headlamps are in high-beam mode, they
will switch to low beam. To return to
If you turn the vehicle off with the high beams on,
the high beams will be on the next time you
start your vehicle.
high-beam, push the lever away from you.
This light on the
instrument panel cluster
will be on, indicating
high-beam usage.
164
Windshield Wipers
6 (Delay Adjustment): Use this band to set the
length of the delay between wipes when using the
delay feature. The closer you move the band
toward mist, the longer the delay. The windshield
wiper lever must be in delay for this feature to work.
6 (Low Speed): Put the lever in this position
for slow, steady wiping cycles.
1 (High Speed): Put the lever in this position
for rapid wiping cycles.
The lever on the right side of the steering column
operates the windshield wipers.
If the windshield wipers are in use for about
six seconds while you are driving, the exterior
lamps will come on automatically if the exterior
lamp control is in AUTO. See Wiper Activated
7(Mist): Pull the lever down and release it for
a single wiping cycle. The lever will return to its
original position. For more cycles, hold the
lever down before releasing it.
Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper
blades before using them. If they are frozen to the
windshield, gently loosen or thaw them. If the
blades do become damaged, install new blades.
For more information, see Windshield Wiper Blade
9(Off): Put the lever in this position to turn off
the wipers.
&(Delay): Put the lever in this position to set a
delay between wipes. Turn the delay adjustment
band to set the length of the delay.
Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor. A
circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools down.
Clear away snow or ice to prevent an overload.
165
If your vehicle is low on washer fluid, the Check
Washer Fluid message will appear on the
Driver Information Center (DIC) display. See DIC
Windshield Washer
{CAUTION:
If the headlamps are on when you wash the
windshield, the headlamp washers, if the vehicle
has them, will turn on. Both the windshield and the
headlamps will be washed. See “Headlamp
Washer” following for more information.
In freezing weather, do not use your
washer until the windshield is warmed.
Otherwise the washer fluid can form ice
on the windshield, blocking your vision.
K(Washer Fluid): Press the button with this
symbol located at the end of the windshield washer
lever to wash the windshield. Washer fluid will
spray onto the windshield and the wipers will run
for a few cycles to clear the windshield. For
more wash cycles, press and hold the button.
166
The headlamps must be on in order to be washed.
If the headlamps are off, only the windshield will
be washed when the washer button is pressed.
To wash the headlamps, press the washer button
located at the end of the windshield wiper lever.
Both the headlamps and the windshield will be
washed.
Headlamp Washer
If your vehicle has the high-intensity discharge
(HID) headlamps, your vehicle will also have
headlamp washers. The headlamp washers help
clear the headlamp lenses.
The headlamp washers
are located on the
inboard side of
information.
the headlamp lenses.
167
With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of
about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more without
keeping your foot on the accelerator. This can
really help on long trips. Cruise control does not
work at speeds below about 25 mph (40 km/h).
Cruise Control
These controls are
located on the end of
the multifunction lever.
{CAUTION:
Cruise control can be dangerous where
you cannot drive safely at a steady speed.
So, do not use your cruise control on
winding roads or in heavy traffic.
9(Off): This position turns the system off.
R(On): This position turns the system on.
+ (Resume/Accelerate): Push the lever to this
symbol to make the vehicle resume to a previously
set speed or to accelerate when cruise is already
active.
Cruise control can be dangerous on
slippery roads. On such roads, fast
changes in tire traction can cause
excessive wheel slip, and you could lose
control. Do not use cruise control on
slippery roads.
T(Set/Decrease): Press this button to set the
speed or to decrease the speed when cruise
is already active.
168
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the
Traction Control System (TCS) begins to limit
wheel spin, the cruise control will automatically
disengage. See Traction Control System
conditions allow you to safely use it again,
you may turn the cruise control back on.
3. Press in the set button at the end of the lever
and release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
This light on the
instrument panel cluster
will come on while
cruise control is on.
Setting Cruise Control
{CAUTION:
If you leave your cruise control on when
you are not using cruise, you might hit a
button and go into cruise when you do not
want to. You could be startled and even
lose control. Keep the cruise control switch
off until you want to use cruise control.
1. Move the cruise control switch to on.
2. Get up to the desired speed.
169
Resuming a Set Speed
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired
speed and then you apply the brake. This, of
course, disengages the cruise control. But you do
not need to reset it.
There are two ways to go to a higher speed:
• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher
speed. Press the set button at the end of the
lever, then release the button and the
accelerator pedal. You will now cruise at the
higher speed.
Once you are going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or
more, you can move the cruise control switch
briefly from on to resume/accelerate.
You will go right back up to your chosen speed
and stay there.
• Move the cruise switch from on to
resume/accelerate. Hold it there until you get
up to the desired speed and then release
the switch. To increase your speed in
very small amounts, move the switch briefly to
resume/accelerate. Each time you do this,
your vehicle will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h)
faster.
If you hold the switch at resume/accelerate the
vehicle will keep going faster until you release the
switch or apply the brake. So unless you want
to go faster, do not hold the switch at
resume/accelerate.
If using the accelerator pedal and the set button at
end of the lever to increase cruise set speed,
the new set speed must be at least 5 mph higher
than the current speed for this method to work.
If it is not 5 mph higher, switch cruise switch
off, then on, and then reset your speed using the
set button.
170
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well your cruise control will work on hills
depends upon your speed, load, and the
steepness of the hills. When going up steep hills,
you may have to step on the accelerator pedal
to maintain your speed. When going downhill, you
may have to brake or shift to a lower gear to
keep the speed reduced. Applying the brake or
shifting into a lower gear will take you out of cruise
control. If you need to apply the brake or shift to
a lower gear due to the grade of the downhill
slope, you may not want to use the cruise control
feature.
There are two ways to reduce your speed while
using cruise control:
• Press in the button at the end of the lever until
the desired lower speed is reached, then
release it.
• To slow down in very small amounts, briefly
press the set button. Each time you do this,
you will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
Ending Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed.
When you take your foot off the pedal, your
vehicle will slow down to the cruise control speed
you set earlier.
To end a cruise control session, step lightly on the
brake pedal. If your vehicle has a manual
transmission, lightly tapping the clutch pedal will
also end a cruise control session.
Stepping on the brake or clutch pedal will only end
the current cruise control session. Move the
cruise control switch to off to completely turn off
the system.
171
Erasing Speed Memory
5(Headlamps): Turning the control to this
position turns on the headlamps, together with the
previously listed lamps and lights.
When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition,
the cruise control set speed memory is erased.
AUTO (Automatic): Turning the control to this
position puts the headlamps in automatic
mode. AUTO mode will turn the exterior lamps on
and off depending upon how much light is
available outside of the vehicle.
Headlamps
The exterior lamp control is located in the middle
of the turn signal/multifunction lever. See Turn
O(Exterior Lamp Control): Turn the control
Wiper Activated Headlamps
with this symbol on it to operate the exterior lamps.
This feature activates the headlamps and parking
lamps after the windshield wipers have been in
use for about six seconds. For this feature to work,
the exterior lamp control must be in AUTO.
The exterior lamp control has the following
four positions:
9(Off): Turning the control to this position turns
off all lamps except the Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL).
When the exterior lamp control is off or in the
parking lamp position and the windshield wiper
control is in any position except off, the Headlamps
Suggested message will appear on the DIC
display. See “Headlamps Suggested Message”
for more information.
;(Parking Lamps): Turning the control to this
position turns on the parking lamps together
with the following:
• Sidemarker Lamps
• Taillamps
• License Plate Lamps
• Instrument Panel Lights
When the ignition is turned to OFF, the
wiper-activated headlamps will immediately turn
off. They will also turn off if the windshield
wiper control is turned off.
172
When DRL are on, only your front turn signal
lamps will be on. No other exterior lamps will be
on. Your instrument panel cluster will not be
lit up either.
Headlamps on Reminder
A warning chime will sound if the exterior lamp
control is left on in either the headlamp or parking
lamp position and the driver’s door is opened
page 207 for additional information.
When the exterior lamp control is in AUTO and it
is dark enough outside, the DRL will turn off
and the low-beam headlamps will turn on. When it
is bright enough outside, the low-beam headlamps
will go off, and the DRL will turn back on. If you
start your vehicle in a dark garage, the automatic
headlamp system will come on immediately.
Once you leave the garage, it will take about one
minute for the automatic headlamp system to
change to DRL if it is light outside. During
that delay, your instrument panel cluster may not
be as bright as usual. Make sure your instrument
panel brightness lever is in the full bright position.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier
for others to see the front of your vehicle during
the day. DRL can be helpful in many different
driving conditions, but they can be especially
helpful in the short periods after dawn and before
sunset. Fully functional daytime running lamps
are required on all vehicles first sold in Canada.
The DRL system will make the turn signal lamps
come on when the following conditions are met:
• It is still daylight and the ignition is in ON or
START.
• The exterior lamp control is in off or AUTO and
the headlamps are off.
• The automatic transmission is not in PARK (P).
173
If it is dark enough outside and the exterior lamp
control is off, a Headlamps Suggested message
will appear on the Driver’s Information Center
(DIC) display. This message informs the driver that
turning on the exterior lamps is recommended
even though the DRL are still on. Turning
the exterior lamp control to AUTO or to the
low-beam headlamp position will turn off the DRL
and cancel the Headlamps Suggested message.
If the parking lamps or the fog lamps were
turned on instead, the DRL will still turn off and
the Headlamps Suggested message will be
displayed. You can turn it off by pressing the OK
button if you have the Navigation audio system
or the CLR (Clear) button if you have the
base audio system.
Light Sensor
The light sensor for the DRL and AUTO headlamp
feature is located on top of the instrument panel.
If you cover the sensor, it will prevent it from
sensing light, and the exterior lamps or the
Headlamps Suggested message will appear on
the DIC whenever the ignition is on.
To drive your vehicle with the DRL off, turn the
exterior lamp control off. Then turn on the
fog lamps or parking lamps, and the DRL will turn
off. The Headlamps Suggested message will
appear on the DIC display. This will work
regardless of gear position and whether or not the
parking brake is set.
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the
regular headlamp system when you need it.
174
Fog Lamps
Exterior Lighting Battery Saver
Use the fog lamps for better vision in foggy or
misty conditions.
If the parking lamps or headlamps have been left
on, the exterior lamps will turn off about
10 minutes after the ignition is turned to OFF. This
protects against draining the battery in case the
headlamps or parking lamps have been left
on. The battery saver does not work if the
headlamps are turned on after the ignition is turned
to OFF.
The fog lamp control is located on the turn
signal/multifunction lever.
-(Fog Lamps): The band with/or next to this
symbol is used to turn the fog lamps on and off.
The parking lamps must be on for the fog lamps
to work.
If you need to leave the lamps on for more than
10 minutes, use the exterior lamp control to
turn the lamps back on.
To operate the fog lamps:
• To turn the fog lamps on, turn the fog lamp
band on the lever up to the dot and release
it. The band will return to its original position.
• To turn the fog lamps off, turn the for
lamp band up to the dot and release it. The
band will return to its original position, and the
fog lamps will turn off. If the high-beam
headlamps are turned on, the fog lamps will
also turn off. They will turn back on again
when you switch back to low-beam
headlamps.
Some localities have laws that require the
headlamps to be on along with the fog lamps.
175
Instrument Panel Brightness
Entry Lighting
The entry lighting system turns on the reading and
dome lamps and the backlighting to the exterior
lamp control when a door is opened or if the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter unlock
button is pressed. If activated by the (RKE),
the lighting will remain active for about 25 seconds.
The entry lighting system uses the light sensor
on the instrument panel; so it must be dark outside
in order for the lamps to turn on. The lamps turn
off about 25 seconds after the last door is
closed. They will dim to off if the ignition key is
turned to ON, or immediately turn off if the power
locks are used.
The lever for this
feature is located on the
overhead console.
Slide the lever toward the symbol to brighten the
lights or away from it to dim them.
If you slide the lever all the way toward the
symbol past the resistance point, the interior lamps
will come on. To turn them off, slide the lever
back toward the minimum brightness setting.
176
Parade Dimming
Battery Run-Down Protection
This feature prohibits dimming of the instrument
panel displays and backlighting during daylight
hours when the key is in the ignition and the
headlamps are on. This feature operates with the
light sensor and is fully automatic. When the light
sensor reads darkness outside and the parking
lamps are active, the instrument panel displays can
be adjusted by sliding the instrument panel
brightness lever toward the symbol to brighten or
away from the symbol to dim the lighting.
Your vehicle has a feature to help prevent the
battery from being drained, in case the underhood
lamp, vanity mirror lamps, cargo lamps, reading
lamps, console, or glove box lamps are
accidentally left on, or something is left plugged
into the accessory power outlet or cigarette lighter.
If any of the accessory lamps are left on, they
will automatically time-out after about 20 minutes.
To reset the battery protection, all of the above
lamps must be turned off or the ignition key must
be in ON.
Reading Lamps
The reading lamps are located on the overhead
console. These lamps come on automatically when
any door is opened.
For manual operation, press the button next to
each lamp to turn it on or off.
If the reading lamps are left on, they automatically
shut off 10 minutes after the ignition has been
turned off.
177
Certain electrical accessories may not be
Accessory Power Outlet(s)
compatible with the accessory power outlet and
could result in blown vehicle or adapter fuses.
If you experience a problem see your dealer for
additional information on accessory power outlets.
Accessory power outlets can be used to connect
auxiliary electrical equipment, such as a cellular
telephone or CB radio.
There are two accessory power outlets. The front
accessory power outlet is located in the ashtray
on the instrument panel below the climate control
system. The outlet will have a cigarette lighter
if your vehicle has this option. Remove the
cigarette lighter to access the outlet.
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to
your vehicle may damage it or keep other
components from working as they should.
The repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not use equipment exceeding
maximum amperage rating of 20 amperes.
Check with your dealer before adding electrical
equipment.
The rear accessory power outlet is located on the
back of the center console.
To use an outlet, remove the protective cap.
When not in use, always cover the outlet with the
protective cap. The accessory power outlet is
operational at all times.
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can
cause damage not covered by your warranty.
Do not hang any type of accessory or
accessory bracket from the plug because the
power outlets are designed for accessory
power plugs only.
Notice: If electrical devices are left plugged
into a power outlet, the battery may drain
causing your vehicle not to start or damage to
the battery. This would not be covered by
the warranty. Always unplug all electrical
devices when turning off your vehicle.
178
Cigarette Lighter
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter
The cigarette lighter is located next to the ashtray.
The vehicle does not have a cigarette lighter for
the rear seat passengers.
Your vehicle may have an ashtray and cigarette
lighter.
Notice: If you put papers, pins, or other
flammable items in the ashtray, hot cigarettes
or other smoking materials could ignite
them and possibly damage your vehicle. Never
put flammable items in the ashtray.
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it
is heating will not allow the lighter to back
away from the heating element when it is hot.
Damage from overheating may occur to the
lighter or heating element, or a fuse could be
blown. Do not hold a cigarette lighter in
while it is heating. Do not use equipment
exceeding maximum amperage rating of
15 amperes.
Ashtray
The ashtray is located under the climate control
panel on the instrument panel. Press on the
door to release the ashtray.
more information.
To empty the ashtray, remove it from the
instrument panel by gripping the edges and pulling
straight out. To reinstall, push the tray back into
place.
To use the lighter, press the lighter all the way in
and release it. It will pop back out to use once
the element has heated.
179
1. Press the AUTO button.
Climate Controls
2. Adjust the temperature to a comfortable
setting between 70°F (21°C) and 80°F (27°C).
Dual Climate Control System
Choosing the coldest or warmest temperature
setting will not cause the system to heat or
cool any faster. If you set the system at
the warmest temperature setting, the system
will remain in manual mode at that temperature
and it will not go into automatic mode.
With this system you can control the heating,
cooling and ventilation for your vehicle.
In cold weather, the system will start at
reduced fan speeds to avoid blowing cold air
into your vehicle until warmer air is available.
The system will start out blowing air at the floor
but may change modes automatically as the
vehicle warms up to maintain the chosen
temperature setting. The length of time needed
for warm up will depend on the outside
Uplevel Version Shown, Base Similar
temperature and the length of time that has
elapsed since your vehicle was last driven.
Automatic Operation
3. Wait for the system to regulate. This may take
from 10 to 30 minutes. Then adjust the
temperature, if necessary.
AUTO (Automatic): When this button is pressed
and the temperature is set, the system will
automatically control the inside temperature, the
air delivery mode, the air conditioning compressor,
and the fan speed. AUTO will appear on the
display.
180
You can switch from English to metric units
through the Driver Information Center (DIC). If you
have the Base audio system, see DIC Main
system, see “Setup Menu” in the Index of
the Navigation System Owner Manual.
To change the current mode, select one of the
following:
Y (Vent): This mode directs air to the instrument
panel outlets.
\ (Bi-Level): This mode directs approximately
half of the air to the instrument panel outlets,
and then directs most of the remaining air to the
floor outlets. In automatic operation, cooler air
is directed to the upper outlets and warmer air to
the floor outlets.
The air-conditioning system removes moisture
from the air, so you may sometimes notice a small
amount of water dripping underneath your
vehicle while idling or after turning off the engine.
This is normal.
Do not cover the solar sensor located in the
center of the instrument panel, near the
windshield. For more information on the solar
sensor, see “Sensors” later in this section.
[ (Floor): This mode directs most of the air to
the floor outlets with some air directed to the
outboard outlets (for the side windows), and a little
air directed to the windshield.
Manual Operation
The mode switch can also be used to select the
defog mode. Information on defogging and
defrosting can be found later in this section.
yN z (Mode): Pressing the mode switch and
changing the mode cancels automatic operation
and places the system in manual mode. Press
AUTO to return to automatic operation.
yAz (Fan): Press this switch to increase or
decrease the fan speed. Pressing this switch
cancels automatic operation and places the system
in manual mode. Press AUTO to return to
automatic operation.
The outboard air outlets will always receive airflow
regardless of the mode selected. See Outlet
from the outboard outlets.
181
If the airflow seems low when the fan speed is at
the highest setting, the passenger compartment
air filter may need to be replaced. For more
information, see Passenger Compartment Air Filter
page 463.
QPWRR(Power/Driver’s Temperature): Press
the PWR button located on the driver’s side of
the climate control panel to turn the entire climate
control system on or off. Press the up or down
arrow on the switch to increase or decrease
the automatic temperature setting.
h (Recirculation): This mode keeps outside
air from coming in the vehicle. It can be used
to prevent outside air and odors from entering your
vehicle or to help heat or cool the air inside your
vehicle more quickly. Press this button to
switch between recirculation and fresh air. Press
the auto button to have the system select the best
air delivery mode for your temperature setting.
QPWRR(Power/Passenger’s
Temperature): Press the PWR button located on
the passenger’s side of the climate control
panel to allow the passenger’s climate control
setting to be different than the driver’s. Press the
up or down arrow on the switch to increase or
decrease the automatic temperature setting.
A/C OFF (Air Conditioning): Press this button to
manually turn off the air conditioning compressor.
Press AUTO to return to automatic operation
or press the A/C OFF button again.
Recirculation is not available in the defrost mode
and will automatically turn off after 10 minutes
when defog is selected.
Using recirculation for long periods of time may
cause the air inside your vehicle to become too dry
or stuffy. To prevent this from happening, after
the air in your vehicle has cooled, turn the
recirculation mode off or press the auto button.
182
There is also an interior
temperature sensor
Sensors
located to the right of
the steering wheel
on the instrument panel.
These sensors monitor the solar radiation and the
air inside your vehicle, they use the information
to maintain the selected temperature by adjusting
to the temperature, the fan speed, and the air
delivery system. The system may also supply
cooler air to the side of the vehicle facing the sun.
The recirculation mode will also be activated,
as necessary. Do not cover the sensors or
the automatic climate control system will not
work properly.
There is a solar sensor located on the instrument
panel, near the windshield.
183
If there is fog on the side windows, turn the
thumbwheel on the outboard outlets to the side
page 185 for more information.
Defogging and Defrosting
Fog on the inside of windows is a result of high
humidity (moisture) condensing on the cool window
glass. This can be minimized if the climate
control system is used properly. There are two
modes to clear fog from your windshield. Use the
defog mode to clear the windows of fog or
moisture and warm the passengers. Use the
defrost mode to remove fog or frost from
the windshield more quickly.
0 (Defrost): Pressing defrost directs most of
the air to the windshield, with some air directed to
the side windows. In this mode, the system will
automatically turn off recirculation and run
the air-conditioning compressor, unless the outside
temperature is at or below freezing.
This mode may also cause the fan speed and air
temperature to increase.
yN z (Mode): Press this button until defog
appears on the display.
If there is fogging on the side windows, turn the
thumbwheel on the outboard outlets to the
side window defog position. See Outlet Adjustment
on page 185 for more information. Do not drive
the vehicle until all the windows are clear.
- (Defog): This mode directs the air between
the windshield, floor outlets and side windows.
When this mode is selected, the system turns off
recirculation and runs the air-conditioning
compressor unless the outside temperature is at
or below freezing. If recirculation mode is selected
while in defog mode, it will be cancelled after
10 minutes.
184
Notice: Do not try to clear frost or other
material from the inside of the front windshield
and rear window with a razor blade or anything
else that is sharp. This may damage the rear
window defogger grid and affect your radio’s
ability to pick up stations clearly. The repairs
wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.
Rear Window Defogger
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog or frost from the rear window.
The rear window defogger will only work when the
ignition is in ON.
= (Rear Window Defogger): Press this button
to turn the rear window defogger on or off. Be
sure to clear as much snow from the rear window
as possible.
Outlet Adjustment
Use the knobs located in the center of each outlet
to change the direction of the airflow. Use the
thumbwheels to open or close the outlets.
The rear window defogger will turn off about
10 minutes after the button is pressed, but if the
vehicle’s speed is above 30 mph (48 km/h),
the rear defogger will stay on continuously.
If turned on again, the defogger will only run for
about five minutes before turning off. The defogger
can also be turned off by pressing the button
again or by turning off the engine.
j(Side Window Defog): Turn the thumbwheel
to this symbol to use the side window defog
setting. The air coming through the outlets will be
directed toward the side windows to clear fog.
k(Open): Turn the thumbwheel to this symbol to
open the outlets completely and allow the
maximum amount of air to enter your vehicle. A
small amount of air will still be directed to the side
windows.
The heated outside rearview mirrors will heat to
help clear fog or frost from the surface of the mirror
when the rear window defogger button is on.
l(Closed): Turn the thumbwheel to this symbol
to close the outlets and minimize the amount
of air entering the vehicle.
185
Operation Tips
• Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the
air inlets at the base of the windshield that
may block the flow of air into your vehicle.
• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors may
adversely affect the performance of the
system.
The passenger compartment air filter is located
underneath the hood below the windshield
wiper arm on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.
for more information on location.
• Keep the path under the front seats clear of
objects to help circulate the air inside of
your vehicle more effectively.
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
Use the procedure listed below to replace the
passenger compartment air filter:
The passenger compartment air filter traps most of
the pollen from the air entering your vehicle.
Like your vehicle’s engine air cleaner/filter, it needs
to be changed periodically. See Scheduled
1. Turn the ignition to ON with the engine off.
2. Turn on the windshield wipers and turn them
off again when the wipers are straight on the
windshield.
Using the climate control system without the
passenger air filter installed may allow water or
other debris to enter the system. This could cause
a water leak or noises. Make sure to install a
new air filter after removing the old one.
This allows you access to the leaf screen. The
passenger compartment air filter is located
under the leaf screen.
186
3. Open the hood to access the engine
for more information.
Steering Wheel Climate
Controls (CTS)
Your vehicle may have four controls that can
be programmed for use with the climate
control system.
4. Remove the four screws that hold the leaf
screen in place and lift off the screen by
lifting and sliding toward the center of
the vehicle.
The controls are located
on the left side of the
steering wheel.
5. Pull out on the two tabs located on each end
of the filter cover.
6. Lift the filter cover off by pulling it straight
upward.
7. Remove the old filter and insert a new one.
Make sure the arrow on the filter is pointing
toward the passenger compartment.
on page 476 for the correct part number
for the filter.
programming these controls.
8. Reverse Steps 1 through 6 to reinstall
the cover.
187
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often
gages and warning lights work together to let
you know when there is a problem with your
vehicle.
Warning Lights, Gages, and
Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages
that may be on your vehicle. The pictures will
help you locate them.
When one of the warning lights comes on and
stays on while you are driving, or when one of the
gages shows there may be a problem, check
the section that tells you what to do about
it. Waiting to do repairs can be costly – and even
dangerous. So please get to know your warning
lights and gages. They are a big help.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something
is wrong before it becomes serious enough to
cause an expensive repair or replacement. Paying
attention to the warning lights and gages could also
save you or others from injury.
Warning lights come on when there may be or
is a problem with one of your vehicle’s functions.
As you will see in the details on the next few
pages, some warning lights come on briefly when
you start the engine just to let you know they
are working. If you are familiar with this section,
you should not be alarmed when this happens.
Your vehicle also has a Driver Information
Center (DIC) that works along with the warning
lights and gages. See Driver Information Center
188
Instrument Panel Cluster
The instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You
will know how fast you are going, how much fuel you are using and many of the other things you will need
to know to drive safely and economically.
CTS (United States version shown, Canada similar)
189
Speedometer and Odometer
CTS-V (United States version shown, Canada similar)
The speedometer lets you see your speed in either miles per hour (mph) or kilometers per hour (km/h).
The odometer shows how far your vehicle has been driven, in either miles (used in the United States) or
kilometers (used in Canada).
190
If your vehicle has to have a new odometer
installed, the new one may read the correct
mileage. This is because your vehicle’s computer
has stored the mileage in memory.
Tachometer
This gage indicates the engine speed in
Revolutions Per Minute (RPM).
While the Driver Shift Control (DSC) feature is
active, the odometer will change to show the gear
range. See Automatic Transmission Operation
on page 118 for more information.
Notice: If you operate the engine with the
tachometer in the shaded warning area, your
vehicle could be damaged, and the damages
would not be covered by your warranty. Do not
operate the engine with the tachometer in
the shaded warning area.
Trip Odometers
The trip odometer can record the number of miles
or kilometers traveled for up to two trips.
Engine Speed Limiter
This feature prevents the engine from operating at
too many revolutions per minute (rpm). When
the engine’s rpms are too high, the throttle
is closed to reduce speed. If this is not sufficient,
then the fuel supply to the engine will be
limited. When the rpms return to normal, the fuel
supply will return to normal. This helps prevent
damage to the engine.
The trip odometer is part of the Driver Information
Center (DIC), for more information see Status
For vehicles that have the navigation system, see
your Navigation System manual for more
information.
191
Safety Belt Reminder Light
Airbag Readiness Light
When the key is turned to ON or START, a chime
will come on for several seconds to remind
people to fasten their safety belts.
There is an airbag readiness light on the
instrument panel, which shows the airbag symbol.
The system checks the airbag’s electrical
system for malfunctions. The light tells you if there
is an electrical problem. The system check
includes the airbag sensors, the airbag modules,
the wiring and the diagnostic module. For
more information on the airbag system, see Airbag
The safety belt light will
also come on and stay
on for several
seconds, then it will
flash for several more.
If the driver’s belt is already buckled, the chime
will not come on.
192
This light will come on
when the ignition key is
turned to ON and it
will flash for a
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light stays on after
you start your vehicle, it means the airbag
system may not be working properly. The
airbags in your vehicle may not inflate in
a crash, or they could even inflate without
a crash. To help avoid injury to yourself
or others, have your vehicle serviced right
away if the airbag readiness light stays on
after you start your vehicle.
few seconds.
Then the light should go out. This means the
system is ready. If it does not go out, have your
vehicle serviced right away.
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you
start the vehicle or comes on while you are driving,
your airbag system may not work properly.
Have your vehicle serviced right away.
If there is a problem with the airbag system in
your vehicle, the Service Air Bag message
will appear on the Driver Information Center (DIC)
page 228 for more information.
193
When the ignition key is turned to ON or START,
the passenger airbag status indicator will light
ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off,
for several seconds as a system check. Then,
after several more seconds, the status indicator
will light either ON or OFF, or either the on
or off symbol to let you know the status of the
right front passenger’s frontal airbag.
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
Your rearview mirror has a passenger airbag
status indicator.
If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the
passenger airbag status indicator, it means that
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag is enabled
(may inflate).
United States
Canada
194
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
If the on indicator comes on when you have
a rear-facing child restraint installed in the
right front passenger’s seat, it means that
the passenger sensing system has not
turned off the passenger’s frontal airbag. A
child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is
Even though the passenger sensing
system is designed to turn off the
passenger’s frontal airbag if the system
detects a rear-facing child restraint, no
system is failsafe, and no one can
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend
that rear-facing child restraints be secured
in the rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
because the back of the rear-facing child
restraint would be very close to the
inflating airbag. Do not use a rear-facing
child restraint in the right front passenger’s
seat if the airbag is turned on.
If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the
airbag status indicator, it means that the
passenger sensing system has turned off the right
front passenger’s frontal airbag. See Passenger
including important safety information.
Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate
a rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sun
visor says, “Never put a rear-facing child seat
in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
195
If, after several seconds, all status indicator lights
remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there
may be a problem with the lights or the passenger
sensing system. See your dealer for service.
Charging System Light
When you turn the key
to ON or START, this
light will come on briefly
to show that the
generator and battery
charging systems
{CAUTION:
are working properly.
If the off indicator and the airbag
readiness light ever come on together, it
means that something may be wrong with
the airbag system. If this ever happens,
have the vehicle serviced promptly,
because an adult-size person sitting in the
right front passenger seat may not have
the protection of the frontal airbag. See
If this light stays on, your vehicle needs service.
You should take your vehicle to the dealer at once.
To save your battery until you get there, turn off
all accessories. For more information see DIC
196
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning
light will also come on when you set your
parking brake. The light will stay on if your parking
brake does not release fully. If it stays on after
your parking brake is fully released, it means you
have a brake problem.
Brake System Warning Light
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided
into two parts. If one part is not working, the other
part can still work and stop you. For good
braking, though, you need both parts working well.
If the warning light comes on, there is a brake
problem. Have your brake system inspected
right away.
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off
the road and stop carefully. You may notice
that the pedal is harder to push, or the pedal may
go closer to the floor. It may take longer to
stop. If the light is still on, have the vehicle towed
page 326.
{CAUTION:
United States
Canada
Your brake system may not be working
properly if the brake system warning light
is on. Driving with the brake system
warning light on can lead to an accident.
If the light is still on after you have pulled
off the road and stopped carefully, have
the vehicle towed for service.
This light should come on briefly when you turn
the ignition key to ON. If it does not come on then,
have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if
there is a problem.
197
If the light stays on, turn the ignition to OFF. If the
light comes on when you are driving, stop as
soon as possible and turn the ignition off. Then
start the engine again to reset the system. If
the light still stays on, or comes on again while
you are driving, your vehicle needs service. If the
regular brake system warning light is not on,
you still have brakes, but you do not have anti-lock
brakes. If the regular brake system warning light
is also on, you do not have anti-lock brakes
and there is a problem with your regular brakes.
more information.
Anti-Lock Brake System
Warning Light
With the Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS),
the light will come
on when your engine is
started and stay on
for several seconds.
This is normal.
If the ABS warning light comes on and stays on,
there may be a problem with the anti-lock
portion of the brake system. If the brake system
warning light is not on, you still have brakes,
but you do not have anti-lock brakes. See Brake
information.
The ABS warning light should come on briefly
when you turn the ignition key to ON. If the light
does not come on then, have it fixed so it will
be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
198
The light will also come on if you turn the traction
control system off using the TC on/off button
located in the glove box for the CTS and on the
steering wheel for the CTS-V.
Traction Control System (TCS)
Warning Light
If the TC (traction
If the TC warning light stays on or comes on while
you are driving, pull off the road as soon as
possible and stop carefully. Try resetting the
system by turning the ignition off then back on. If
the light still stays on or comes back on again
while you are driving, your vehicle needs service.
Have the Traction Control System (TCS)
inspected as soon as possible. See Traction
Control System (TCS) (CTS) on page 295
page 297 for more information.
control) warning light
comes on and stays on,
there may be a
problem with the traction
control system.
The TC warning light will come on briefly when
you turn the ignition to ON. If it does not come on
then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn
you if there is a problem.
199
Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Light (CTS)
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
This gage shows the
engine coolant
temperature. If the gage
pointer moves into
the shaded area, the
engine is too hot.
This light will come on
when you first start the
vehicle as a check
to let you know that the
light is working.
It will go out after a few seconds. If the light does
not come on, see your GM dealer.
That reading means the same thing as the
warning light – the engine coolant is very hot. See
If the light does not go out or if the light comes on
and stays on while you are driving, your vehicle
may have a problem with the cooling system. You
should stop the vehicle and turn off the engine
as soon as possible to avoid damage to the
engine. A warning chime will also sound when this
light is on.
information.
200
for more information.
Tire Pressure Light (CTS-V Only)
If the vehicle has the
Tire Pressure Monitor
System, this light
will come on if the
system detects low tire
pressure.
For more information on the proper tire pressure,
page 392.
This light will also come on for a bulb check when
the vehicle is started.
201
Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with
this light on, after awhile, your emission
controls may not work as well, your fuel
economy may not be as good, and your engine
may not run as smoothly. This could lead to
costly repairs that may not be covered by your
warranty.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
Your vehicle has a
computer which
monitors operation of
the fuel, ignition,
and emission control
systems.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system
of your vehicle or the replacement of the
original tires with other than those of the same
Tire Performance Criteria (TPC) can affect
your vehicle’s emission controls and may
cause this light to come on. Modifications to
these systems could lead to costly repairs not
covered by your warranty. This may also
result in a failure to pass a required Emission
Inspection/Maintenance test. See Accessories
This system is called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended
to assure that emissions are at acceptable
levels for the life of the vehicle, helping to produce
a cleaner environment. The check engine light
comes on to indicate that there is a problem and
service is required. Malfunctions often will be
indicated by the system before any problem is
apparent. This may prevent more serious damage
to your vehicle. This system is also designed to
assist your service technician in correctly
diagnosing any malfunction.
202
This light should come on, as a check to show
you it is working, when the ignition is on and the
engine is not running. If the light does not
come on, have it repaired. This light will also
come on during a malfunction in one of two ways:
If the Light is Flashing
The following may prevent more serious damage
to your vehicle:
• Reducing vehicle speed
• Light Flashing — A misfire condition has
been detected. A misfire increases vehicle
emissions and may damage the emission
control system on your vehicle. Diagnosis and
service may be required.
• Avoiding hard accelerations
• Avoiding steep uphill grades
• If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount
of cargo being hauled as soon as it is
possible
• Light On Steady — An emission control
system malfunction has been detected on your
vehicle. Diagnosis and service may be
required.
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady,
see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do
so, stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park
your vehicle. Turn the key off, wait at least
10 seconds and restart the engine. If the light
remains on steady, see “If the Light Is On Steady”
following. If the light is still flashing, follow the
previous steps, and see your dealer for service as
soon as possible.
203
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
If the Light Is On Steady
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel.
quality will cause your engine not to run as
efficiently as designed. You may notice this as
stalling after start-up, stalling when you put
the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation on
acceleration, or stumbling on acceleration.
(These conditions may go away once the engine
is warmed up.) This will be detected by the
system and cause the light to turn on.
You may be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully
The diagnostic system can determine if the
fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed.
A loose or missing fuel cap will allow fuel to
evaporate into the atmosphere. A few driving trips
with the cap properly installed should turn the
light off.
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at
least one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the
light off.
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of
water?
If none of the above steps have made the light
turn off, your dealer can check the vehicle.
Your dealer has the proper test equipment and
diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical
problems that may have developed.
If so, your electrical system may be wet. The
condition will usually be corrected when the
electrical system dries out. A few driving trips
should turn the light off.
204
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the
OBD (on-board diagnostic) system determines that
critical emission control systems have not been
completely diagnosed by the system. The vehicle
would be considered not ready for inspection.
This can happen if you have recently replaced your
battery or if your battery has run down. The
diagnostic system is designed to evaluate critical
emission control systems during normal driving.
This may take several days of routine driving.
If you have done this and your vehicle still does
not pass the inspection for lack of OBD system
readiness, your GM dealer can prepare the vehicle
for inspection.
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Programs
Some state/provincial and local governments have
or may begin programs to inspect the emission
control equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass
this inspection could prevent you from getting a
vehicle registration.
Here are some things you need to know to help
your vehicle pass an inspection:
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the
check engine light is on or not working properly.
205
If your vehicle has this
light, it will come on
when there is a problem
with your engine oil
pressure.
Oil Pressure Light
{CAUTION:
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is
low. If you do, your engine can become so
hot that it catches fire. You or others
could be burned. Check your oil as soon
as possible and have your vehicle
serviced.
This light will come on when you turn your key to
ON or START. It goes off once you start the
engine. That is a check to be sure the light works.
If it does not come on, be sure to have it fixed
so it will be there to warn you if there is a problem.
When the light comes on and stays on, it means
that oil is not flowing through your engine properly.
You could be low on oil and you might have
page 346 for more information.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance
may damage the engine. The repairs would
not be covered by your warranty. Always follow
the maintenance schedule in this manual for
changing engine oil.
206
Sport Mode Light
Fog Lamp Light
(Automatic Transmission/CTS)
This light will come on
when the fog lamps are
in use.
This light will come on
while the sport mode is
in use.
The light will go out when the fog lamps are
information.
When you turn off the sport mode, the light will go
out. If it stays on, your vehicle may need service.
See your dealer. See “Sport Mode” under
Automatic Transmission Operation on page 118
for more information.
Lights On Reminder
This light comes on
whenever the parking
lamps are on.
Security Light
For information
regarding this light, see
more information.
207
Cruise Control Light
Fuel Gage
This light comes on
whenever you set your
cruise control.
The fuel gage shows
approximately how
much fuel is in the fuel
tank. It works only
when the ignition is in
the ON position.
The light will go out when the cruise control is
for more information.
If the fuel supply gets low, the Fuel Level Low
message will appear on the Driver Information
Center (DIC) and a single chime will sound. See
more information.
Highbeam On Light
This light comes on
whenever the
high-beam headlamps
are on.
page 164 for more information.
208
Here are a few concerns some owners have had
about the fuel gage. All of these situations are
normal and do not indicate that anything is wrong
with the fuel gage:
Message Center
Message Center (CTS-V)
Your vehicle may have a message center that can
display information relating to powertrain fluids,
tire pressures, vehicle dynamics, speedometer and
odometer information, and transmission status.
It also displays warning messages. There are two
different areas where message center information
will be displayed. One display is inside of the
tachometer and the other is inside of the
speedometer.
• At the gas station the gas pump shuts off
before the gage reads full.
• The gage may change when you turn, stop
quickly or accelerate quickly.
• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill the tank
than the gage indicated. For example, the gage
may have indicated that the tank was half full,
but it actually took a little more or less than half
the tank’s capacity to fill the tank.
209
These are the controls
for the message center.
They are located on
the left spoke of
Speedometer Display
This display will show information relating to
vehicle speed, odometer, and transmission status.
The information displayed can be changed by
pressing (C). Pressing this button cycles the
displayed information as follows: digital
speedometer only, odometer only, speedometer
and odometer, or blank display.
the steering wheel.
When the transmission is shifted into
REVERSE (R), an R will appear in the
upper right corner.
The outboard switch (A and B) controls the display
of information inside of the tachometer. The
upper button (C) on the inboard switch controls
the display of information inside of the
speedometer. The lower button (D) on the inboard
switch turns the traction control on or off. See
Traction Control System (TCS) (CTS) on page 295
page 297 for more information.
During slow speed maneuvers, the engine’s
computer may command the transmission to
engage the Skip Shift feature. For more
information see Manual Transmission Operation
on page 122.
210
Oil Pressure
Tachometer Display
Press (B) to cycle through the following displays:
coolant temperature, oil pressure, oil temperature,
transmission temperature, tire pressure, and
lateral acceleration. Press (A) to cycle through the
displays in reverse order. If you press (A), for
about one second, the display will become blank.
When the oil pressure
displays you will see the
oil pressure symbol.
Coolant Temperature
The oil pressure displays in psi or kPa with a
graph beneath the reading. If the graph shows the
pressure in the shaded area all the way to the
page 228 for more information.
When the coolant
temperature displays
you will see the coolant
temperature symbol.
The temperature displays in degrees Fahrenheit or
Celsius with a graph beneath the reading. If the
graph shows the temperature in the shaded
area all the way on the right, then the coolant
temperature is hot. See Engine Overheating
on page 360 for more information.
211
Oil Temperature
Transmission Temperature
When the transmission
When the oil
temperature displays
you will see the oil
temperature symbol.
temperature displays
you will see the
transmission
temperature symbol.
The temperature displays in degrees Fahrenheit or
Celsius with a graph beneath the reading. If the
graph shows the temperature in the shaded
area all the way on the right, then the transmission
temperature is hot. See DIC Warnings and
The temperature displays in degrees Fahrenheit or
Celsius with a graph beneath the reading. If the
graph shows the temperature in the shaded
area all the way on the right, then the oil
for more information.
212
Tire Pressure
Warning Messages
When the tire pressure is displayed you will see a
vehicle in the display. The numbers in each
corner represent the tire pressure for the
corresponding tire. The tire pressure will be
displayed in psi or kPa.
The warning messages that are described in the
following text are also shown in the tachometer
display.
While any warning messages are shown,
pressing (A) or (B) will acknowledge the warning
and then display the gage relating to the message.
For instance, if a tire is below the minimum
recommended pressure, the tire pressure warning
message will blink on and off (five times for a
low tire warning, continuously for a flat tire
warning). The driver can go to the tire pressure
display immediately by pressing either button
on the outboard switch.
If any of the tires are blinking on the vehicle in the
display, this means that the tire pressure in that
tire is either high or low. See Tire Pressure Monitor
Lateral Acceleration
Lateral acceleration is a measure of how hard you
are taking a corner. For example, when you are
turning right you will feel your body push to the left.
This force is measured in a “g”. This gage will
display from 0.00 g to 1.2 g. The lowest reading
means there is no lateral acceleration. The highest
reading means the force the driver is feeling is
1.2 times the acceleration due to gravity.
When (B) is pressed and held while the Lateral
Acceleration display is being shown, the peak hold
values—both tick marks and numbers—will be
reset to zero.
213
If this message appears, you may continue to drive
at a slower speed while monitoring the transmission
fluid temperature. Ideally, the transmission oil
temperature should not rise above 265°F (129°C). If
you regularly experience temperatures above this
limit due to high performance operation, it is
recommended to use an auxiliary fluid cooler for the
transmission and differential. See your dealer for
details. If this warning is displayed during normal
vehicle operation on flat roads, your vehicle may
need service. See your dealer for an inspection.
information.
Transmission Fluid Hot Message
When you see this
flashing symbol, the
transmission fluid
temperature is high
(290°F (143°C)).
To acknowledge this warning, press either button
on the outboard switch on the left spoke of the
steering wheel. After you press this button, the
warning will redisplay every 10 minutes until the
temperature returns to the normal operating range.
214
Hot Coolant Temperature Warning
Message
Check Engine Oil Pressure Message
Your vehicle may have
this feature. When you
see this flashing
symbol, the engine oil
pressure is low.
When you see this
flashing symbol, the
engine coolant
temperature is high
(257°F (125°C)).
To acknowledge this warning, press either button
on the outboard switch on the left spoke of the
steering wheel. After you press this button, the
warning will redisplay every 10 minutes until the
pressure returns to the normal operating range. Oil
pressure should be 20 to 80 psi (140 to 550 kPa). In
certain situations such as long, extended idles on
hot days, it could read as low as 6 psi (40 kPa) and
still be considered normal. It may vary with engine
speed, outside temperature and oil viscosity. The
Oil Pressure Light shoud also come on. See Oil
To acknowledge this warning, press either button
on the outboard switch on the left spoke of the
steering wheel. After you press a button, this
warning will come on every 10 minutes until the
temperature returns to the normal operating range.
Driving aggressively or driving on long hills can
cause the engine coolant temperature to be higher
than normal. The Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Light should also come on. See Engine
page 200 for more information. If this warning is
displayed during normal vehicle operation on
flat roads, your vehicle may need service.
See your dealer for an inspection.
215
Oil Temperature Warning Message
Tire Pressure Warning Message
When you see this
flashing symbol, the
engine oil temperature
is high.
When you see this
flashing symbol, one or
more of the vehicle’s
tires is either under
or over-inflated.
To acknowledge this warning, press either button
on the outboard switch on the left spoke of the
steering wheel. After you press a button, the
warning will come on every 10 minutes until the
temperature returns to the normal operating range.
Driving aggressively or driving on long hills can
cause the engine oil temperature to be higher than
normal. If this warning is displayed during
normal vehicle operation on flat roads, your vehicle
may need service. See your dealer for an
information.
To acknowledge this warning, press either button
on the outboard switch on the left spoke of the
steering wheel. There are three levels of warning
for this display:
1. High Tire Pressure (above 42 psi (290 kPa))
2. Low Tire Pressure (below 25 psi (170 kPa))
3. Flat Tire (below 5 psi (35 kPa))
216
For conditions 1 and 2, this warning will flash five
times and the display will then show the tire
pressure gage. For condition 3, this warning will
flash continuously until the driver acknowledges it.
In any of the three cases, the warning will
redisplay every 10 minutes until the situation is
corrected. Conditions 2 and 3 will also display a
warning light elsewhere on the cluster that will stay
on after this warning is acknowledged. See Tire
information. Also see Tire Pressure Monitor
pressure specifications.
One-to-Four Shift Message
(CTS-V Only)
This message indicates
that you can only shift
from FIRST (1) to
FOURTH (4) instead of
FIRST (1) to
SECOND (2).
You must complete the shift into FOURTH (4) to
turn off this feature. This helps you get the
best possible fuel economy.
After shifting to FOURTH (4), you may downshift
to a lower gear if you prefer.
for more information.
Notice: Forcing the shift lever into any gear
except FOURTH (4) when the 1 TO 4 SHIFT
message comes on may damage the
transmission. Shift only from FIRST (1) to
FOURTH (4) when the light comes on.
217
System Controls
Driver Information Center (DIC)
The DIC gives you the status of many of your
vehicle’s systems. It is also used to display driver
personalization features and warning/status
messages. All messages will appear on the audio
system display.
If your vehicle has the Base audio system, use the
information contained in this manual for
instructions on operating the DIC for your vehicle.
If your vehicle has the Navigation system, see
the Navigation system manual for instructions on
operating the DIC for your vehicle.
Use the following controls located on the audio
system to operate the DIC:
INFO (Information): Press the up or down arrows
on this switch, located on the right side of the
audio system, to scroll through the system status
information.
CLR (Clear): Press this button, located on the
right side of the audio system, to clear DIC
messages and to reset some DIC displays to zero.
This button is also used to exit out of a menu.
218
for more information.
• MILES RANGE (KM RANGE)
• MPG AVG (L/100 KM AVG)*
• MPG INST (L/100 KM INST)
• GAL FUEL USED (L FUEL USED)*
• AVG MPH (AVG KM/H)*
• TIMER*
TUNE/SEL (Select) Knob: Turn this knob, located
in the lower right corner of the audio system, to
scroll through the menu items displayed. Press this
knob to select the
menu item.
• BATTERY VOLTS
• ENGINE OIL LIFE*
Status of Vehicle Systems
You can view the status of several vehicle
systems using the DIC.
• TRANS FLUID LIFE*
(Automatic Transmission Only)
• PSI LF TIRE (KPA LF TIRE)
• PSI RF TIRE (KPA RF TIRE)
• PSI RR TIRE (KPA RR TIRE)
• PSI LR TIRE (KPA LR TIRE)
• BLANK LINE
*These items can be reset. Each one must be
reset individually. For a detailed description of the
menu items and how to reset them, see “Vehicle
Information Menu Item Descriptions” later in
this section.
Vehicle Information Menu
To access this menu, press the up or down arrow
on the INFO switch located to the right of the
display.
The following items are available when the ignition
is in ON. These items will not be available when
the ignition is in ACCESSORY. The tire pressure
menu items are only available if your vehicle
has the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) system:
• OUTSIDE TEMP
• MI TRIP A (KM TRIP A)*
• MI TRIP B (KM TRIP B)*
You can view any of these items at any time, but
only one item can be displayed at a time.
219
MILES RANGE (KM RANGE): If you select this
item, the approximate number of remaining
miles or kilometers you can drive without refueling
is displayed. This estimate is based on the
current driving conditions and will change if the
driving conditions change. For example, if you are
driving in traffic making frequent stops, the
display may read one number, but if you enter the
freeway, the number may change even though
you still have the same amount of gas in the gas
tank. This is because different driving conditions
produce different fuel economies. Generally,
freeway driving produces better fuel economy than
city driving.
Vehicle Information Menu Item
Descriptions
The following paragraphs contain a more detailed
description of each menu item:
OUTSIDE TEMP: If you select this item, the
current outside temperature is displayed at the top
of the screen. It will be in either degrees
Fahrenheit (°F) or degrees Celsius (°C) depending
upon whether the system is set for English or
metric units. If you wish to change the units, see
MI TRIP A and B (KM TRIP A and B): For
information on the trip odometers, see Trip
If your vehicle is low on fuel, the Fuel Level Low
message will be displayed. See “Fuel Level
page 228 for more information.
220
MPG AVG (L/100 KM AVG): If you select this
item, the approximate average miles per
gallon (mpg) or liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km)
is displayed. This number is calculated based
on the number of mpg (L/100 km) recorded since
the last time this menu item was reset.
AVG MPH (AVG KM/H): If you select this item,
the average speed of the vehicle is displayed
in miles per hour (mph) or kilometers per
hour (km/h). This average is calculated based on
the various vehicle speeds recorded since the
last reset of this menu item.
To reset the MPG AVG (L/100 KM AVG), press
the CLR button located to the right of the screen.
The display will return to zero.
To reset AVG MPH (AVG KM/H), press the CLR
button located to the right of the screen. The
display will return to zero.
MPG INST (L/100 KM INST): If you select this
item, the current fuel economy is displayed.
This number reflects only the fuel economy that
the vehicle has right now and will change
frequently as driving conditions change. Unlike
average fuel economy, this menu item cannot
be reset.
TIMER: If you select this item, a timing feature is
displayed. The timer functions like a stopwatch
in that you can record the time it takes to
travel from one point to another.
To turn on the timer, press the CLR button located
to the right of the screen once. The display will
read 00:00:00 TIMER ON and begin counting.
GAL FUEL USED (L FUEL USED): If you select
this item, the number of gallons or liters of fuel
used since the last reset of this menu item
is displayed.
To turn off the timer, press the CLR button again.
When the timer is off, the display will show the
timer value and TIMER OFF. The timing feature
will stop.
To reset GAL FUEL USED (L FUEL USED), press
the CLR button located to the right of the screen.
The display will return to zero.
To reset the timer, turn off the timer and then
press and hold the CLR button. The display will
return to zero.
221
BATTERY VOLTS: If you select this item, the
current battery voltage is displayed. If the voltage
is in the normal range, the display will have
OK after it. For example, the display may read
13.2 BATTERY VOLTS OK.
When you reset the Change Engine Oil message by
clearing it from the display, you still must reset the
engine oil life system separately. For more
information on resetting the engine oil life system,
see “How to Reset the Engine Oil Life System and
the Oil Life Indicator” under Engine Oil Life System
on page 350. If you clear the Change Engine Oil
message from the display, it will not re-appear.
If there is a problem with the battery charging
system, there are four possible DIC messages that
may be displayed. See DIC Warnings and
TRANS FLUID LIFE (Automatic Transmission): If
you select this item, the percentage of remaining
transmission fluid life is displayed. If you see
99% TRANS FLUID LIFE on the display, that
means that 99% of the current transmission fluid
life remains.
ENGINE OIL LIFE: If you select this item, the
percentage of remaining oil life is displayed.
If you see 99% ENGINE OIL LIFE on the display,
that means that 99% of the current oil life remains.
When the oil life is depleted, the Change Engine Oil
message will appear on the display. See your
dealer for service. In addition to the engine oil life
system monitoring the oil life, additional
maintenance is recommended in the Maintenance
Schedule in this manual. See Scheduled
page 346 for more information.
When the transmission fluid life is depleted, the
Change Trans Fluid message will appear on the
display. You should change the transmission fluid
as soon as possible. Be sure to keep a written
record of the mileage and date of the fluid change
so you will have it for future reference. See
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 474
for more information.
222
When you reset the Change Trans Fluid message
by clearing it from the display, you still must reset
the transmission fluid life monitor separately. For
more information on resetting the transmission fluid
page 353.
RR TIRE: If you select this item, the passenger’s
side rear tire pressure will be displayed. If the
tire pressure is low, LOW will be displayed
with this item. The pressure can be displayed in
pounds per square inch (PSI) or kilopascals (KPA).
page 224 DIC Main Menu.
LF TIRE: If you select this item, the driver’s side
front tire pressure will be displayed. If the tire
pressure is low, LOW will be displayed with this
item. The pressure can be displayed in pounds per
square inch (PSI) or kilopascals (KPA). To
DIC Main Menu.
LR TIRE: If you select this item, the driver’s side
rear tire pressure will be displayed. If the tire
pressure is low, LOW will be displayed with this
item. The pressure can be displayed in pounds per
square inch (PSI) or kilopascals (KPA). To
DIC Main Menu.
RF TIRE: If you select this item, the passenger’s
side front tire pressure will be displayed. If the
tire pressure is low, LOW will be displayed
with this item. The pressure can be displayed in
pounds per square inch (PSI) or kilopascals (KPA).
page 224 DIC Main Menu.
BLANK LINE: If you select this item, nothing is
displayed at the top of the screen.
223
• MSG RECALL RDS MESSAGE
• AF
DIC Main Menu
Accessing the DIC Main Menu
• A SEEK LOCAL/DISTANT
• 9 (English/Metric Units)
• TCS
To access the main menu of the DIC, do the
following:
1. Press the PWR/VOL knob to turn the
radio on.
• 8 (Clock)
2. Press the TUNE/SEL knob once.
• 8 / 4 (Clock/Information Display)
• SETUP
3. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to scroll through the
menu items.
DIC Main Menu Item Descriptions
The DIC main menu consists of the following
menu items:
e BASS - MID (Midrange) - TREBLE: This
menu item allows you to adjust the levels for the
bass, midrange, treble, balance, and fade features
of the audio system. For more information, see
“Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)” and “Adjusting the
Speakers (Balance/Fade)” under Radio with CD
on page 260.
• e BASS - MID - TREBLE
• e EQ
• DSP (Bose® Audio System)
• AVC (Bose® Audio System)
• H/A
• AUTOSTORE PRESETS
• CAT
• TA
e EQ (Equalizer): This menu item allows you to
choose among five preset equalizations for the
audio system. See “Audio Equalizer” under Radio
224
DSP (Digital Signal Processing): If your vehicle
has a Bose® Audio System, this menu item
allows you to select the DSP type that you want
on the audio system. You may choose Normal,
Talk, Spacious, Rear Seat, or Driver Seat. Press
the TUNE/SEL knob to scroll through these
choices. Once the desired choice is displayed,
turn the knob to set your DSP choice and continue
scrolling through the main menu.
H/A (Home/Away Preset Stations): This menu
item allows you to switch back and forth between
your home and away preset radio stations.
Press the TUNE/SEL knob to switch between
home and away.
See “Setting Preset Stations” under Radio with CD
on page 260 for more information.
AUTOSTORE PRESETS: This menu item allows
you to automatically store radio stations with
the strongest signals as presets. See “Setting
for more information.
page 260 for more information.
AVC (Automatic Volume Compensation): If
your vehicle has a Bose® Audio System, this menu
item allows you to turn the AVC feature on and
off. Press the TUNE/SEL knob once to turn
AVC on and off. When AVC is on, an X will be in
the box next to AVC on the menu. The X
disappears when AVC is off.
CAT (Category): This menu item allows you to
select radio stations based on preset categories.
To turn the CAT feature on, press the TUNE/SEL
knob once. When CAT is on, an X will be in
the box next to CAT on the menu. The X
disappears when CAT is off.
See “AVC (Automatic Volume Compensation)”
information.
See “Activating Category (CAT) Stations (RDS
more information.
225
TA (Traffic Announcement): This menu item
allows you to turn the TA feature on and off.
To turn the TA feature on, press the TUNE/SEL
knob once. When TA is on, an X will be in the box
next to TA on the menu. The X disappears
when TA is off.
A SEEK LOCAL/DISTANT: This feature instructs
the audio system to seek only local radio
stations with the strongest signal or to seek all
radio stations with a strong signal in a large area.
Use LOCAL when you are in urban areas
where there are several strong radio station
signals and you want to limit the number of
stations to those with the strongest signals only.
Use DISTANT when you are in rural areas
where there are fewer radio station signals
available.
page 260 for more information.
MSG (Message) RECALL RDS (Radio Data
System) MESSAGE: This menu item allows you
to view an RDS radio station message broadcast
by a radio station. To view the message, press the
TUNE/SEL knob once. The message will appear
on the screen.
To switch between LOCAL and DISTANT, press
the TUNE/SEL knob. Once your choice is
displayed, turn the knob to set your choice and
continue scrolling through the main menu.
page 260 for more information.
9 (English/Metric Units): Use this menu item
to adjust the measurement units.
AF (Alternate Frequency): This menu item
allows you to turn the AF feature on and off. To
turn on AF, press the TUNE/SEL knob once. When
AF is on, an X will be in the box next to AF on
the menu. The X disappears when AF is off.
You can choose between ENGLISH UNITS and
METRIC UNITS. To switch between the two, press
the TUNE/SEL knob. Once your choice is
displayed, turn the knob to set your choice and
continue scrolling through the main menu.
See “Activating Category (CAT) Stations (RDS
more information.
226
The measurement units that you choose will be
reflected on all the vehicle system displays,
not just the DIC information. For example, the
climate control panel will display degrees Celsius
if you choose METRIC UNITS.
8 (Clock): Use this menu item to set the time on
the clock.
information.
8 / 4 (Clock/Information Display): Use this
menu item to toggle between the clock display and
the XM™ Information (Song, Artist, Album), if
available.
TCS (Traction Control System): You can enable
or disable the Traction Control System (TCS)
using this menu item. Press the TUNE/SEL knob
to switch between on and off.
page 260 for more information.
You can also turn the TCS off using the traction
control button located in the glove box (CTS) or on
the steering wheel (CTS-V), or by programming
one of the steering wheel controls (1, 2, 3, or 4) or
audio system soft keys to enable/disable the
Radio Display Keys” under Radio with CD
on page 260 for more information.
SETUP: When you select this menu item, the
following submenu is available:
• LANGUAGE
• PERSONALIZATION
• CONFIGURE DISPLAY KEYS
When you disable the TCS, the traction control
system warning light on the instrument panel
cluster will come on. See Traction Control System
information.
• CONFIGURE SWC (Steering Wheel
Control) KEYS
227
To change the language displayed on the radio,
select LANGUAGE by pressing the TUNE/SEL
knob. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob to scroll through
the available languages and press the knob to
make your selection. If you accidentally select a
language that you did not want, ENGLISH is
always at the top of the language list.
Battery Not Charging
When this message appears on the display, there
is a problem with the generator and battery
charging systems. Have the electrical system
checked by your dealer as soon as possible.
Battery Saver Active
For more information on the other items in the
This message appears when the system detects
that the battery voltage is dropping beyond a
reasonable level. The battery saver system will
start reducing certain features of the vehicle which
you may be able to notice. At the point that the
features are disabled, this message is displayed.
It means that the vehicle is trying to save the
charge in the battery.
DIC Warnings and Messages
These messages will appear if there is a problem
detected in one of your vehicle’s systems.
Turn off all unnecessary accessories to allow the
battery to recharge.
You must acknowledge a message to clear it from
the screen for further use. To clear a message,
press the CLR button.
The normal battery voltage range is
11.5 to 15.5 volts. You can monitor battery voltage
on the DIC by pressing the INFO button until
BATTERY VOLTS appears.
Be sure to take any message that appears on the
screen seriously and remember that clearing
the message will only make the message
disappear, not the problem.
228
Battery Voltage High
Battery Voltage Low
This message indicates that the electrical charging
system is overcharging the battery. When the
system detects that the battery voltage is above
approximately 16 volts, this message will be
displayed.
This message will appear when the electrical
system is charging less than 10 volts or if
the battery has been drained.
If this message appears immediately after starting
the engine, it is possible that the generator can
still recharge the battery. The battery should
recharge while driving but may take a few hours to
do so. Consider using an auxiliary charger to
boost the battery after returning home or to a final
destination. Make sure you follow the
To reduce the charging overload, use the vehicle’s
accessories. Turn on the exterior lamps and
radio, set the climate control on AUTO and the fan
speed on the highest setting, and turn the rear
window defogger on.
manufacturer’s instructions.
The normal battery voltage range is
11.5 to 15.5 volts when the engine is running.
You can monitor battery voltage on the DIC
by pressing the INFO button until BATTERY
VOLTS appears.
If this message appears while driving or after
starting your vehicle and stays on, have it checked
by your dealer immediately to determine the
cause of this problem.
To help the generator recharge the battery quickly,
you can reduce the load on the electrical system
by turning off the accessories.
The normal battery voltage range is
11.5 to 15.5 volts. You can monitor battery voltage
on the DIC by pressing the INFO button until
BATTERY VOLTS appears.
229
If the driver remains unbuckled when the ignition is
on and the vehicle is in motion, the reminder will be
repeated. If the driver’s seat belt is already buckled,
this message and chime will not come on.
Buckle Passenger
This message reminds you to buckle the
passenger’s seat belt.
This message will display and a chime will sound
when the ignition is on, the driver’s seat belt is
buckled, the passenger’s seat belt is unbuckled
with the passenger airbag enabled, and the vehicle
is in motion. You should have the passenger
buckle their seat belt.
This message is an additional reminder to the
Safety Belt Reminder Light in the instrument panel
page 192 for more information.
Change Engine Oil
The reminder will be repeated if the ignition is on,
the vehicle is in motion, the driver is buckled
and the passenger is still unbuckled, and
the passenger airbag is enabled. If the
passenger’s seat belt is already buckled, this
message and chime will not come on.
This message indicates that the life of the engine
oil has expired and it should be changed and
that your vehicle is due for service. See your
information.
When you reset the Change Engine Oil message
by clearing it from the display, you still must
reset the engine oil life system separately. For
more information on resetting the engine oil
page 350. If you clear this message from the
display, it will not re-appear.
Buckle Seat Belt
This message reminds you to buckle the driver’s
seat belt.
This message will display and a chime will sound
when the ignition is on, the driver’s seat belt is
unbuckled, and the vehicle is in motion. You
should buckle your seat belt.
230
Change Trans (Transmission) Fluid
(Automatic Transmission)
Check Gas Cap
When this message appears on the display, the
gas cap has not been fully tightened. You
should recheck the gas cap to ensure that it is on
and tightened properly. See “If the Light Is On
Steady” under Malfunction Indicator Lamp
on page 202 for more information.
This message indicates that the life of the
transmission fluid has expired and it should be
change intervals.
Check Tire Pressure
When you reset the Change Trans Fluid message
by clearing it from the display, you still must
reset the transmission fluid life monitor separately.
For more information on resetting the transmission
fluid life monitor, see Automatic Transmission
If your vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
system, this message indicates that one or
more of the vehicle’s tires are low. See Status of
on checking your vehicle’s tire pressures. Also,
information.
Check Brake Fluid
This message will display if the ignition is in ON to
inform the driver that the brake fluid level is low.
Have the brake system serviced by your dealer as
soon as possible. See Brake System Warning
for more information.
Check Washer Fluid
When this message appears on the display, it
means that your vehicle is low on windshield
washer fluid. You should refill the windshield
washer fluid reservoir as soon as possible. See
more information.
231
Competitive Driving (CTS-V)
Engine Coolant Hot – AC
(Air Conditioning) Off
When competitive driving mode is turned on with
the TC (traction control) button, this message
will be displayed on the DIC. The TC light will be
on when the competitive driving mode is on.
The Traction Control System (TCS) will not
operate while in competitive driving mode. You
should adjust your driving accordingly. See
the CTS-V portion of Traction Control System
information.
This message displays when the engine coolant
becomes hotter than the normal operating
temperature. To avoid added strain on a hot
engine, the air conditioning compressor is
automatically turned off. When the coolant
temperature returns to normal, the air conditioning
compressor will turn back on. You can continue
to drive your vehicle.
If this message continues to appear, have the
system repaired by your dealer as soon as
possible to avoid damage to the engine or
transmission.
Driver Door Ajar
When this message appears on the display, it
means that the driver’s door was not closed
completely. You should make sure that the driver’s
door is closed completely.
232
Engine Coolant Hot – Idle Engine
Engine Power Reduced
This message informs you that the vehicle is
reducing engine power to try to protect the engine
or transmission from damage due to extreme
operating conditions. Reduced engine power can
affect the vehicle’s ability to accelerate. If this
message is on, but there is no reduction in
performance, proceed to your destination. The
performance may be reduced the next time
the vehicle is driven. The vehicle may be driven at
a reduced speed while this message is on, but
acceleration and speed may be reduced. Anytime
this message stays on, the vehicle should be
taken to your dealer for service as soon as
possible.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the
engine is overheating, severe engine damage
may occur. If an overheat warning appears
on the instrument panel cluster and/or
DIC, stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Do
not increase the engine speed above normal
page 360 for more information.
This message will appear when the engine coolant
temperature is too hot. Stop and allow the
vehicle to idle until it cools down.
233
Fuel Level Low
Left Rear Door Ajar
When this message appears on the display, it
means that your vehicle is low on fuel. You should
refill the fuel tank as soon as possible. A single
chime will sound when this message is displayed.
When this message appears on the display, it
means that the driver’s side rear door was
not closed completely. You should make sure that
the door is closed completely.
Headlamps Suggested
Oil Pressure Low – Stop Engine
This message will appear when the amount of
available light outside the vehicle is low and
the exterior lamp control is off. This message
informs the driver that turning on the exterior lamps
is recommended even though the daytime
running lamps (DRL) are still illuminated and it has
become dark enough outside to require the
headlamps and/or other exterior lamps.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the
engine oil pressure is low, severe engine
damage may occur. If a low oil pressure
warning appears on the instrument panel
cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soon as
possible. Do not drive the vehicle until the
cause of the low oil pressure is corrected. See
This message will also appear when the
windshield wipers have been on for more than
six seconds and the exterior lamp control is off or
in the parking lamp position.
Passenger Door Ajar
When this message appears on the display, it
means that the passenger’s side front door was
not closed completely. You should make sure that
the door is closed completely.
Ice Possible
This message appears when the outside
temperature is cold enough to create icy road
conditions.
234
Right Rear Door Ajar
Service Charging System
When this message appears on the display, it
means that the passenger’s side rear door was not
closed completely. You should check to make
sure that the door is closed completely.
This message will display when a problem with
the charging system has been detected. Have your
vehicle serviced by your dealer.
Service Electrical System
Service AC (Air Conditioning) System
This message will display if an electrical problem
has occurred within the Powertrain Control
Module (PCM) or the ignition switch. Have your
vehicle serviced by your dealer.
This message appears when the electronic
sensors that control the air conditioning and
heating systems are no longer working. Have the
climate control system serviced by your dealer
if you notice a drop in heating and air conditioning
efficiency.
Service Fuel System
The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) has
detected a problem within the fuel system when
this message appears. Have your vehicle serviced
by your dealer.
Service Air Bag
There is a problem with the airbag system when
this message appears. Have your vehicle serviced
by your dealer immediately. See Airbag Readiness
Service Idle Control
A problem with the idle control has occurred when
this message displays. Have your vehicle
serviced by your dealer.
Service Brake Assist
This message will display when a problem with
the panic brake assist system has been detected.
Have your vehicle serviced by your dealer.
235
Service Stability System
Service Theft System
If your vehicle has StabiliTrak®, this message will
be displayed if there has been a problem
detected with StabiliTrak®.
This message means there is a problem with the
more information. A fault has been detected in the
system, which means that the system is disabled
and is not protecting the vehicle. The vehicle
usually restarts, however, you may want to take
your vehicle to your dealer before turning off
the engine.
If this message comes on while you are driving,
pull off the road as soon as possible and stop
carefully. Try resetting the system by turning the
ignition off and then back on. If this message
still stays on, or comes back on again while you
are driving, your vehicle needs service. Have
the StabiliTrak® system inspected by your dealer
on page 299 for more information.
Service Tire Monitor System
If your vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
system, this message will appear if the TPM
system is not working properly. Have your vehicle
serviced at your dealer as soon as possible.
for more information.
Service Steering System
Your vehicle may have a speed variable assist
Service Transmission
This message will be displayed if a problem is
detected with the speed variable assist steering
system. When this message is displayed, you may
notice that the effort required to steer the vehicle
increases or feels heavier, but you will still be able
to steer the vehicle.
This message will display if there is a problem
with the transmission of your vehicle. Have your
vehicle serviced by your dealer.
236
Service Vehicle Soon
Stability System Ready
If your vehicle has StabiliTrak®, this message will
be displayed any time you turn StabiliTrak® on
again using the TC (traction control) on/off button.
this message has been displayed, StabiliTrak®
is ready to assist you with directional control of the
vehicle, if needed.
This message is displayed when a non-emissions
related powertrain malfunction occurs. Have
your vehicle serviced by your dealer as soon as
possible.
Stability System Engaged
If your vehicle has StabiliTrak®, this message will
be displayed any time StabiliTrak® is actively
assisting you with directional control of the vehicle.
Slippery road conditions may exist when this
message is displayed, so adjust your driving
accordingly. This message may stay on for a few
seconds after StabiliTrak® stops assisting you with
Starting Disabled – Remove Key
This message will appear when the vehicle
theft-deterrent system detects that an improper
ignition key is being used to try to start the vehicle.
Check the ignition key for damage. If it is
damaged, it may need to be replaced. If it is not
damaged, remove the key and try to start the
vehicle again. If it still does not start, try another
ignition key or have your vehicle serviced by
your dealer.
Stability System Off
If your vehicle has StabiliTrak®, this message will
be displayed any time you turn off StabiliTrak®
using the TC (traction control) on/off button. See
Traction Control System (TCS) (CTS) on page 295
page 297 for more information. When this message
has been displayed, StabiliTrak® is no longer
available to assist you with directional control of the
vehicle. Adjust your driving accordingly.
Starting Disabled – Throttle Problem
This message appears when your vehicle’s throttle
system is not functioning properly. Have your
vehicle serviced by your dealer.
237
Theft Attempted
Trans (Transmission) Hot – Idle Engine
This message is displayed if the content
theft-deterrent system has detected a break-in
attempt while you were away from your vehicle.
This message indicates that the transmission
fluid in your vehicle is too hot. Stop the vehicle and
allow it to idle until the transmission cools down
or until this message is removed. See also
more information.
Top Speed – Fuel Cut Off
This message will appear when the Engine
Control Module (ECM) detects that the maximum
speed for your vehicle has been reached. Your
vehicle’s top speed is based on the top speed
rating of the tires. This ensures that your vehicle
stays in a safe operating range for the tires.
Trunk Open
When this message appears on the display, it
means that the trunk lid of your vehicle was not
closed completely. You should make sure that the
trunk lid is closed completely.
Traction Engaged
Turn Signal On
This message will appear when the Traction
Control System (TCS) is actively limiting wheel
spin. Slippery road conditions may exist if
this message is displayed, so adjust your driving
accordingly. The message will stay on for a
few seconds after the TCS stops limiting wheel
If you drive your vehicle for more than about
1 mile (1.6 km) with a turn signal on, this message
will appear as a reminder to turn off the turn
signal. A multiple chime will sound when this
message is displayed.
238
Entering the Personalization Menu
DIC Vehicle Personalization
If your vehicle has the navigation system, see the
navigation system manual for instructions on
operating the DIC for your vehicle.
Your vehicle has personalization that allows you to
program certain features to a preferred setting
for up to two people. The number of programmable
features varies depending upon which model of
the vehicle is purchased.
On all vehicles, features such as climate control
settings, radio preset settings, exterior lighting
at unlock, remote lock and unlock confirmation,
and automatic door locks have already been
programmed for your convenience.
Some vehicles have additional features that can
be programmed including the seat and outside
rearview mirror position.
If your vehicle has the ability to program additional
personalization features, the driver’s preferences
are recalled by pressing the unlock button on the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, 1 or 2, or
by pressing the appropriate memory button, 1 or 2,
located on the driver’s door. Certain features can be
programmed not to recall until the key is placed in
the ignition. To change feature preferences, see
“Entering the Personalization Menu” following.
To enter the feature programming mode, use the
following procedure:
1. Turn the ignition to ON, but do not start the
engine. Make sure an automatic transmission
is in PARK (P) or a manual transmission
has the parking brake set.
To avoid excessive drain on the battery, it is
recommended that the headlamps are
turned off.
2. If your vehicle has memory settings, press the
appropriate memory button, 1 or 2, located on
the driver’s door armrest. The DIC display
will show either Driver 1 or 2 depending
on which button was selected.
3. Press the PWR/VOL knob to turn the
radio on.
4. Press the TUNE/SEL knob once to access the
main menu of the DIC.
5. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until SETUP is
highlighted.
6. Press the TUNE/SEL knob once to access the
SETUP menu.
239
7. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until the feature you
want to change is highlighted, then press the
TUNE/SEL knob to turn the feature on or
off. If the feature is turned on, a check mark
will appear next to the feature name.
To program a name, use the following procedure:
1. Enter the Personalization menu following
the instructions listed previously.
2. Select the PERSONALIZATION NAME menu
item by pressing the TUNE/SEL knob once.
If none of the personalization items are turned
on, turn on the personalization menu by
pressing the TUNE/SEL knob. The list of
features will then appear, and you can repeat
Step 6.
You will see a cursor on the screen.
3. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until you reach the
first letter you want. The letter will be
highlighted. There is a complete alphabet with
both upper and lower case letters and the
numbers zero through nine. Also included are
spaces and other non-letter characters
such as the ampersand (&).
Personalization Features
The following choices are available for
programming:
4. Press the TUNE/SEL knob once to select the
letter. The letter will then appear on the display.
Personalization Name
This feature allows you to type in a name that will
appear on the DIC display whenever the
corresponding Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter is used or one of the buttons on the
driver’s door armrest (1 or 2) is pressed.
If you make a mistake, press the CLR button.
This will exit the menu. You can then go
back into the menu and edit the name. You
can also press the TUNE/SEL knob repeatedly
to cycle through all the characters until you
reach the character you wish to change.
If a customized name is not programmed, the
system will show DRIVER 1 or DRIVER 2
to correspond with the numbers on the back of the
RKE transmitters.
5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 until the name you
want is complete. You can program up to
16 characters.
240
The name you selected is now set. You can either
exit the programming mode by following the
instructions later in this section or program the
next feature available on your vehicle. To program
the next feature, enter the personalization
portion of the SETUP menu following the
instructions listed previously.
Remote Recall Memory
If your vehicle has the optional memory package,
you will have this feature. When this feature is
turned on, you can recall any previously
programmed seat and mirror controls when the
unlock button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter is pressed.
Configure Display Keys
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
This feature allows you to customize the functions
of the four soft keys located to the left and right
of the audio display. See “Configurable Radio
for programming information.
Mode 2: OFF
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory,
it was programmed to Mode 2. The mode to
which the vehicle was programmed may have
been changed since it left the factory.
Configure SWC (Steering Wheel
Controls) Keys
This feature allows you to customize the functions
of the four steering wheel controls located on
the left spoke of the steering wheel. See
241
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use
the following procedure:
Remote Exit Recall
If your vehicle has the optional memory package,
you will have this feature. When this feature is
turned on, you can recall any previously
programmed exit position for the driver’s seat
when the unlock button on the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter is pressed.
1. Enter the personalization portion of the
SETUP menu following the instructions
listed previously.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until REMOTE
RECALL MEMORY is highlighted.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to switch back and
forth between on and off.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark
will appear next to the feature name.
Mode 2: OFF
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory,
it was programmed to Mode 2. The mode to
which the vehicle was programmed may have
been changed since it left the factory.
If this feature is selected, Remote Exit Recall or
Key In Recall Memory cannot be selected.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either
exit the programming mode by following the
instructions later in this section or program the
next feature available on your vehicle.
242
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use
the following procedure:
Key in Recall Memory
If your vehicle has the optional memory package,
you will have this feature. When this feature is
turned on, you can recall any previously
programmed seat and mirror positions when the
key is inserted into the ignition.
1. Enter the personalization portion of the
SETUP menu following the instructions
listed previously.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until REMOTE EXIT
RECALL is highlighted.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to switch back and
forth between on and off.
Mode 2: OFF
When the mode is turned on, a check mark
will appear next to the feature name.
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory,
it was programmed to Mode 2. The mode to
which the vehicle was programmed may have
been changed since it left the factory.
If this feature is selected, Remote Recall Memory
cannot be selected.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either
exit the programming mode by following the
instructions later in this section or program the
next feature available on your vehicle.
243
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use
the following procedure:
1. Enter the personalization portion of the
SETUP menu following the instructions
listed previously.
Auto Exit Seat
If your vehicle has the optional memory package,
you will have this feature. When this feature is
turned on, you can recall any previously
programmed exit position for the driver’s seat
when the key is removed from the ignition and the
driver’s door is opened.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until KEY IN
RECALL MEMORY is highlighted.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to switch back and
forth between on and off.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark
will appear next to the feature name.
If this feature is selected, Remote Recall Memory
cannot be selected.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either
exit the programming mode by following the
instructions later in this section or program the
next feature available on your vehicle.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
Mode 2: OFF
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory,
it was programmed to Mode 2. The mode to
which the vehicle was programmed may have
been changed since it left the factory.
244
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use
the following procedure:
Twilight Delay
This feature allows you to set the amount of time
you want the exterior lamps to remain on after
you exit the vehicle.
1. Enter the personalization portion of the
SETUP menu following the instructions
listed previously.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: 0:00 seconds
Mode 2: 0:15 seconds
Mode 3: 0:30 seconds
Mode 4: 1:00 minute
Mode 5: 1:30 minutes
Mode 6: 2:00 minutes
Mode 7: 2:30 minutes
Mode 8: 3:00 minutes
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until AUTO EXIT
SEAT is highlighted.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to switch back and
forth between on and off.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark
will appear in the box next to the feature name.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either
exit the programming mode by following the
instructions later in this section or program the
next feature available on your vehicle.
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory,
it was programmed to Mode 1. The mode to
which the vehicle was programmed may have
been changed since the vehicle left the factory.
245
To determine the mode to which the vehicle is
programmed or to program the vehicle to a
different mode, use the following procedure:
Lights Flash at Unlock
This feature flashes the exterior lamps when the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is used to
unlock the vehicle. The lamps will flash for
approximately 20 seconds unless a door is
opened, the ignition is turned to ACCESSORY,
ON, or START, or the RKE transmitter is used to
lock the vehicle.
1. Enter the personalization portion of the
SETUP menu following the instructions
listed previously.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until TWILIGHT
DELAY is highlighted.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to scroll through
and select the available delay settings.
If you choose Mode 1, the exterior lamps will
not illuminate when you exit the vehicle.
Only one mode can be selected at a time.
Mode 2: OFF
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory,
it was programmed to Mode 1. The mode to
which the vehicle was programmed may have
been changed since it left the factory.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either
exit the programming mode by following the
instructions later in this section or program the
next feature available on your vehicle.
246
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use
the following procedure:
Lights Flash at Lock
This feature allows the exterior lamps to flash
once when the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter is used to lock the vehicle. All doors
must be closed for this feature to work, and
the lamps will not flash if the parking lamps or
headlamps are on.
1. Enter the personalization portion of the
SETUP menu following the instructions
listed previously.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until LIGHTS
FLASH AT UNLOCK is highlighted.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to switch back and
forth between on and off.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark
will appear next to the feature name.
Mode 2: OFF
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory,
it was programmed to Mode 1. The mode to
which the vehicle was programmed may have
been changed since it left the factory.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either
exit the programming mode by following the
instructions later in this section or program the
next feature available on your vehicle.
247
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use
the following procedure:
Horn Sounds at Lock
This feature sounds the horn once when the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is used
to lock the vehicle. All doors must be closed
for this feature to work.
1. Enter the personalization portion of the
SETUP menu following the instructions
listed previously.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until LIGHTS
FLASH AT LOCK is highlighted.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to switch back and
forth between on and off.
Mode 2: OFF
When the mode is turned on, a check mark
will appear next to the feature name.
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory,
it was programmed to Mode 2. The mode to
which the vehicle was programmed may have
been changed since it left the factory.
You can select this feature by itself, or you can
combine it with Horn Sounds At Lock so that both
the lights flash and the horn chirps when you
lock your vehicle.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either
exit the programming mode by following the
instructions later in this section or program the
next feature available on your vehicle.
248
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use
the following procedure:
Exterior Lights at Unlock
This feature turns on the exterior lamps when the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is
used to unlock the vehicle. The lamps will remain
on for about 20 seconds unless a door is
opened, the ignition is turned to ACCESSORY,
ON, or START, or the RKE transmitter is used to
lock the vehicle.
1. Enter the personalization portion of the
SETUP menu following the instructions
listed previously.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until HORN
SOUNDS AT LOCK is highlighted.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to switch back and
forth between on and off.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
When the mode is turned on, a check mark
will appear next to the feature name.
Mode 2: OFF
If you select this feature to be on, Lights Flash At
Lock will also be on. You can choose Lights
Flash At Lock by itself, but Horn Sounds At Lock
will always have Lights Flash At Lock enabled
when it is selected.
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory,
it was programmed to Mode 1. The mode to
which the vehicle was programmed may have
been changed since it left the factory.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either
exit the programming mode by following the
instructions later in this section or program the
next feature available on your vehicle.
249
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use
the following procedure:
Driver Unlock in Park
(Automatic Transmission Only)
1. Enter the personalization portion of the
SETUP menu following the instructions
listed previously.
The feature allows the driver’s door to
automatically unlock when the transmission is
shifted into PARK (P).
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until EXT. LIGHT
AT UNLOCK is highlighted.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to switch back and
forth between on and off.
Mode 2: OFF
When the mode is turned on, a check mark
will appear next to the feature name.
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory,
it was programmed to Mode 2. The mode to
which the vehicle was programmed may have
been changed since it left the factory.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either
exit the programming mode by following the
instructions later in this section or program the
next feature available on your vehicle.
250
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use
the following procedure:
Driver Unlock Key Out Automatic
Transmission Only/Driver Unlock Key Off
(Manual Transmission Only)
1. Enter the personalization portion of the
SETUP menu following the instructions
listed previously.
This feature allows the driver’s door to
automatically unlock when the key is removed
from the ignition on automatic transmission
vehicles or when the ignition is turned to OFF for
manual transmission vehicles.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until DRIVER
UNLOCK IN PARK is highlighted.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to switch back and
forth between on and off.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
When the mode is turned on, a check mark
will appear next to the feature name.
Mode 2: OFF
If this feature is selected, Driver Unlock Key
Out/Off, Doors Unlock Key Out/Off, or Doors
Unlock in Park cannot be selected.
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory,
it was programmed to Mode 2. The mode to
which the vehicle was programmed may have
been changed since it left the factory.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either
exit the programming mode by following the
instructions later in this section or program the
next feature available on your vehicle.
251
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use
the following procedure:
Doors Unlock in Park (Automatic
Transmission Only)
1. Enter the personalization portion of the
SETUP menu following the instructions
listed previously.
The feature allows the doors to automatically
unlock when the transmission is shifted into
PARK (P).
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until DRIVER
UNLOCK KEY OUT/OFF is highlighted.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to switch between
on and off.
Mode 2: OFF
When the mode is turned on, a check mark
will appear next to the feature name.
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory,
it was programmed to Mode 2. The mode to
which the vehicle was programmed may have
been changed since it left the factory.
If this feature is selected, Driver Unlock in Park
(automatic transmission), Doors Unlock in
Park (automatic transmission), or Doors Unlock
Key Out/Off cannot be selected.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either
exit the programming mode by following the
instructions later in this section or program the
next feature available on your vehicle.
252
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use
the following procedure:
Doors Unlock Key Out (Automatic
Transmission Only)/ Doors Unlock Key Off
(Manual Transmission Only)
1. Enter the personalization portion of the
SETUP menu following the instructions
listed previously.
This feature allows the doors to automatically
unlock when the key is removed from the ignition
on automatic transmission vehicles or when
the ignition is turned to OFF on manual
transmission vehicles.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until DOORS
UNLOCK IN PARK is highlighted.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to switch back and
forth between on and off.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
When the mode is turned on, a check mark
will appear next to the feature name.
Mode 2: OFF
If this feature is selected, Doors Unlock Key
Out/Off, Driver Unlock Key Out/Off, or Driver
Unlock in Park (automatic transmission) cannot be
selected.
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory,
it was programmed to Mode 2. The mode to
which the vehicle was programmed may have
been changed since it left the factory.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either
exit the programming mode by following the
instructions later in this section or program the
next feature available on your vehicle.
253
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use
the following procedure:
Delayed Locking
This feature delays the locking of the vehicle’s
doors for up to five seconds after a power
door lock switch or the lock button on the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is pressed.
The five second delay occurs after the last door is
closed.
1. Enter the personalization portion of the
SETUP menu following the instructions
listed previously.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until DOORS
UNLOCK KEY OUT/OFF is highlighted.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to switch between
on and off.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark
will appear next to the feature name.
Mode 2: OFF
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory,
it was programmed to Mode 1. The mode to
which the vehicle was programmed may have
been changed since it left the factory.
If this feature is selected, Doors Unlock in Park
(automatic transmission), Driver Unlock in
Park (automatic transmission), or Driver Unlock
Key Out/Off cannot be selected.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either
exit the programming mode by following the
instructions later in this section or program the
next feature available on your vehicle.
254
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use
the following procedure:
Lock Passenger Window
This feature allows you to disable either all the
passenger window switches or the rear passenger
window switches only. If this feature is turned
on, all passenger window switches will be disabled
when the window lockout button is pressed. If
the feature is off, only the rear passenger window
switches will be disabled. See Power Windows
on page 104 for more information.
1. Enter the personalization portion of the
SETUP menu following the instructions
listed previously.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until DELAYED
LOCKING is highlighted.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to switch back and
forth between on and off.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
When the mode is turned on, a check mark
will appear next to the feature name.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either
exit the programming mode by following the
instructions later in this section or program the
next feature available on your vehicle.
Mode 2: OFF
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory,
it was programmed to Mode 2. The mode to
which the vehicle was programmed may have
been changed since it left the factory.
255
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use
the following procedure:
Mirror to Curb in Reverse
If your vehicle has the optional memory package,
you will have this feature. When this feature is
turned on, the passenger’s outside rearview mirror
will move downward so you can view the curb
when the shift lever is shifted into REVERSE (R).
The mirror will return to the last known driving
position when the shift lever is moved out of
REVERSE (R). See Outside Curb View Assist
1. Enter the personalization portion of the
SETUP menu following the instructions
listed previously.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until LOCK PASS
WINDOW is highlighted.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to switch back and
forth between on and off.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark
will appear next to the feature name.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
The mode you selected is now set. You can either
exit the programming mode by following the
instructions later in this section or program the
next feature available on your vehicle.
Mode 2: OFF
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory,
it was programmed to Mode 2. The mode to
which the vehicle was programmed may have
been changed since it left the factory.
256
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use
the following procedure:
Enhanced Chime Volume
This feature allows you to adjust the volume level
of the vehicle’s warning chimes. The chime
volume cannot be turned off, only adjusted.
1. Enter the personalization portion of the
SETUP menu following the instructions
listed previously.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: NORMAL
Mode 2: LOUD
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until MIRROR TO
CURB IN REV is highlighted.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to switch back and
forth between on and off.
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory,
it was programmed to Mode 1. The mode to
which the vehicle was programmed may have
been changed since it left the factory.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark
will appear next to the feature name.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either
exit the programming mode by following the
instructions later in this section or program the
next feature available on your vehicle.
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use
the following procedure:
1. Enter the personalization portion of the
SETUP menu following the instructions
listed previously.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until ENHANCED
CHIME VOLUME is highlighted.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to switch back and
forth between the normal and loud settings.
257
The mode you selected is now set. You can either
exit the programming mode by following the
instructions later in this section or program the
next feature available on your vehicle.
Audio System(s)
Determine which radio your vehicle has and then
read the pages following to familiarize yourself
with its features.
Exiting the Personalization Menu
Driving without distraction is a necessity for a
page 288. By taking a few moments to read this
manual and get familiar with your vehicle’s
audio system, you can use it with less effort, as
well as take advantage of its features. While your
vehicle is parked, set up your audio system by
presetting your favorite radio stations, setting the
tone and adjusting the speakers. Then, when
driving conditions permit, you can tune to
To exit the personalization portion of the SETUP
menu, press the CLR button once you have
finished making your selections. You will return to
the main audio screen.
If a 15 second time period has elapsed with no
selection made, the SETUP menu will be
exited automatically.
your favorite stations using the presets and
steering wheel controls if the vehicle has them.
258
• Set up your audio system by presetting your
favorite radio stations, setting the tone, and
adjusting the speakers. Then, when driving
conditions permit, you can tune to your favorite
radio stations using the presets and steering
wheel controls if the vehicle has them.
{CAUTION:
This system provides you with a far
greater access to audio stations and song
listings. Giving extended attention to
entertainment tasks while driving can
cause a crash and you or others can be
injured or killed. Always keep your eyes
on the road and your mind on the
drive — avoid engaging in extended
searching while driving.
Notice: Before adding any sound equipment
to your vehicle, such as an audio system,
CD player, CB radio, mobile telephone,
or two-way radio, make sure that it can be
added by checking with your dealer. Also,
check federal rules covering mobile radio and
telephone units. If sound equipment can be
added, it is very important to do it properly.
Added sound equipment may interfere with the
operation of your vehicle’s engine, radio, or
other systems, and even damage them.
Your vehicle’s systems may interfere with the
operation of sound equipment that has
been added.
Keeping your mind on the drive is important for
safe driving. For more information, see Defensive
Here are some ways in which you can help avoid
distraction while driving.
Your vehicle has a feature called Retained
Accessory Power (RAP). With RAP, the audio
system can be played even after the ignition
is turned off. See Retained Accessory
While your vehicle is parked:
• Familiarize yourself with all of its controls.
• Familiarize yourself with its operation.
259
Setting the Time
Radio with CD
1. Press the TUNE/SEL (select) knob to enter
the main menu.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until SET CLOCK
appears on the display.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to select
SET CLOCK.
4. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob to adjust the time.
5. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to update the
time. VEHICLE TIME UPDATED will appear
on the display.
If the CLOCK/RADIO DISP (display) is configured
into one of the configurable keys, pressing the key
will switch the display between the radio station
frequency and the time. See “Configurable Radio
more information on configuring the keys.
Radio with CD shown, Radio with Six-Disc CD
similar
260
Radio Data System (RDS)
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).
RDS features are available for use only on FM
stations that broadcast RDS information.
XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in
the 48 contiguous United States and Canada.
XM™ offers a large variety of coast-to-coast
channels including music, news, sports, talk,
traffic/weather (U.S. subscribers), and children’s
programming. XM™ provides digital quality
audio and text information that includes song title
and artist name. A service fee is required in
order to receive the XM™ service. For more
information, contact XM™; In the U.S. at
www.xmradio.com or call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696)
or in Canada at www.xmradio.ca or call
With RDS, the radio can do the following:
• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected
type of programming
• Receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies
• Display messages from radio stations
• Seek to stations with traffic announcements
1-877-GET-XMSR (438-9677).
This system relies upon receiving specific
information from these stations and will only work
when the information is available. In rare cases, a
radio station may broadcast incorrect information
that will cause the radio features to work
improperly. If this happens, contact the radio
station.
CLOCK/INFO DISP (Clock/Information
Display): Press the CLOCK/INFO DISP button to
switch between the clock display, the XM™
screen, and the XM™ information display.
While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, the
station name or call letters will appear on the
display instead of the frequency. RDS stations may
also provide the time of day, a program type
(PTY) for current programming, and the name of
the program being broadcast.
261
Press this button while in XM™ mode to retrieve
three different categories of information related
to the current song or channel: Artist, Song Title,
and Category. To view this information, perform
the following:
Playing the Radio
PWR (Power): Press this knob to turn the system
on and off.
VOL (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or to
decrease the volume.
1. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter the
main menu.
AVC (Automatic Volume Compensation):
Available only with the premium Bose® audio
system. AVC, which utilizes Bose AudioPilot® noise
compensation technology, continuously adjusts the
audio system equalization, to compensate for
background noise, so that your music always
sounds the same at the set volume level. This
feature is most effective at lower radio volume
settings where background noise can affect how
well you hear the music being played through your
vehicle’s audio system. At higher volume settings,
where the music is much louder than the
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until CLOCK/INFO
DISP appears on the display.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to select
CLOCK/INFO DISP. The display will change
to show the additional XM™ information.
4. To return to the original display, press the
CLR (clear) button or wait for the display to
time out.
If the CLOCK/INFO DISP is configured into one of
the configurable keys, pressing the key will
switch the display between the radio station
frequency and the time. See “Configurable Radio
Display Keys” later in this section for more
information.
background noise, there may be little or no
adjustments by AVC. To turn AVC on and off,
perform the following steps:
1. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter the
main menu.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until AUTO
VOLUME COMP. appears on the display.
262
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to turn AVC on or
off. An X will appear in the box when AVC is
selected on.
Q SCAN R: Press the SCAN button to enter
scan mode. SCAN will appear on the display.
Press the up arrow to scan to the next station.
The radio will go to a station, play for five seconds,
then go on to the next station. Press this button
again to stop scanning.
4. Press the CLR button to exit the display. To
return to the original display, repeatedly press
the CLR button or wait for the display to
time out.
To scan preset stations, press and hold SCAN for
more than two seconds until you hear a beep
and PSCAN appears on the display. The radio will
go to the first preset station stored on your firm
keys, play for five seconds, then go on to the next
preset station. Press SCAN again to stop
scanning presets.
SOURCE: Press this button to select a source,
either radio or CD. The CD must be loaded
to select the source and to play. CD will appear
on the display if a CD is loaded. If a CD is
not loaded the display will not change from the
radio source.
The radio will only scan stations with a strong
signal that are in the selected band.
Finding a Station
BAND: Press this button to select FM1, FM2, AM,
or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped).
Q SEEK R: Press the up or the down arrow to
go to the next or to the previous station and
stay there. SEEK will appear on the display. The
sound will mute while seeking.
The radio will only seek stations with a strong
signal that are in the selected band.
263
LOCAL/DISTANT Selection: With this feature
you can set the radio to search for local stations or
stations that are further away for a larger
selection. To set this feature to LOCAL or
DISTANT, perform the following steps:
Setting Preset Stations
Up to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM,
six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped)), can be
programmed on the six numbered firm keys, by
performing the following steps:
1. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter the
main menu.
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, or AM, or
XM1 or XM2.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until SEEK LOCAL
or SEEK DISTANT appears on the display.
3. Tune in the desired station.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to select either
LOCAL or DISTANT.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered firm
keys for two seconds until you hear a beep.
The set preset station number will appear
on the display above the firm key that it is set
to. Whenever that numbered firm key is
pressed for less than two seconds, the station
that was set will return.
4. Press the CLR button to exit the display. To
return to the original display, repeatedly press
the CLR button or wait for the display to
time out.
To search for stations, press the SEEK up or
down arrows. If the system is set to LOCAL, SEEK
will appear in the display and seek to stations
with strong signals only. If the system is set
to DISTANT, D-SEEK will appear in the display
and seek to stations with weak and strong signals.
264
5. Repeat the steps for each firm key.
5. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to select.
AUTOSTORE will appear on the display. The
radio will automatically search the band
and select and store the six radio stations
with the strongest signal. The stations will be
stored by signal strength, not sequential
order. The set preset station number
To set the preset stations with an equalization
setting, DSP (digital signal processing) setting,
or a program type (PTY) setting, see each of
these features later in this section. When a
preset station is selected, once one of these
additional settings is selected, the preset station
will remember each setting and it will remain
active, until the setting is selected off for that
preset station.
will appear on the display above the firm key
that it is set to. Whenever that numbered
firm key is pressed for less than two seconds,
the station that was set will return.
AUTOSTORE PRESETS: To set the preset
stations automatically, perform the following steps:
6. Press the CLR button to exit the display. To
return to the original display, repeatedly press
the CLR button or wait for the display to
time out.
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, or AM.
When battery power is removed and later applied,
you will not have to reset your radio presets.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter the
main menu.
4. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until AUTOSTORE
PRESETS appears on the display.
265
PRESETS HOME/AWAY: This feature gives you
the ability to store two different kinds of station
presets. HOME can be used for stations available
where you live and AWAY can be for stations
available outside of your local broadcasting area.
To set preset stations for home and away
perform the following steps:
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
To adjust the bass, midrange, and treble, perform
the following steps:
1. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter the
main menu.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until
1. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter the
main menu.
BASS-MID-TREBLE appears on the display.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter the tone
settings.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until PRESETS
HOME/AWAY appears on the display.
4. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to scroll through
the settings.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to select. HOME
or AWAY will appear on the display.
5. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob to increase or to
decrease the bass, midrange, or treble. If a
station is weak or noisy, decrease the treble.
4. Press the CLR button to exit the display. To
return to the original display, repeatedly press
the CLR button or wait for the display to
time out.
6. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to set the
adjustment.
Follow the manual or automatic steps previously
listed for setting the preset firm keys for both home
and away.
7. Press the CLR button to exit the display. To
return to the original display repeatedly press
the CLR button or wait for the display to
time out.
266
AUDIO EQUALIZER: This feature allows you to
select customized equalization settings. To choose
an equalization setting (EQ0 through EQ5),
perform the following steps:
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
To adjust the balance or fade, perform the
following steps:
1. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter the
main menu.
1. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter the
main menu.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until EQUALIZER
appears on the display.
BASS-MID-TREBLE appears on the display.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter the tone
settings.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to set the
equalization setting. The equalization setting
will appear on the display.
4. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to scroll to
BALANCE or FADER.
4. Press the CLR button to exit the display. To
return to the original display, repeatedly press
the CLR button or wait for the display to
time out.
5. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob to adjust the
BALANCE to the right or the left speakers and
the FADER to the front or the rear speakers.
The equalization settings are preset to
EQ0 (Normal), EQ1 (Pop), EQ2 (Rock),
EQ3 (Jazz), EQ4 (Talk), and EQ5 (Country).
6. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to set the
adjustment.
7. Press the CLR button to exit the display. To
return to the original display, repeatedly press
the CLR button or wait for the display to
time out.
EQ0 will not appear on the display when in
this mode.
267
TALK: This setting should be used when listening
to non-musical material such as news, talk
shows, sports broadcasts, and books on tape.
Talk makes spoken words sound very clear.
Using Digital Signal Processing (DSP)
Available only with the premium Bose® audio
system, this feature is used to provide a choice of
five different listening experiences: DSP normal,
talk, spacious, rear seat, and driver seat. DSP can
be used while listening to the radio or the CD
player. The radio keeps separate DSP settings for
each band, preset, and source. To select a
DSP choice, perform the following steps:
SPACIOUS: This setting is used to make the
listening space seem larger.
REAR SEAT: This setting adjusts the audio to
give the rear seat passenger(s) the best possible
sound quality. Sound quality for the front seat
passengers may be different when this setting
is used.
1. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter the
main menu.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until one of the five
settings appears on the display.
DRIVER SEAT: This setting adjusts the audio to
give the driver the best possible sound quality.
Sound quality for the front and rear seat
passenger(s) may be different when this setting
is used.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to select a DSP
setting.
4. Press the CLR button to exit the display. To
return to the original display, repeatedly press
the CLR button or wait for the display to
time out.
DSP NORMAL: This setting provides the best
overall audio performance for all passengers. DSP
NORMAL will not appear on the display when in
this mode.
268
MSG (Message): If the current RDS station has a
message, MSG will appear on the display. The
message may display the artist, song title, call in
phone numbers, etc. If the entire message
does not appear on the display, parts of the
message will appear every three seconds until the
message is completed. Once the completed
message has been displayed, MSG will disappear
from the display until another new message is
received.
RDS Messages
The RDS message feature is available only on
FM stations that broadcast RDS information. See
Radio Data System (RDS) for more information
earlier in this section.
ALERT: Alert warns of local and national
emergencies. When, an alert announcement
comes on the current radio station or a related
network station, ALERT will appear on the display.
You will hear the announcement, even if the
volume is low or a CD is playing. If a CD
is playing, play will stop during the announcement.
Alert announcements cannot be turned off. If
the radio tunes to a related network station for the
announcement, it will return to the original
station when the announcement is finished.
To display the last message, perform the
following steps:
1. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter the
main menu.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until CLOCK/INFO
DISP appears on the display.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob. The message will
appear on the display.
ALERT will not be affected by tests of the
emergency broadcast system. This feature is not
supported by all RDS stations.
Once the message has been displayed, MSG will
disappear from the display until another new
message is received.
269
TP (Traffic Program): TP will appear on the
display when the radio detects a signal from an
RDS station that has traffic announcement
broadcast capability.
To turn TA on or off, perform the following steps:
1. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter the
main menu.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until TRAFFIC
ANNOUNCE appears on the display.
TA (Traffic Announcement): If TA appears on
the display, the tuned radio station broadcasts
traffic announcements and when a traffic
announcement comes on the tuned station you
will hear it.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to select ON or
OFF. An X will appear in the box when TA is
selected on.
4. Press the CLR button to exit the display. To
return to the original display, repeatedly press
the CLR button or wait for the display to
time out.
If the station does not broadcast traffic
announcements, when TA is turned on it will seek
to a station that does. When a station that
broadcasts traffic announcements is found, the
radio will stop seeking and TA will appear on the
display. If no station is found that broadcasts
traffic announcements, No Traffic will appear on
the display.
Activating Category (CAT) Stations
(RDS and XM™)
CAT allows you to search for stations with specific
types of music. The selectable categories are
POP, EASY, TALK, CNTRY (Country), CLASS
(Classical), and JAZZ.
The radio will play traffic announcements if the
volume is low. The radio will interrupt the play of a
CD if the last tuned station broadcasts traffic
announcements.
270
To activate program types, perform the
following steps:
AF (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency
allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with
the same category.
1. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter the
main menu.
To turn AF on or off, perform the following steps:
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until CATEGORY
appears on the display.
1. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter the
main menu.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to select ON or
OFF. An X will appear in the box when CAT
is selected on.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until ALTERNATE
FREQ. appears on the display.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to select AF OFF,
AF ON, or AF REG. An X will appear in the
box when AF is selected on.
4. Press the CLR button to exit the display. To
return to the original display, repeatedly press
the CLR button or wait for the display to
time out.
4. Press the CLR button to exit the display. To
return to the original display, repeatedly press
the CLR button or wait for the display to
time out.
Once CAT is activated the categories will appear
on the display above the firm keys, in place of
the preset stations, if programmed. Press the firm
key for the category that you would like to
listen to. Not all stations support CAT. The radio
may not go to all of the stations with that
This function does not apply for XM™ Satellite
Radio Service.
music type when pressing the firm key.
271
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)
single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs
and the smaller CDs are loaded in the same
manner.
Radio Message
THEFTLOCK: This message is displayed when
the THEFTLOCK® system has been activated.
Take the vehicle to the dealer for service.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality may be
reduced due to CD-R quality, the method of
recording, the quality of the music that has been
recorded, and the way the CD-R has been
handled. There may be an increase in skipping,
difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loading
and ejecting. If these problems occur, check the
bottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD
is damaged, such as cracked, broken, or
Radio Messages for XM™ Only
section for further detail.
Using the Single CD Player
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.
The player will pull it in. If the ignition and the radio
are on the CD will begin playing. A CD may be
loaded with the radio off but it will not start playing
until the radio is on.
scratched, the CD will not play properly. If the
surface of the CD is soiled, see Care of Your CDs
on page 285 for more information.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in
the player, it will stay in the player. When the
ignition or radio is turned on, the CD will start to
play where it stopped, if it was the last selected
audio source.
If there is no apparent damage, try a known
good CD.
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught
in the CD player. If a CD is recorded on a
personal computer and a description label is
needed, try labeling the top of the recorded CD
with a marking pen instead.
When the CD is inserted, CD will appear on the
display. As each new track starts to play, the track
number will appear on the display.
272
Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insert
more than one CD into the slot at a time,
or attempt to play scratched or damaged CDs,
you could damage the CD player. When
using the CD player, use only CDs in good
condition without any label, load one CD at a
time, and keep the CD player and the loading
slot free of foreign materials, liquids, and
debris.
F3 RDM (Random): Press this firm key to listen
to the tracks in random, rather than sequential,
order. RANDOM will appear on the display. Press
RDM again to turn off random play. RANDOM
will disappear from the display.
F4 RPT (Repeat): Press this firm key to hear a
track over again. REPEAT will appear on the
display. Press RPT again to turn off repeat play.
REPEAT will disappear from the display.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD
Messages” later in this section.
F6 DISP (Display): Press this firm key to display
the time of the track. Press this firm key again
to remove the time of the track from the display.
When a CD is inserted the CD functions will
appear on the display above the firm keys, in place
of the preset stations (if programmed).
Q SEEK R: Press the up or the down arrow
to go to the next or to the previous track on
the CD.
F1 PREV (Previous): Press this firm key to go to
the previous track. Press and hold this firm key
to reverse quickly within a track. Release the firm
key to play the passage. The elapsed time of
the track will appear on the display.
Q SCAN R: Press this button to listen to each
track for 10 seconds. The CD will go to a track,
play for 10 seconds, then go on to the next track.
Press this button again to stop scanning.
F2 NEXT: Press this firm key to go to the next
track. Press and hold this firm key to advance
quickly within a track. Release the firm key to play
the passage. The elapsed time of the track will
appear on the display.
X (Eject): Press this button to stop a CD when
it is playing or to eject a CD when it is not
playing. Eject may be activated with the ignition
and the radio off.
273
Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insert
more than one CD into the slot at a time,
or attempt to play scratched or damaged CDs,
you could damage the CD player. When
using the CD player, use only CDs in good
condition without any label, load one CD at a
time, and keep the CD player and the loading
slot free of foreign materials, liquids, and
debris.
Using the Six-Disc CD Changer
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)
single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs
and the smaller CDs are loaded in the same
manner.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality may be
reduced due to CD-R quality, the method of
recording, the quality of the music that has been
recorded, and the way the CD-R has been
handled. There may be an increase in skipping,
difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loading
and ejecting. If these problems occur, check the
bottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD
is damaged, such as cracked, broken, or
If an error appears on the display, see “CD
Messages” later in this section.
When a CD is inserted the CD functions will
appear on the display above the firm keys, in place
of the preset stations, if programmed.
scratched, the CD will not play properly. If the
surface of the CD is soiled, see Care of Your CDs
on page 285 for more information.
LOAD: Press the LOAD button to load CDs into
the CD player. This CD player will hold up to
six CDs.
If there is no apparent damage, try a known
good CD.
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught
in the CD player. If a CD is recorded on a
personal computer and a description label is
needed, try labeling the top of the recorded CD
with a marking pen instead.
274
To insert one CD, do the following:
3. Load the CD, when INSERT appears on the
display, insert a CD partway into the slot,
label side up. The player will pull the CD in.
1. The ignition and the radio can be on or off.
2. Press and release the LOAD button. Please
Wait will appear on the display.
Do not try to load two CDs at one time
and wait to load a CD until INSERT appears
on the display for each disc inserted. The
CD player will take up to six CDs. Do not try
to load more than six. If you want to load
less than six CDs, load the desired amount.
The CD player will time out when it does
not receive any more CDs and the last CD
loaded will begin to play.
3. Load the CD, when INSERT appears on the
display, insert a CD partway into the slot,
label side up. The player will pull the CD in.
When a CD is inserted, CD will appear on the
display, the number of the CD and the track
number will appear on the display if the radio
is on.
If the radio is on, the last CD loaded will begin to
play automatically.
If the radio is on, the CD will begin to play
automatically.
To insert multiple CDs, do the following:
F1 CD n (Down): Press this firm key to go to
the previous CD.
1. The ignition and the radio can be on or off.
2. Press and hold the LOAD button for
two seconds. Please Wait will appear on the
display and you will hear a beep.
F2 CD m (Up): Press this firm key to go to the
next CD.
CD REV { (Reverse): Press this firm key to go
to the previous track. Press and hold this firm
key to reverse quickly within the track. Release the
firm key to play the passage. The elapsed time
of the track will appear on the display.
275
• RDM TRK (Random Track): Plays the tracks
on the current CD in random, rather than
sequential, order. RDM TRK will appear on the
display. Press the MODE firm key again to
turn off random play. RDM TRK will disappear
from the display.
CD FWD | (Forward): Press this firm key to go
to the next track. Press and hold this firm key
to advance quickly within the track. Release the
firm key to play the passage. The elapsed time of
the track will appear on the display.
F5 MODE: Press this firm key to select from
NORMAL, RPT TRCK (Repeat Track), RPT CD
(Repeat CD), RDM TRK (Random Track),
and RDM ALL (Random All CDs).
• RDM ALL (Random All CDs): Plays all of the
CDs loaded in random, rather than sequential,
order. RDM ALL will appear on the display.
Press the MODE firm key again to turn
off random play. RDM ALL will disappear from
the display.
• NORMAL: Sets the system for normal play of
the CD(s). NORMAL will not appear on the
display when in this mode.
F6 DISP (Display): Press this firm key to display
the time of the track. Press this firm key again
to display CD PLAY and press this firm key once
more to clear the display.
• RPT TRCK (Repeat Track): Repeats the
track over again. RPT TRCK will appear on the
display. Press the MODE firm key again to
turn off repeat play. RPT TRCK will disappear
from the display.
Q SEEK R: Press the up or the down arrow to go
• RPT CD (Repeat CD): Repeats the CD over
again. RPT DISC will appear on the display.
Press the MODE firm key again to turn
off repeat play. RPT DISC will disappear from
the display.
to the next or to the previous track on the CD.
Q SCAN R: Press this button to listen to each
track for 10 seconds. The CD will go to a track,
play for 10 seconds, then go on to the next track.
Press this button again to stop scanning.
276
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or
upside down.
X (Eject): Press this button to eject the CD that
is currently playing, or press and hold this
button to eject all of the CDs loaded. You will hear
a beep. Eject may be activated with the ignition
or radio off.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an
hour and try again.
• There may have been a problem while
burning the CD.
CD Messages
• The label may be caught in the CD player.
If the CD comes out, it could be for one of the
following reasons:
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other
reason, try a known good CD.
• If it is very hot. When the temperature returns
to normal, the CD should play.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot
be corrected, contact your GM dealer. If the
radio displays an error message, write it down and
provide it to your GM dealer when reporting the
problem.
• If you are driving on a very rough road.
When the road becomes smoother, the
CD should play.
277
6. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob to select which of
the four configurable keys you would like to
change. The currently assigned feature will be
shown.
Configurable Radio Display Keys
This feature allows you to customize the four keys
that are located on each side of the radio
display to make it easier to adjust the radio
features. Other non-radio related features are also
available for customization.
7. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to select the
configurable key to change.
8. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob to find the feature
that you would like to store to the key.
To program the configurable radio display keys,
perform the following steps:
9. Press the TUNE/SEL knob when you have
found the feature to be stored. The display
will update, by showing the symbol of
the feature that you selected next to the
configurable key.
1. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter the
main menu.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until SETUP
appears on the display.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter into
SETUP.
10. Repeat the previous steps for each
configurable key.
4. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until CONFIGURE
DISPLAY KEYS appears on the display.
Once a feature is programmed to a key, the
feature will not appear on the display when
programming the remaining configurable keys.
The configurable keys can be changed at any time.
5. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter into
CONFIGURE DISPLAY KEYS.
278
XM Radio Messages
Radio Display Message
Condition
Action Required
XL (Explicit Language
Channels)
XL on the radio display,
after the channel name,
indicates content with
explicit language.
These channels, or any others, can be blocked at a
customer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
Updating
No Signl
Loading
Updating encryption code The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, and
no action is required. This process should take no longer
than 30 seconds.
Loss of signal
The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in a
location that is blocking the XM™ signal. When the vehicle
is moved into an open area, the signal should return.
Acquiring channel audio
(after 4 second delay)
The audio system is acquiring and processing audio and
text data. No action is needed. This message should
disappear shortly.
Off Air
Channel not in service
This channel is not currently in service. Tune in to another
channel.
CH Unavl
Channel no longer
available
This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.
Tune to another station. If this station was one of the
presets, choose another station for that preset button.
No Info
No Info
Artist Name/Feature not
available
No artist information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
Song/Program Title not
available
No song title information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
279
Radio Display Message
Condition
Action Required
No Info
Category Name not
available
No category information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
NotFound
No Info
No channel available for
the chosen category
There are no channels available for the selected category.
The system is working properly.
No Text/Informational
message available
No text or informational messages are available at this time
on this channel. The system is working properly.
XM Lock
Theft lock active
The XM™ receiver in your vehicle may have previously
been in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM™
receivers cannot be swapped between vehicles. If this
message is received after having your vehicle serviced,
check with your GM dealer.
Radio ID
Unknown
Check XM
Radio ID label (channel 0) If tuned to channel 0, this message will alternate with the
XM Radio 8 digit radio ID label. This label is needed to
activate the service.
Radio ID not known
(should only be if
hardware failure)
If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, there
may be a receiver fault. Consult with your GM dealer.
Hardware failure
If this message does not clear within a short period of time,
the receiver may have a fault. Consult with your GM dealer.
280
Navigation/Radio System
Audio Steering Wheel
Controls (CTS)
Your vehicle may have a navigation radio system.
The navigation system has built-in features
intended to minimize driver distraction. Technology
alone, no matter how advanced, can never
replace your own judgment. See the Navigation
System manual for some tips to help you
reduce distractions while driving.
Some audio functions
can be adjusted at the
steering wheel. They
include the following:
Theft-Deterrent Feature
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of
your vehicle’s radio. The feature works
automatically by learning a portion of the Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN). If the radio is
moved to a different vehicle, it will not operate.
If the radio is removed from your vehicle, the
original VIN in the radio can be used to trace the
radio back to your vehicle.
With THEFTLOCK® activated, the radio will not
operate if stolen.
Volume: Turn this knob to increase or to
decrease the volume.
e(Band/Source): Press this button to switch
between FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1 or XM2
(if equipped), radio, or CD.
For vehicles with the six-disc CD changer radio: If
none of the audio sources are loaded, and this
button is pressed, NO SOURCE LOADED
will appear on the display.
281
g(Mute/Voice Recognition): Press this button to
silence the system. Press this button again or turn
the VOL (volume) knob to turn the sound on.
Audio Steering Wheel
Controls (CTS-V)
If your vehicle has the navigation system, press this
button to initiate voice recognition. See “Voice
Recognition” in the Navigation System manual for
more information.
See Reconfigurable
(SWC) (CTS) on
page 161 for more
information on
this feature.
Depending on your vehicle, the audio steering
wheel controls may be different.
For the CTS-V, some audio controls can be
adjusted at the steering wheel. They include the
following:
0 (Mute): Press this button to silence the system.
Press this button again, or any other radio
button, to turn the sound on.
282
SRCE (Source): Press this button to switch
between FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1 or XM2
(if equipped), radio, or CD.
+ u — (Volume): Press this button to increase
or to decrease the volume.
+ t u — (Seek): Press either arrow to go to
the next or the previous radio station and stay
there. The radio will only seek stations with
a strong signal that are in the selected band.
g(OnStar®/Voice Recognition): If your vehicle
has the Radio with CD or Radio with Six-Disc
CD audio system, press this button to interact with
the OnStar system.
When a CD is playing, press the minus sign to go
to the start of the current track, if more than
10 seconds have played. Press the plus sign to go
to the next track. If either the minus or the plus
button are pressed more than once, the player will
continue moving backward or forward through
the CD.
If your vehicle has the navigation system, press
this button to initiate voice recognition. See “Voice
Recognition” in the Navigation System manual
for more information. While in Voice Recognition,
say “OnStar” to interact with the OnStar®
this manual for more information.
Press and hold the SEEK plus or minus button,
until you hear a beep. The CD will fast forward or
fast reverse through the CD. Press either button
again to play the passage.
1-6 (Preset Stations): Press this button to play
stations that are programmed on the radio
preset pushbuttons. The radio will only seek preset
stations with a strong signal that are in the
selected band.
If you have the navigation system, some of the
audio steering wheel controls work when a DVD is
playing in the navigation radio. See the Navigation
System manual for more information.
When a CD is playing, press this button to go to
the next track.
When a CD is playing in the six-disc CD changer,
press this button to go to the next available
CD, if multiple CDs are loaded.
283
FM Stereo
Radio Reception
FM stereo will give the best sound, but FM signals
will reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).
Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM
You may experience frequency interference and
static during normal radio reception if items
such as cellphone chargers, vehicle convenience
accessories, and external electronic devices
are plugged into the accessory power outlet. If
there is interference or static, unplug the item from
the accessory power outlet.
signals, causing the sound to fade in and out.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio
reception from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous
United States, and in Canada. Just as with FM,
tall buildings or hills can interfere with satellite
radio signals, causing the sound to fade in and out.
In addition, traveling or standing under heavy
foliage, bridges, garages, or tunnels may cause
loss of XM signal for a period of time. The
AM
The range for most AM stations is greater than for
FM, especially at night. The longer range can
cause station frequencies to interfere with each
other. For better radio reception, most AM
radio stations will boost the power levels during
the day, and then reduce these levels during
the night. Static can also occur when things like
storms and power lines interfere with radio
reception. When this happens, try reducing the
treble on your radio.
radio may display No Signl to indicate interference.
284
Cellular Phone Usage
Care of Your CDs
Cellular phone usage may cause interference with
your vehicle’s radio. This interference may
occur when making or receiving phone calls,
charging the phone’s battery, or simply having the
phone on. This interference causes an increased
level of static while listening to the radio. If static is
received while listening to the radio, unplug the
cellular phone and turn it off.
Handle CDs carefully. Store them in their original
cases or other protective cases and away from
direct sunlight and dust. The CD player scans the
bottom surface of the disc. If the surface of a
CD is damaged, such as cracked, broken,
or scratched, the CD will not play properly or not
at all. If the surface of a CD is soiled, take a
soft, lint free cloth or dampen a clean, soft cloth in
a mild, neutral detergent solution mixed with
water, and clean it. Make sure the wiping process
starts from the center to the edge.
Do not touch the bottom side of a CD while
handling it; this could damage the surface. Pick up
CDs by grasping the outer edges or the edge of
the hole and the outer edge.
Care of the CD Player
The use of CD lens cleaners for CD players is not
advised, due to the risk of contaminating the
internal lens of the CD optics with lubricants.
285
If adding an aftermarket cellular telephone to your
vehicle, and the antenna needs to be attached
to the glass, make sure that the grid lines for the
AM-FM antennas are not damaged. Make sure
the cellular telephone antenna does not touch a
grid line.
Diversity Antenna System
The AM-FM antenna is integrated with the rear
window defogger, located in the rear window.
Make sure that the inside surface of the rear
window is not scratched and that the grid lines on
the glass are not damaged. If the inside surface
is damaged, it could interfere with radio reception.
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
System
Notice: Do not apply aftermarket glass
tinting with metallic film. The metallic film in
some tinting materials will interfere with
or distort the incoming radio reception. Any
damage caused to your antenna due to metallic
tinting materials will not be covered by your
warranty.
The XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is located on
the roof of your vehicle. Keep this antenna clear of
snow and ice build up for clear radio reception.
If your vehicle has a sunroof, the performance of
the XM™ system may be affected if the sunroof
is open.
Notice: Do not try to clear frost or other
warranty.
Loading items onto the roof of your vehicle can
interfere with the performance of the XM™ system.
Make sure the XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is
not obstructed.
If static is heard on the radio, when the rear
window defogger is turned on, it could mean that
a defogger grid line has been damaged. If this
is true, the grid line must be repaired.
286
Your Driving, the Road, and
Your Vehicle
{CAUTION:
Defensive driving really means “Be ready
for anything.” On city streets, rural roads,
or expressways, it means “Always expect
the unexpected.” Assume that pedestrians
or other drivers are going to be careless
and make mistakes. Anticipate what they
might do and be ready. Rear-end collisions
are about the most preventable of
Defensive Driving
The best advice anyone can give about driving is:
Drive defensively.
Please start with a very important safety device in
your vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: They
accidents. Yet they are common. Allow
enough following distance. Defensive
driving requires that a driver concentrate
on the driving task. Anything that distracts
from the driving task makes proper
defensive driving more difficult and can
even cause a collision, with resulting
injury. Ask a passenger to help do these
things, or pull off the road in a safe place to
do them. These simple defensive driving
techniques could save your life.
288
Many adults — by some estimates, nearly half
the adult population — choose never to drink
alcohol, so they never drive after drinking.
For persons under 21, it is against the law in
every U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are good
medical, psychological, and developmental
reasons for these laws.
Drunken Driving
Death and injury associated with drinking and
driving is a national tragedy. It is the number
one contributor to the highway death toll,
claiming thousands of victims every year.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to
drive a vehicle:
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink
alcohol and then drive. But what if people do?
How much is “too much” if someone plans
to drive? It is a lot less than many might think.
Although it depends on each person and situation,
here is some general information on the problem.
• Judgment
• Muscular Coordination
• Vision
• Attentiveness
Police records show that almost half of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most
cases, these deaths are the result of someone who
was drinking and driving. In recent years, more
than 16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths
have been associated with the use of alcohol, with
more than 300,000 people injured.
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of
someone who is drinking depends upon
four things:
• The amount of alcohol consumed
• The drinker’s body weight
• The amount of food that is consumed before
and during drinking
• The length of time it has taken the drinker to
consume the alcohol
289
According to the American Medical Association, a
180 lb (82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce
(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up with
a BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person would
reach the same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce
(120 ml) glasses of wine or three mixed drinks if
each had 1-1/2 ounces (45 ml) of liquors like
whiskey, gin, or vodka.
It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For
example, if the same person drank three double
martinis (3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each)
within an hour, the person’s BAC would be close
to 0.12 percent. A person who consumes food
just before or during drinking will have a somewhat
lower BAC level.
There is a gender difference, too. Women
generally have a lower relative percentage of
body water than men. Since alcohol is carried in
body water, this means that a woman generally will
reach a higher BAC level than a man of her
same body weight will when each has the same
number of drinks.
The law in most U.S. states, and throughout
Canada, sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent. In
some other countries, the limit is even lower. For
example, it is 0.05 percent in both France and
Germany. The BAC limit for all commercial drivers
in the United States is 0.04 percent.
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to
six drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we have
seen, it depends on how much alcohol is in the
drinks, and how quickly the person drinks them.
290
But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC
of 0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving
skills of many people are impaired at a BAC
There is something else about drinking and driving
that many people do not know. Medical research
shows that alcohol in a person’s system can make
crash injuries worse, especially injuries to the
brain, spinal cord, or heart. This means that when
anyone who has been drinking — driver or
passenger — is in a crash, that person’s chance
of being killed or permanently disabled is
higher than if the person had not been drinking.
approaching 0.05 percent, and that the effects are
worse at night. All drivers are impaired at BAC
levels above 0.05 percent. Statistics show that the
chance of being in a collision increases sharply for
drivers who have a BAC of 0.05 percent or above.
A driver with a BAC level of 0.06 percent has
doubled his or her chance of having a collision. At a
BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance of this driver
having a collision is 12 times greater; at a level of
0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!
{CAUTION:
Drinking and then driving is very
dangerous. Your reflexes, perceptions,
attentiveness, and judgment can be
affected by even a small amount of
alcohol. You can have a serious — or
even fatal — collision if you drive after
drinking. Please do not drink and drive
or ride with a driver who has been
drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if you
are with a group, designate a driver
who will not drink.
The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the
alcohol in one drink. No amount of coffee or
number of cold showers will speed that up.
“I will be careful” is not the right answer. What if
there is an emergency, a need to take sudden
action, as when a child darts into the street?
A person with even a moderate BAC might not
be able to react quickly enough to avoid the
collision.
291
Control of a Vehicle
Braking
You have three systems that make your vehicle
go where you want it to go. They are the brakes,
the steering, and the accelerator. All three
systems have to do their work at the places where
the tires meet the road.
Braking action involves perception time and
reaction time.
First, you have to decide to push on the brake
pedal. That is perception time. Then you have to
bring up your foot and do it. That is reaction time.
Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow or
ice, it is easy to ask more of those control systems
than the tires and road can provide. That means
you can lose control of your vehicle. See Traction
page 297.
Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a
second. But that is only an average. It might
be less with one driver and as long as two or
three seconds or more with another. Age, physical
condition, alertness, coordination, and eyesight
all play a part. So do alcohol, drugs, and
frustration. But even in three-fourths of a second,
a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels
66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an
emergency, so keeping enough space between
your vehicle and others is important.
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your
vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary
greatly with the surface of the road, whether it is
pavement or gravel; the condition of the road,
whether it is wet, dry, or icy; tire tread; the
condition of the brakes; the weight of the vehicle;
and the amount of brake force applied.
292
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive
in spurts — heavy acceleration followed by
heavy braking — rather than keeping pace with
traffic. This is a mistake. The brakes may
not have time to cool between hard stops. The
brakes will wear out much faster if you do a lot of
heavy braking. If you keep pace with the traffic
and allow realistic following distances, you
will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking. That
means better braking and longer brake life.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
Your vehicle has the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS), an advanced electronic braking system
that will help prevent a braking skid.
When you start your engine and begin to drive
away, ABS will check itself. You may hear a
momentary motor or clicking noise while this test
is going on, and you may even notice that
your brake pedal moves a little. This is normal.
If your vehicle’s engine ever stops while you are
driving, brake normally but do not pump the
brakes. If you do, the pedal may get harder to
push down. If the engine stops, you will still have
some power brake assist. But you will use it
when you brake. Once the power assist is used
up, it may take longer to stop and the brake pedal
will be harder to push.
If there is a problem
with ABS, this warning
light will stay on.
See Anti-Lock Brake
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your
vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
293
ABS can change the brake pressure faster than
any driver could. The computer is programmed
to make the most of available tire and road
conditions. This can help you steer around the
obstacle while braking hard.
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving
safely. Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of
you. You slam on the brakes and continue braking.
Here is what happens with ABS:
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down.
If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the
computer will separately work the brakes at each
wheel.
As you brake, your computer keeps receiving
updates on wheel speed and controls braking
pressure accordingly.
294
Remember: ABS does not change the time you
need to get your foot up to the brake pedal
or always decrease stopping distance. If you get
too close to the vehicle in front of you, you will not
have time to apply your brakes if that vehicle
suddenly slows or stops. Always leave enough
room up ahead to stop, even though you
have ABS.
Traction Control
System (TCS) (CTS)
Your vehicle has a traction control system that
limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in
slippery road conditions. The system operates only
if it senses that one or both of the rear wheels
are spinning or beginning to lose traction. When
this happens, the system brakes the spinning
wheel(s) and/or reduces engine power to
limit wheel spin.
Using ABS
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal
down firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may
hear the anti-lock pump or motor operate, and feel
the brake pedal pulsate, but this is normal.
You may feel or hear the system working, but this
is normal.
This warning light will
come on to let you
know if there is
a problem with your
traction control system.
Braking in Emergencies
With ABS, you can steer and brake at the same
time. In many emergencies, steering can help you
more than even the very best braking.
on page 199. When this warning light is on, the
system will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving
accordingly.
295
The traction control system automatically comes
on whenever you start your vehicle. To limit wheel
spin, especially in slippery road conditions, you
should always leave the system on. But you
can turn the traction control system off if you ever
need to. You should turn the system off if your
vehicle ever gets stuck in sand, mud or snow and
rocking the vehicle is required. Additionally,
turning the traction control system off on some
surfaces, such as deep snow and loose gravel, will
assist vehicle motion at lower speeds. See
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out on page 321
for more information. See also Winter Driving
on page 316 for information on using TCS when
driving in snowy or icy conditions.
TC button again to turn the system back on.
If you press and hold the TC button for
five seconds, the StabiliTrak® system will
turn off. Press the TC button again to turn
StabiliTrak® back on. For more information,
You can program your steering wheel controls
and/or the buttons on the Base audio system to
turn the TCS on or off. See Reconfigurable
page 161 and/or “Configurable Radio Display
programming instructions.
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your
vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
You can turn the system
off by pressing the TC
(traction control)
button located in the
glove box.
If you press the TC button once, the traction
control system will turn off and the traction control
system warning light will come on. Press the
296
The traction control system automatically comes
on whenever you start your vehicle. To limit wheel
spin, especially in slippery road conditions, you
should always leave the system on. But you
can turn the traction control system off if you ever
need to. You should turn the system off if your
vehicle ever gets stuck in sand, mud or snow and
rocking the vehicle is required. Additionally,
turning the traction control system off on some
surfaces, such as deep snow and loose gravel, will
assist vehicle motion at lower speeds. See
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out on page 321
using TCS when driving in snowy or icy
Traction Control
System (TCS) (CTS-V)
Your vehicle has a Traction Control System (TCS)
that limits wheel spin. This is especially useful
in slippery road conditions. The system operates
only if it senses that one or both of the rear wheels
are spinning or beginning to lose traction. When
this happens, the system brakes the spinning
wheel(s) and/or reduces engine power to
limit wheel spin.
You may feel or hear the system working, but this
is normal.
This warning light will
come on to let you
know if there’s a
conditions.
problem with your
traction control system.
You can turn the system
off by pressing the TC
(traction control)
button located on the
steering wheel.
on page 199. When this warning light is on, the
system will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving
accordingly.
297
If you press the TC button once, the traction
control system will turn off and the TCS warning
light will come on. If you press the TC button again
within five seconds, the traction control system
will remain off, the warning light will stay on, and
the stability system will enter Competitive
Driving Mode. Competitive Driving will be displayed
on the Driver Information Center (DIC). See
Competitive Driving Mode (CTS-V) on page 298
and “Driver Information Center (DIC)” in the
Navigation Supplement for more information.
Press the TC button again to turn the system
back on. If you press and hold the TC button for
five seconds, the StabiliTrak® and Traction Control
systems will turn off. Press the TC button again
to turn StabiliTrak® and Traction Control back on.
on page 299.
Competitive Driving Mode (CTS-V)
The driver can select this optional handling
mode by pressing the Traction Control (TC) button
on the steering wheel twice within five seconds.
COMPETITIVE DRIVING will be displayed in
the DIC. Competitive driving mode allows
the driver to have control of the power applied to
the rear wheels, while the StabiliTrak® system
helps steer the vehicle by selective brake
application. In competitive mode, the levels at
which StabiliTrak® is engaged have been modified
to better suit a performance driving environment.
When the traction control warning light is on,
the Traction Control System will not be operating.
Adjust your driving accordingly.
When you press the TC button again, or turn the
ignition to ACCESSORY, the TCS will be on.
The traction engaged symbol will be displayed
temporarily in the DIC and a chime will be heard.
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your
vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
298
When the system activates, a Stability System
Engaged message will be displayed on the Driver
Information Center. See DIC Warnings and
noise or feel vibration in the brake pedal. This is
normal. Continue to steer the vehicle in the
direction you want it to go.
If there is a problem detected with StabiliTrak®, a
Service Stability System message will be
displayed on the Driver Information Center. See
this message is displayed, the system is not
operational. Driving should be adjusted
accordingly.
StabiliTrak® comes on automatically whenever you
start your vehicle. To help assist you with
directional control of the vehicle, you should
always leave the system on. You can turn
StabiliTrak® off if you ever need to through the TC
(traction control) on/off button. See Traction
page 297.
Limited-Slip Rear Axle
If your vehicle has this feature, your limited-slip
rear axle can give you additional traction on snow,
mud, ice, sand or gravel. It works like a standard
axle most of the time, but when one of the
rear wheels has no traction and the other does,
this feature will allow the wheel with traction
to move the vehicle.
StabiliTrak® System
Your vehicle may have an electronic stability
control system called StabiliTrak®. It is an
advanced computer controlled system that assists
you with directional control of the vehicle in
difficult driving conditions.
StabiliTrak® activates when the computer senses
a discrepancy between your intended path
and the direction the vehicle is actually traveling.
StabiliTrak® selectively applies braking pressure
at any one of the vehicle’s brakes to help steer the
vehicle in the direction which you are steering.
299
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the
StabiliTrak® activates, the cruise control will
automatically disengage. When road conditions
allow you to safely use it again, you may reengage
page 168 for more information.
Steering
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because the
engine stops or the system is not functioning,
you can steer but it will take much more effort.
Panic Brake Assist
Speed Variable Assist Steering
If your vehicle has this system, it varies the
amount of effort required to steer the vehicle in
relation to the speed of the vehicle.
Your vehicle has a panic brake assist system that
monitors the intention of the driver while braking.
If the system senses that the driver has applied
hard/fast pressure to the brake pedal, the system
will generate additional pressure, making it
easier for the driver to maintain brake application.
When this happens the brake pedal will feel
easier to push. Just hold the brake pedal down
firmly and let the system work for you. You
may feel the brakes vibrate, or you may notice
some noise but this is normal. The brakes
will return to normal operation after the brake
pedal has been released.
The amount of steering effort required is less at
slower speeds to make the vehicle more
maneuverable and easier to park. At faster
speeds, the steering effort increases to provide a
sport-like feel to the steering. This provides
maximum control and stability.
If your vehicle seems harder to steer than normal
when parking or driving slowly, there may be a
problem with the system. You will still have power
steering, but steering will be stiffer than normal
at slow speeds. See your dealer for service.
300
Steering Tips
It is important to take curves at a reasonable
speed.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up
on the accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the
way you want it to go, and slow down.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents
mentioned on the news happen on curves.
Here is why:
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you
should adjust your speed. Of course, the posted
speeds are based on good weather and road
conditions. Under less favorable conditions you will
want to go slower.
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is
subject to the same laws of physics when driving on
curves. The traction of the tires against the road
surface makes it possible for the vehicle to change
its path when you turn the front wheels. If there is
no traction, inertia will keep the vehicle going in the
same direction. If you have ever tried to steer a
vehicle on wet ice, you will understand this.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach
a curve, do it before you enter the curve, while
your front wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive”
through the curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady
speed. Wait to accelerate until you are out of
the curve, and then accelerate gently into
the straightaway.
The traction you can get in a curve depends on
the condition of your tires and the road surface, the
angle at which the curve is banked, and your
speed. While you are in a curve, speed is the one
factor you can control.
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your
vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.
Then you suddenly accelerate. Both control
systems — steering and acceleration — have to
do their work where the tires meet the road.
Adding the sudden acceleration can demand too
much of those places. You can lose control.
301
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more
effective than braking. For example, you come
over a hill and find a truck stopped in your lane,
or a car suddenly pulls out from nowhere, or
a child darts out from between parked cars and
stops right in front of you. You can avoid
these problems by braking — if you can stop in
time. But sometimes you cannot; there is not room.
That is the time for evasive action — steering
around the problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies
like these. First apply your brakes.
An emergency like this requires close attention
and a quick decision. If you are holding the
steering wheel at the recommended 9 and
3 o’clock positions, you can turn it a full
180 degrees very quickly without removing either
hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly,
and just as quickly straighten the wheel once you
have avoided the object.
much speed as you can from a possible collision.
Then steer around the problem, to the left or
right depending on the space available.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive
driving at all times and wear safety belts properly.
302
straddles the edge of the pavement. You can turn
the steering wheel up to one-quarter turn until
the right front tire contacts the pavement edge.
Then turn your steering wheel to go straight down
the roadway.
Off-Road Recovery
You may find that your right wheels have dropped
off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while
you are driving.
Passing
The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a
two-lane highway waits for just the right moment,
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then
goes back into the right lane again. A simple
maneuver?
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a
two-lane highway is a potentially dangerous move,
since the passing vehicle occupies the same lane
as oncoming traffic for several seconds. A
miscalculation, an error in judgment, or a brief
surrender to frustration or anger can suddenly put
the passing driver face to face with the worst of all
traffic accidents — the head-on collision.
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below
the pavement, recovery should be fairly easy.
Ease off the accelerator and then, if there
is nothing in the way, steer so that your vehicle
303
So here are some tips for passing:
Time your move so you will be increasing
speed as the time comes to move into
the other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you
will have a running start that more than
makes up for the distance you would lose by
dropping back. And if something happens
to cause you to cancel your pass, you need
only slow down and drop back again and wait
for another opportunity.
• Drive ahead. Look down the road, to the
sides, and to crossroads for situations
that might affect your passing patterns. If you
have any doubt whatsoever about making
a successful pass, wait for a better time.
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings,
and lines. If you can see a sign up ahead
that might indicate a turn or an intersection,
delay your pass. A broken center line
usually indicates it is all right to pass, providing
the road ahead is clear. Never cross a solid
line on your side of the lane or a double solid
line, even if the road seems empty of
approaching traffic.
• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slow
vehicle, wait your turn. But take care that
someone is not trying to pass you as you
pull out to pass the slow vehicle. Remember
to glance over your shoulder and check
the blind spot.
• Check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance over
your shoulder, and start your left lane
• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want
to pass while you are awaiting an opportunity.
For one thing, following too closely reduces
your area of vision, especially if you are
following a larger vehicle. Also, you will not
have adequate space if the vehicle ahead
suddenly slows or stops. Keep back a
reasonable distance.
change signal before moving out of the right
lane to pass. When you are far enough ahead
of the passed vehicle to see its front in your
vehicle’s inside mirror, activate the right
lane change signal and move back into the
right lane. Remember that your vehicle’s
passenger side outside mirror is convex. The
vehicle you just passed may seem to be
farther away from you than it really is.
• When it looks like a chance to pass is
coming up, start to accelerate but stay in
the right lane and do not get too close.
304
• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a
time on two-lane roads. Reconsider before
passing the next vehicle.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking
reasonable care suited to existing conditions, and
by not overdriving those conditions. But skids
are always possible.
• Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle too
rapidly. Even though the brake lamps are
not flashing, it may be slowing down or starting
to turn.
The three types of skids correspond to your
vehicle’s three control systems. In the braking skid,
your wheels are not rolling. In the steering or
cornering skid, too much speed or steering in a
curve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force.
And in the acceleration skid, too much throttle
causes the driving wheels to spin.
• If you are being passed, make it easy for the
following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps
you can ease a little to the right.
Loss of Control
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not have enough
friction where the tires meet the road to do what the
driver has asked.
A cornering skid is best handled by easing your
foot off the accelerator pedal.
Remember: Any traction control system helps
avoid only the acceleration skid. If your traction
control system is off, then an acceleration
skid is also best handled by easing your foot off
the accelerator pedal.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to
steer and constantly seek an escape route or
area of less danger.
305
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off
the accelerator pedal and quickly steer the
way you want the vehicle to go. If you start
steering quickly enough, your vehicle may
straighten out. Always be ready for a second skid
if it occurs.
Competitive Driving
See your warranty book before using your vehicle
for competitive driving.
Notice: If you use your vehicle for competitive
driving, the engine may use more oil than it
would with normal use. Low oil levels can
damage the engine. Be sure to check the oil
level often during competitive driving and keep
the level at or near the upper mark that
shows the proper operating range on the
engine oil dipstick. For information on how to
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow,
ice, gravel, or other material is on the road.
For safety, you will want to slow down and adjust
your driving to these conditions. It is important
to slow down on slippery surfaces because
stopping distance will be longer and vehicle control
more limited.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try
your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration, or
braking, including reducing vehicle speed by
shifting to a lower gear. Any sudden changes could
cause the tires to slide. You may not realize the
surface is slippery until your vehicle is skidding.
Learn to recognize warning clues — such as
enough water, ice, or packed snow on the road to
make a mirrored surface — and slow down when
you have any doubt.
Driving at Night
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving.
One reason is that some drivers are likely to
be impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with night
vision problems, or by fatigue.
Here are some tips on night driving.
• Drive defensively.
• Do not drink and drive.
• Adjust the inside rearview mirror to reduce the
glare from headlamps behind you.
Remember: Any Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
helps avoid only the braking skid.
306
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching
headlamps. It can take a second or two, or
even several seconds, for your eyes to re-adjust
to the dark. When you are faced with severe glare,
as from a driver who does not lower the high
beams, or a vehicle with misaimed headlamps,
slow down a little. Avoid staring directly into
the approaching headlamps.
• Since you cannot see as well, you may need
to slow down and keep more space between
you and other vehicles.
• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads.
Your vehicle’s headlamps can light up only so
much road ahead.
• In remote areas, watch for animals.
• If you are tired, pull off the road in a safe
place and rest.
Keep the windshield and all the glass on your
vehicle clean — inside and out. Glare at night is
made much worse by dirt on the glass. Even
the inside of the glass can build up a film caused
by dust. Dirty glass makes lights dazzle and
flash more than clean glass would, making the
pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.
But as we get older these differences increase.
A 50-year-old driver may require at least twice as
much light to see the same thing at night as a
20-year-old.
Remember that the headlamps light up far less of a
roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep your
eyes moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimly
lighted objects. Just as the headlamps should be
checked regularly for proper aim, so should your
eyes be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer
from night blindness — the inability to see in dim
light — and are not even aware of it.
What you do in the daytime can also affect your
night vision. For example, if you spend the
day in bright sunshine you are wise to wear
sunglasses. Your eyes will have less trouble
adjusting to night. But if you are driving, do not
wear sunglasses at night. They may cut down on
glare from headlamps, but they also make a
lot of things invisible.
307
The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see.
Even if your windshield wiper blades are in good
shape, a heavy rain can make it harder to see
road signs and traffic signals, pavement markings,
the edge of the road, and even people walking.
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
It is wise to keep your windshield wiping equipment
in good shape and keep your windshield washer
fluid reservoir filled with washer fluid. Replace your
windshield wiper inserts when they show signs
of streaking or missing areas on the windshield, or
when strips of rubber start to separate from the
inserts.
{CAUTION:
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They
may not work as well in a quick stop and
may cause pulling to one side. You could
lose control of the vehicle.
Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble.
On a wet road, you cannot stop, accelerate, or turn
as well because your tire-to-road traction is not
as good as on dry roads. And, if your tires do not
have much tread left, you will get even less
traction. It is always wise to go slower and be
cautious if rain starts to fall while you are driving.
The surface may get wet suddenly when your
reflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement.
After driving through a large puddle of
water or a car wash, apply your brake pedal
lightly until your brakes work normally.
308
Driving too fast through large water puddles or
even going through some car washes can cause
problems, too. The water may affect your brakes.
Try to avoid puddles. But if you cannot, try to slow
down before you hit them.
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds.
There just is not a hard and fast rule about
hydroplaning. The best advice is to slow down
when it is raining.
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
Hydroplaning
Notice: If you drive too quickly through
deep puddles or standing water, water can
come in through your engine’s air intake and
badly damage your engine. Never drive through
water that is slightly lower than the underbody
of your vehicle. If you cannot avoid deep
puddles or standing water, drive through them
very slowly.
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can
build up under your tires that they can actually ride
on the water. This can happen if the road is wet
enough and you are going fast enough. When your
vehicle is hydroplaning, it has little or no contact
with the road.
Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it can if
your tires do not have much tread or if the
pressure in one or more is low. It can happen if a
lot of water is standing on the road. If you can
see reflections from trees, telephone poles,
or other vehicles, and raindrops dimple the water’s
surface, there could be hydroplaning.
309
Driving Through Flowing Water
City Driving
{CAUTION:
Flowing or rushing water creates strong
forces. If you try to drive through flowing
water, as you might at a low water
crossing, your vehicle can be carried away.
As little as six inches of flowing water can
carry away a smaller vehicle. If this
happens, you and other vehicle occupants
could drown. Do not ignore police warning
signs, and otherwise be very cautious
about trying to drive through flowing water.
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
One of the biggest problems with city streets is
the amount of traffic on them. You will want
to watch out for what the other drivers are doing
and pay attention to traffic signals.
• Besides slowing down, allow some extra
following distance. And be especially careful
when you pass another vehicle. Allow yourself
more clear room ahead, and be prepared to
have your view restricted by road spray.
• Have good tires with proper tread depth. See
310
Here are ways to increase your safety in city
driving:
Freeway Driving
• Know the best way to get to where you are
going. Get a city map and plan your trip
into an unknown part of the city just as you
would for a cross-country trip.
• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross
most large cities. You will save time and
• Treat a green light as a warning signal. A
traffic light is there because the corner is
busy enough to need it. When a light turns
green, and just before you start to move,
check both ways for vehicles that have not
cleared the intersection or may be running the
red light.
Mile for mile, freeways — also called thruways,
parkways, expressways, turnpikes, or
superhighways — are the safest of all roads. But
they have their own special rules.
311
The most important advice on freeway driving is:
Keep up with traffic and keep to the right.
Drive at the same speed most of the other drivers
are driving. Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks
a smooth traffic flow. Treat the left lane on
a freeway as a passing lane.
Once you are moving on the freeway, make
certain you allow a reasonable following distance.
Expect to move slightly slower at night.
When you want to leave the freeway, move to the
proper lane well in advance. If you miss your
exit, do not, under any circumstances, stop and
back up. Drive on to the next exit.
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads
to the freeway. If you have a clear view of the
freeway as you drive along the entrance ramp, you
should begin to check traffic. Try to determine
where you expect to blend with the flow. Try to
merge into the gap at close to the prevailing speed.
Switch on your turn signal, check your mirrors, and
glance over your shoulder as often as necessary.
Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite
sharply. The exit speed is usually posted. Reduce
your speed according to your speedometer, not
to your sense of motion. After driving for any
distance at higher speeds, you may tend to think
you are going slower than you actually are.
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed
to the posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it
is slower. Stay in the right lane unless you want
to pass.
Make sure you are ready. Try to be well rested. If
you must start when you are not fresh — such
as after a day’s work — do not plan to make too
many miles that first part of the journey. Wear
comfortable clothing and shoes you can easily
drive in.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then
use your turn signal.
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly
over your shoulder to make sure there is not
another vehicle in your blind spot.
312
Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it
serviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If it
needs service, have it done before starting out. Of
course, you will find experienced and able
service experts in GM dealerships all across North
America. They will be ready and willing to help
if you need it.
Highway Hypnosis
Is there actually such a condition as highway
hypnosis? Or is it just plain falling asleep at the
wheel? Call it highway hypnosis, lack of
awareness, or whatever.
There is something about an easy stretch of road
with the same scenery, along with the hum of the
tires on the road, the drone of the engine, and the
rush of the wind against the vehicle that can make
you sleepy. Do not let it happen to you! If it does,
your vehicle can leave the road in less than a
second, and you could crash and be injured.
Here are some things you can check before a trip:
• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir
full? Are all windows clean inside and outside?
• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you
checked all levels?
What can you do about highway hypnosis? First,
be aware that it can happen.
• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses
clean?
Then here are some tips:
• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough
for long-distance driving? Are the tires
all inflated to the recommended pressure?
• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with
a comfortably cool interior.
• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead
and to the sides. Check your rearview mirrors
and your instruments frequently.
• Weather Forecasts: What is the weather
outlook along your route? Should you
delay your trip a short time to avoid a major
storm system?
• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,
service, or parking area and take a nap, get
some exercise, or both. For safety, treat
• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?
drowsiness on the highway as an emergency.
313
If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you are
planning to visit there, here are some tips that
can make your trips safer and more enjoyable.
Hill and Mountain Roads
• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check
all fluid levels and also the brakes, tires,
cooling system, and transmission. These parts
can work hard on mountain roads.
{CAUTION:
If you do not shift down, your brakes
could get so hot that they would not work
well. You would then have poor braking or
even none going down a hill. You could
crash. Shift down to let your engine assist
your brakes on a steep downhill slope.
Driving on steep hills or mountains is different
from driving in flat or rolling terrain.
314
• Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane
roads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wide
or cut across the center of the road. Drive at
speeds that let you stay in your own lane.
{CAUTION:
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with
the ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes
will have to do all the work of slowing
down. They could get so hot that they
would not work well. You would then have
poor braking or even none going down a
hill. You could crash. Always have your
engine running and your vehicle in gear
when you go downhill.
• As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There
could be something in your lane, like a stalled
car or an accident.
• You may see highway signs on mountains that
warn of special problems. Examples are long
grades, passing or no-passing zones, a falling
rocks area, or winding roads. Be alert to these
and take appropriate action.
• Know how to go down hills. The most important
thing to know is this: let your engine do some of
the slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when
you go down a steep or long hill.
• Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift
down to a lower gear. The lower gears help
cool your engine and transmission, and you can
climb the hill better.
315
Winter Driving
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a
supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some
winter outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a
red cloth, and a couple of reflective warning
triangles. And, if you will be driving under severe
conditions, include a small bag of sand, a
piece of old carpet, or a couple of burlap bags to
help provide traction. Be sure you properly
secure these items in your vehicle.
Here are some tips for winter driving:
• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
• You may want to put winter emergency
supplies in your trunk.
316
What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very cold
snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on.
But wet ice can be even more trouble because it
may offer the least traction of all. You can get
wet ice when it is about freezing, 32°F (0°C), and
freezing rain begins to fall. Try to avoid driving
on wet ice until salt and sand crews can get there.
Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where the tires
meet the road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between the tires
and the road, you can have a very slippery
situation. You will have a lot less traction, or grip,
and will need to be very careful.
Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed,
blowing, or loose snow — drive with caution.
Traction control improves your ability to accelerate
when driving on a slippery road. Even though
your vehicle has the Traction Control System
(TCS), you will want to slow down and adjust your
driving to the road conditions. Under certain
conditions, you may want to turn the TCS off, such
as when driving through deep snow and loose
gravel, to help maintain vehicle motion at
lower speeds. See Traction Control System (TCS)
317
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) improves your
vehicle’s stability when you make a hard stop
on a slippery road. Even though you have ABS,
you will want to begin stopping sooner than
you would on dry pavement. See Anti-Lock Brake
If You Are Caught in a Blizzard
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in
a serious situation. You should probably stay
with your vehicle unless you know for sure that you
are near help and you can hike through the
snow. Here are some things to do to summon
help and keep yourself and your passengers safe:
• Allow greater following distance on any
slippery road.
• Turn on your hazard flashers.
• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police
that you have been stopped by the snow.
• Watch for slippery spots. The road might be
fine until you hit a spot that is covered with
ice. On an otherwise clear road, ice patches
may appear in shaded areas where the
sun cannot reach, such as around clumps of
trees, behind buildings, or under bridges.
Sometimes the surface of a curve or an
overpass may remain icy when the
• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket
around you. If you do not have blankets
or extra clothing, make body insulators from
newspapers, burlap bags, rags, floor
mats — anything you can wrap around
yourself or tuck under your clothing to
keep warm.
surrounding roads are clear. If you see a
patch of ice ahead of you, brake before you
are on it. Try not to brake while you are
actually on the ice, and avoid sudden steering
maneuvers.
318
{CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your
vehicle. This can cause deadly CO
(carbon monoxide) gas to get inside. CO
could overcome you and kill you. You
cannot see it or smell it, so you might not
know it is in your vehicle. Clear away
snow from around the base of your
vehicle, especially any that is blocking
your exhaust pipe. And check around
again from time to time to be sure snow
does not collect there.
Open a window just a little on the side of
the vehicle that is away from the wind.
This will help keep CO out.
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be
careful.
Run your engine only as long as you must. This
saves fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a
little faster than just idle. That is, push the
accelerator slightly. This uses less fuel for the
heat that you get and it keeps the battery charged.
319
You will need a well-charged battery to restart the
vehicle, and possibly for signaling later on with
your headlamps. Let the heater run for a while.
{CAUTION:
Then, shut the engine off and close the window
almost all the way to preserve the heat. Start
the engine again and repeat this only when you
feel really uncomfortable from the cold. But do it as
little as possible. Preserve the fuel as long as
you can. To help keep warm, you can get out of
the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises
every half hour or so until help comes.
If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at high
speed, they can explode, and you or
others could be injured. And, the
transmission or other parts of the vehicle
can overheat. That could cause an engine
compartment fire or other damage. When
you are stuck, spin the wheels as little as
possible. Do not spin the wheels above
35 mph (55 km/h) as shown on the
speedometer.
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice, or Snow
In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you
will need to spin the wheels, but you do not
want to spin your wheels too fast. The method
known as rocking can help you get out when you
are stuck, but you must use caution.
Notice: Spinning the wheels can destroy parts
of your vehicle as well as the tires. If you
spin the wheels too fast while shifting
the transmission back and forth, you can
destroy the transmission.
For information about using tire chains on your
320
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out
Loading Your Vehicle
First, turn the steering wheel left and right.
That will clear the area around the front wheels.
You should turn the traction control system
between REVERSE (R) and a forward gear,
or with a manual transmission, between FIRST (1)
or SECOND (2) and REVERSE (R), spinning
the wheels as little as possible. Release the
accelerator pedal while you shift, and press lightly
on the accelerator pedal when the transmission
is in gear. By slowly spinning the wheels in
the forward and reverse directions, you will cause
a rocking motion that may free your vehicle. If
that does not get your vehicle out after a few tries,
it may need to be towed out. If your vehicle
does need to be towed out, see Towing Your
It is very important to know how much weight your
vehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehicle
capacity weight and includes the weight of all
occupants, cargo, and all nonfactory-installed
options. Two labels on your vehicle show how much
weight it may properly carry, the Tire and Loading
Information label, and the Certification label.
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
or either the maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, and it
can change the way your vehicle handles.
These could cause you to lose control
and crash. Also, overloading can shorten
the life of your vehicle.
321
The Tire and Loading Information label also
shows the tire size of the original equipment
tires (C) and the recommended cold tire inflation
pressures (D). For more information on tires
Tire and Loading Information Label
There is also important loading information on the
Certification label. It tells you the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axle; see
“Certification Label” later in this section.
Steps for Determining Correct Load
Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s
placard.
Example Label
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar
(B-pillar). With the driver’s door open, you will
find the label attached below the door lock post
(striker). The tire and loading information label
shows the number of occupant seating
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver
and passengers that will be riding in your
vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
positions (A), and the maximum vehicle
capacity weight (B) in kilograms and pounds.
322
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals
1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in
Step 4.
Example 1
Description
Item
Total
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how
this reduces the available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.
Vehicle Capacity
A
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
Weight for Example 1 =
Subtract
B
C
Occupant Weight
300 lbs (136 kg)
700 lbs (317 kg)
150 lbs (68 kg) × 2 =
Available Occupant
and Cargo Weight =
Your vehicle is not designed nor intended to
tow any trailer.
323
Example 2
Description
Example 3
Description
Item
Total
Item
Total
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for Example 2 =
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for Example 3 =
A
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
A
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
Subtract
Subtract
B
C
Occupant Weight
750 lbs (340 kg)
250 lbs (113 kg)
B
C
Occupant Weight
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
0 lbs (0 kg)
150 lbs (68 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
200 lbs (91 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
Refer to your vehicle’s Tire and Loading
Information label for specific information about
your vehicle’s capacity weight and seating
positions. The combined weight of the driver,
passengers, and cargo should never exceed your
vehicle’s capacity weight.
324
Certification Label
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
or either the maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, and it
can change the way your vehicle handles.
These could cause you to lose control
and crash. Also, overloading can shorten
the life of your vehicle.
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.
A vehicle specific Certification label is attached to
either the driver’s door edge or the lower center
pillar on the driver’s side of the vehicle. This label
shows the gross weight capacity of your vehicle,
called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).
The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle,
all occupants, fuel, and cargo. The Certification
label also shows the maximum weights for
the front and rear axles, called the Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR). Never exceed the GVWR
or the GAWR for either the front or rear axle.
325
If you put things inside your vehicle, like suitcases,
tools, packages, or anything else, they will go as
fast as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn
quickly, or if there is a crash, they will keep going.
Towing
Towing Your Vehicle
Consult your dealer or a professional towing
service if you need to have your disabled vehicle
{CAUTION:
If you want to tow your vehicle behind another
vehicle for recreational purposes (such as behind
a motorhome), see Recreational Vehicle Towing
following.
Things you put inside your vehicle can
strike and injure people in a sudden stop
or turn, or in a crash.
• Put things in the trunk of your vehicle.
In a trunk, put them as far forward as
you can. Try to spread the weight
evenly.
• Never stack heavier things, like
suitcases, inside the vehicle so that
some of them are above the tops of the
seats.
• Do not leave an unsecured child
restraint in your vehicle.
• When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
• Do not leave a seat folded down unless
you need to.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing your
vehicle behind another vehicle – such as behind a
motorhome. The two most common types of
recreational vehicle towing are known as “dinghy
towing” (towing your vehicle with all four wheels
on the ground) and “dolly towing” (towing
your vehicle with two wheels on the ground and
two wheels up on a device known as a “dolly”).
326
With the proper preparation and equipment, many
vehicles can be towed in these ways. See
“Dinghy Towing” and “Dolly Towing,” following.
Dinghy Towing
Notice: If you tow your vehicle with all four
wheels on the ground, the drivetrain
components could be damaged. The repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Do not
tow your vehicle with all four wheels on the
ground.
Here are some important things to consider before
you do recreational vehicle towing:
• What is the towing capacity of the towing
vehicle? Be sure you read the tow vehicle
manufacturer’s recommendations.
Your vehicle was not designed to be towed with
all four wheels on the ground. If your vehicle must
be towed, you should use a dolly. See “Dolly
Towing” following for more information.
• How far will you tow? Some vehicles have
restrictions on how far and how long they
can tow.
• Do you have the proper towing equipment?
See your dealer or trailering professional
for additional advice and equipment
recommendations.
• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just as
you would prepare your vehicle for a long
trip, you’ll want to make sure your vehicle is
prepared to be towed. See Before Leaving on
327
4. Set the parking brake and then remove the key.
Dolly Towing
5. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-ahead
position with a clamping device designed for
towing.
6. Release the parking brake.
Towing a Trailer
Your vehicle is neither designed nor intended to
tow any trailer.
Your vehicle can be towed using a dolly. To tow
your vehicle using a dolly, follow these steps:
1. Put the rear wheels on the dolly.
2. Securely attach the vehicle being towed to the
tow vehicle.
3. Put the vehicle in PARK (P) for an automatic
transmission or in NEUTRAL for a manual
transmission.
328
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
330
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
331
Accessories and Modifications
Service
When you add non-GM accessories to your vehicle
they can affect your vehicle’s performance and
safety, including such things as, airbags, braking,
stability, ride and handling, emissions systems,
aerodynamics, durability, and electronic systems
like anti-lock brakes, traction control and stability
control. Some of these accessories may even
cause malfunction or damage not covered by
warranty.
Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants
you to be happy with it. We hope you will go
to your dealer for all your service needs. You
will get genuine GM parts and GM-trained
and supported service people.
We hope you will want to keep your GM vehicle all
GM. Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
GM Accessories are designed to complement and
function with other systems on your vehicle.
Your GM dealer can accessorize your vehicle
using genuine GM Accessories. When you go to
your GM dealer and ask for GM Accessories,
you will know that GM-trained and supported
service technicians will perform the work using
genuine GM Accessories.
332
California Proposition 65 Warning
CAUTION: (Continued)
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain
and/or emit chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and
systems (including some inside the vehicle), many
fluids, and some component wear by-products
contain and/or emit these chemicals.
• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts,
and other fasteners. English and
metric fasteners can be easily
confused. If you use the wrong
fasteners, parts can later break or fall
off. You could be hurt.
Doing Your Own Service Work
If you want to do some of your own service work,
you will want to use the proper service manual.
It tells you much more about how to service your
vehicle than this manual can. To order the
proper service manual, see Service Publications
{CAUTION:
You can be injured and your vehicle could
be damaged if you try to do service work
on a vehicle without knowing enough
about it.
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement
parts, and tools before you attempt any
vehicle maintenance task.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before
attempting to do your own service work, see
page 84.
You should keep a record with all parts receipts
and list the mileage and the date of any service
work you perform. See Maintenance Record
on page 478.
CAUTION: (Continued)
333
Adding Equipment to the
Outside of Your Vehicle
Gasoline Octane
If your vehicle has the 2.8L V6 engine
(VIN Code T), use regular unleaded gasoline
with a posted octane rating of 87 or higher. If the
octane rating is less than 87, you may notice
an audible knocking noise when you drive,
commonly referred to as spark knock. If this
occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher
as soon as possible. If you are using gasoline
rated at 87 octane or higher and you hear heavy
knocking, your engine needs service.
Things you might add to the outside of your
vehicle can affect the airflow around it. This may
cause wind noise and affect windshield washer
performance. Check with your dealer before
adding equipment to the outside of your vehicle.
Fuel
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part
of the proper maintenance of your vehicle. To
help keep your engine clean and maintain optimum
vehicle performance, GM recommends the use
of gasoline advertised as TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline.
If your vehicle has the 3.6L V6 engine
(VIN Code 7), use regular unleaded gasoline
with a posted octane rating of 87 or higher. For
best performance or trailer towing, you may
choose to use middle grade 89 octane unleaded
gasoline. If the octane rating is less than 87,
you may notice an audible knocking noise when
you drive, commonly referred to as spark knock.
If this occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane
or higher as soon as possible. If you are using
gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher and you hear
heavy knocking, your engine needs service.
The 8th digit of your Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN) shows the code letter or number that
identifies your engine. You will find the VIN at
the top left of the instrument panel. See Vehicle
334
If your vehicle has the 6.0L V8 engine
Gasoline Specifications
(VIN Code U), use premium unleaded gasoline
with a posted octane rating of 91 or higher.
You may also use regular unleaded gasoline
rated at 87 octane or higher, but your vehicle’s
acceleration may be slightly reduced, and you may
notice a slight audible knocking noise, commonly
referred to as spark knock. If the octane is
less than 87, you may notice a heavy knocking
noise when you drive. If this occurs, use a gasoline
rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as possible.
Otherwise, you might damage your engine. If
you are using gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher
and you hear heavy knocking, your engine
needs service.
At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM
specification D 4814 in the United States or
CAN/CGSB-3.5 in Canada. Some gasolines may
contain an octane-enhancing additive called
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT). General Motors recommends against the
use of gasolines containing MMT. See Additives
on page 336 for additional information.
335
California Fuel
Additives
If your vehicle is certified to meet California
Emissions Standards, it is designed to operate
on fuels that meet California specifications.
See the underhood emission control label. If this
fuel is not available in states adopting California
emissions standards, your vehicle will operate
satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal
specifications, but emission control system
performance may be affected. The malfunction
indicator lamp may turn on and your vehicle may
fail a smog-check test. See Malfunction Indicator
your authorized GM dealer for diagnosis. If it is
determined that the condition is caused by the
type of fuel used, repairs may not be covered by
your warranty.
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United
States are now required to contain additives that
will help prevent engine and fuel system deposits
from forming, allowing your emission control system
to work properly. In most cases, you should not
have to add anything to your fuel. However, some
gasolines contain only the minimum amount of
additive required to meet U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency regulations. To help keep fuel
injectors and intake valves clean, or if your vehicle
experiences problems due to dirty injectors or
valves, look for gasoline that is advertised as
TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. Also, your GM
dealer has additives that will help correct and
prevent most deposit-related problems.
336
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers
and ethanol, and reformulated gasolines may
be available in your area. General Motors
recommends that you use these gasolines if they
comply with the specifications described earlier.
However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuels
containing more than 10% ethanol must not be
used in vehicles that were not designed for
those fuels.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions may contain an octane-enhancing
additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant where you buy
gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT. General
Motors recommends against the use of such
gasolines. Fuels containing MMT can reduce the
life of spark plugs and the performance of the
emission control system may be affected. The
malfunction indicator lamp may turn on. If this
occurs, return to your authorized GM dealer for
service.
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for
fuel that contains methanol. Do not use
fuel containing methanol. It can corrode metal
parts in your fuel system and also damage
the plastic and rubber parts. That damage
would not be covered under your warranty.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside
the United States or Canada, the proper fuel may
be hard to find. Never use leaded gasoline or
any other fuel not recommended in the previous
text on fuel. Costly repairs caused by use of
improper fuel would not be covered by your
warranty.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business
in the country where you will be driving.
337
Filling the Tank
{CAUTION:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire
can cause bad injuries. To help avoid
injuries to you and others, read and follow
all the instructions on the pump island.
Turn off your engine when you are
refueling. Do not smoke if you are near
fuel or refueling your vehicle. Keep
sparks, flames, and smoking materials
away from fuel. Do not leave the fuel
pump unattended when refueling your
vehicle. This is against the law in some
places. Keep children away from the fuel
pump; never let children pump fuel.
The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged
fuel door on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.
To open the fuel door, push inward on the forward
edge of the fuel door until the rear edge can be
pulled outward.
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly
counterclockwise. The fuel cap has a spring in it; if
the cap is released too soon, it will spring back
to the right.
While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap from
the hook on the fuel door.
338
The Check Gas Cap message in the Driver
Information Center (DIC) will be displayed if the
fuel cap is not properly installed. See DIC
information.
{CAUTION:
If you spill fuel and then something
ignites it, you could be badly burned. Fuel
can spray out on you if you open the fuel
cap too quickly. This spray can happen if
your tank is nearly full, and is more likely
in hot weather. Open the fuel cap slowly
and wait for any hiss noise to stop. Then
unscrew the cap all the way.
{CAUTION:
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do
not remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow
of fuel by shutting off the pump or by
notifying the station attendant. Leave the
area immediately.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill
the tank and wait a few seconds after you have
finished pumping before removing the nozzle.
Clean fuel from painted surfaces as soon
page 439.
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to
get the right type. Your dealer can get one
for you. If you get the wrong type, it may not
fit properly. This may cause your malfunction
indicator lamp to light and may damage
your fuel tank and emissions system. See
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise until
it clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed.
The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel
cap has been left off or improperly installed.
This would allow fuel to evaporate into the
page 202.
339
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
Checking Things Under
the Hood
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while
it is in your vehicle. Static electricity
discharge from the container can ignite
the gasoline vapor. You can be badly
burned and your vehicle damaged if this
occurs. To help avoid injury to you and
others:
An electric fan under the hood can start up
and injure you even when the engine is not
running. Keep hands, clothing, and tools
away from any underhood electric fan.
• Dispense gasoline only into approved
containers.
{CAUTION:
• Do not fill a container while it is inside
a vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup
bed, or on any surface other than the
ground.
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with
the inside of the fill opening before
operating the nozzle. Contact should
be maintained until the filling is
complete.
Things that burn can get on hot engine
parts and start a fire. These include
liquids like fuel, oil, coolant, brake fluid,
windshield washer and other fluids, and
plastic or rubber. You or others could be
burned. Be careful not to drop or spill
things that will burn onto a hot engine.
• Do not smoke while pumping gasoline.
340
Hood Release
To open the hood, do the following:
1. Pull the hood
release lever with
this symbol on
it. It is located inside
the vehicle on the
lower left side of the
instrument panel.
CTS shown, CTS-V similar
2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and find
the secondary hood release lever. The lever
is located under the front edge of the
grille near the center. Move the release lever
to the side and raise the hood.
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps
are on properly. Then pull the hood down and
close it firmly.
341
B. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See
“Adding Washer Fluid” under Windshield
G. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of View). See
page 346.
H. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake
D. Passenger Compartment Air Filter. See
I. Hydraulic Clutch Reservoir (If Equipped)
(Not Shown). See “When to Check and What
J. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap.
E. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir (Under
page 369.
F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine
343
When you open the hood on the 6.0L V8 CTS-V, you will see the following:
344
B. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See
“Adding Washer Fluid” under Windshield
D. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
H. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake
I. Hydraulic Clutch Reservoir. See “When to
Check and What to Use” under Hydraulic
E. Passenger Compartment Air Filter. See
J. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap.
F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add
345
Checking Engine Oil
Engine Oil
It is a good idea to check the engine oil every time
you get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading,
the oil must be warm and the vehicle must be
on level ground.
There is an oil pressure
light in the instrument
cluster and an Oil
Pressure Low - Stop
Engine message on
the Driver Information
Center (DIC).
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop.
for the location of the engine oil dipstick.
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several
minutes to drain back into the oil pan. If you
do not do this, the oil dipstick might not
show the actual level.
If the light and/or message appear, it means you
need to check the engine oil level right away.
For more information, see “Oil Pressure Low - Stop
should check the engine oil level regularly; this
is an added reminder.
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper
towel or cloth, then push it back in all the
way. Remove it again, keeping the tip down,
and check the level.
346
If the oil is below the cross-hatched area at the
tip of the dipstick, you will need to add at least
one quart/liter of oil. But you must use the
right kind. This section explains what kind of oil
to use. For engine oil crankcase capacity,
When to Add Engine Oil
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine
has so much oil that the oil level gets above the
cross-hatched area that shows the proper
operating range, the engine could be damaged.
See Engine
V6 Engines
on page 342 for the
location of the engine
oil fill cap.
Be sure to add enough oil to put the level
somewhere in the proper operating range. Push the
dipstick all the way back in when you are through.
V8 Engine
347
Look for two things:
• GM4718M
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
Your vehicle’s engine requires a special oil
meeting GM Standard GM4718M. Oils meeting
this standard may be identified as synthetic.
However, not all synthetic oils will meet this GM
standard. You should look for and use only an
oil that meets GM Standard GM4718M.
Notice: If you use oils that do not have the
GM4718M Standard designation, you can cause
engine damage not covered by your warranty.
• SAE 5W-30
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is
best for your vehicle.
These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other
viscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50.
348
Oils meeting these
requirements should
also have the starburst
symbol on the
container. This symbol
indicates that the oil
has been certified by the
American Petroleum
Institute (API).
Substitute Engine Oil: When adding oil to maintain
engine oil level, oil meeting GM Standard
GM4718M may not be available. You can add
substitute oil designated SAE 5W-30 with
the starburst symbol at all temperatures. Substitute
oil not meeting GM Standard GM4718M should
not be used for an oil change.
Engine Oil Additives
Do not add anything to the oil. The recommended
oils with the starburst symbol that meet GM
standards are all you will need for good
performance and engine protection.
You should look for this on the oil container, and
use only those oils that are identified as meeting
GM Standard GM4718M and have the starburst
symbol on the front of the oil container.
Your vehicle’s engine is filled at the factory
with a Mobil 1® synthetic oil, which meets all
requirements for your vehicle.
349
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you
must change your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km)
since your last oil change. Remember to reset the
oil life system whenever the oil is changed.
Engine Oil Life System
When to Change Engine Oil
Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you
know when to change the engine oil and filter.
This is based on engine revolutions and engine
temperature, and not on mileage. Based on driving
conditions, the mileage at which an oil change
will be indicated can vary considerably. For the oil
life system to work properly, you must reset the
system every time the oil is changed.
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life
System and the Oil Life Indicator
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to
change your engine oil and filter based on vehicle
use. Anytime your oil is changed, reset the system
so it can calculate when the next oil change is
required. If a situation occurs where you change
your oil prior to a change engine oil message in the
DIC being turned on, reset the system.
When the system has calculated that oil life has
been diminished, it will indicate that an oil change
is necessary. A change engine oil message in the
Driver Information Center (DIC) will come on.
Change your oil as soon as possible within the next
600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if you are
driving under the best conditions, the oil life system
may not indicate that an oil change is necessary for
over a year. However, your engine oil and filter
must be changed at least once a year and at this
time the system must be reset. Your dealer has
GM-trained service people who will perform this
work using genuine GM parts and reset the system.
It is also important to check your oil regularly and
keep it at the proper level.
350
After the oil has been changed, the change engine
oil message and the oil life indicator must be
reset. To reset the message and indicator, use
one of the following procedures:
Navigation System
If you have the navigation system, see “Vehicle
Customization” in the Navigation System Manual
for how to reset the oil life indicator.
Base Audio System
What to Do with Used Oil
Press the CLR button located to the right of the
DIC display to acknowledge the change engine oil
message. This will clear the message from the
display and reset it.
Used engine oil contains certain elements that may
be unhealthy for your skin and could even cause
cancer. Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very
long. Clean your skin and nails with soap and
water, or a good hand cleaner. Wash or properly
dispose of clothing or rags containing used engine
oil. See the manufacturer’s warnings about the use
and disposal of oil products.
To reset the oil life indicator, use the
following steps:
1. Press the up or down arrow on the INFO
button located to the right of the DIC
display to access the DIC menu.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from
the filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by
putting it in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into
sewers, or into streams or bodies of water. Instead,
recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used
oil. If you have a problem properly disposing of your
used oil, ask your dealer, a service station or a local
recycling center for help.
2. Once XXX% ENGINE OIL LIFE menu item is
highlighted, press and hold the CLR button.
The percentage will return to 100, and
the oil life indicator will be reset. Repeat the
steps if the percentage does not return to 100.
3. Turn the key to OFF.
If the change engine oil message comes back on
when you start your vehicle, the engine oil life
system has not reset. Repeat the procedure.
351
When to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II
intervals and replace it at the first oil change
after each 50,000 mile (83 000 km) interval. See
information. If you are driving in dusty/dirty
conditions, inspect the filter at each engine oil
change.
How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
To inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove the filter
from the vehicle and lightly shake the filter to
release loose dust and dirt. If the filter remains
caked with dirt, a new filter is required.
CTS shown, CTS-V similar
The engine air cleaner/filter is in the engine
compartment on the driver’s side of the vehicle,
near the front. See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 342 for more information on location.
To inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter,
do the following:
1. Remove the two screws located on the sides
of the cover.
2. Lift the cover off.
352
3. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.
on page 476 for the correct part number
for the filter.
Automatic Transmission Fluid
It is not necessary to check the transmission fluid
level. A transmission fluid leak is the only reason for
fluid loss. If a leak occurs, take your vehicle to your
GM dealer service department and have it repaired
as soon as possible.
4. Reinstall the cover by reversing Steps 1 and 2.
Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in
be sure to use the transmission fluid listed in
{CAUTION:
Operating the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off can cause you or others
to be burned. The air cleaner not only
cleans the air; it helps to stop flames if
the engine backfires. If it is not there
and the engine backfires, you could be
burned. Do not drive with it off, and be
careful working on the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off.
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic
transmission fluid may damage your vehicle,
and the damages may not be covered by
your warranty. Always use the automatic
transmission fluid listed in Recommended
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire
can cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt
can easily get into your engine, which will
damage it. Always have the air cleaner/filter in
place when you are driving.
353
To reset the transmission fluid life indicator, use
the following steps:
How to Reset the Change Transmission
Fluid Message and the Transmission
Fluid Indicator
1. Press the up or down arrow on the INFO
(Information) button located to the right of
the DIC display to access the DIC menu.
After the transmission fluid has been changed, the
Change Trans Fluid message and the transmission
fluid life indicator must be reset. To reset the
message and indicator, use one of the following
procedures:
2. Once the XXX% TRANS FLUID LIFE menu
item is highlighted, press and hold the
CLR button.
The percentage will return to 100, and the
transmission fluid life indicator will be reset.
Base Audio System
Press the CLR (Clear) button located to the right
of the Driver Information Center (DIC) display
to acknowledge the CHANGE TRANS FLUID
message. This will clear the message from the
display and reset it.
3. Repeat the steps if the percentage does not
return to 100.
Navigation System
If your vehicle has a navigation system, see your
Navigation System Manual for instructions on
how to acknowledge the Change Trans Fluid
message and reset the transmission fluid
life indicator.
354
Check the fluid level only when your engine is off,
the vehicle is parked on a level place and the
transmission is cool enough for you to rest your
fingers on the transmission case.
Manual Transmission Fluid
When to Check Manual Transmission
Fluid
To check the fluid level, do the following:
1. Remove the filler plug.
It is not necessary to check the manual
transmission fluid level. A transmission fluid leak
is the only reason for fluid loss. If a leak occurs,
take the vehicle to your GM dealer service
department and have it repaired as soon as
possible.
2. Check that the lubricant level is up to the
bottom of the filler plug hole.
3. If the fluid level is good and your vehicle is a
CTS, replace the gasket and reinstall the filler
plug. If the fluid level is good and your
vehicle is a CTS-V, apply LOCTITE ® #516 or
equivalent sealant to the threads and then
reinstall the filler plug.
How to Check Manual Transmission
Fluid
Because this operation can be difficult, you may
choose to have this done at your GM dealer
service department.
With either vehicle, be sure the plug is fully
seated. If the fluid level is low, add more fluid
as described in the next steps.
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the
instructions here, or you could get a false reading.
Notice: Too much or too little fluid can
damage your transmission. Too much can
mean that some of the fluid could come out
and fall on hot engine parts or exhaust system
parts, starting a fire. Too little fluid could
cause the transmission to overheat. Be sure to
get an accurate reading if you check your
transmission fluid.
355
How to Add Manual Transmission Fluid
When to Check and What to Use
Here is how to add fluid. See Recommended
which type of fluid to use.
The hydraulic clutch fluid
reservoir cap has this
symbol on it. See Engine
on page 342 for
1. Remove the filler plug.
2. Add fluid at the filler plug hole. Add only
enough fluid to bring the fluid level up to
the bottom of the filler plug hole.
reservoir location.
3. If your vehicle is a CTS, replace the gasket
and reinstall the filler plug. If your vehicle is a
CTS-V, apply LOCTITE ® #516 or equivalent
sealant to the threads and then reinstall
the filler plug.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine
how often you should check the fluid level in
your clutch master cylinder reservoir and for the
proper fluid to use. See Owner Checks and
Again, with either vehicle, be sure the plug is
fully seated.
Hydraulic Clutch
It is not necessary to regularly check clutch fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak in the system.
Adding fluid will not correct a leak.
How to Check and Add Fluid
Make sure the fluid level is at the MIN (Minimum)
line on the side of the reservoir. If it is not,
remove the cap and add the proper fluid until the
level reaches the MIN line.
A fluid loss in this system could indicate a
problem. Have the system inspected and repaired.
356
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant will:
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is
designed to remain in your vehicle for five years or
150,000 miles (240 000 km), whichever occurs
first, if you add only DEX-COOL® extended
life coolant.
• Give freezing protection down
to −34°F (−37°C).
• Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
• Protect against rust and corrosion.
• Help keep the proper engine temperature.
• Let the warning lights and gages work as they
should.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL®
may cause premature engine, heater core,
or radiator corrosion. In addition, the engine
coolant may require changing sooner, at
the first maintenance service after each
30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,
whichever occurs first. Any repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your
vehicle.
The following explains your cooling system and
how to add coolant when it is low. If you have
a problem with engine overheating, see Engine
357
Notice: If you use an improper coolant
mixture, your engine could overheat and be
badly damaged. The repair cost would not be
covered by your warranty. Too much water
in the mixture can freeze and crack the engine,
radiator, heater core, and other parts.
What to Use
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water
and one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which will
not damage aluminum parts. If you use this coolant
mixture, you do not need to add anything else.
If you have to add coolant more than once or
twice a year, have your dealer check your cooling
system.
{CAUTION:
Notice: If you use extra inhibitors and/or
additives in your vehicle’s cooling system, you
could damage your vehicle. Use only the
proper mixture of the engine coolant listed in
this manual for the cooling system. See
page 474 for more information.
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can
boil before the proper coolant mixture will.
Your vehicle’s coolant warning system is
set for the proper coolant mixture. With
plain water or the wrong mixture, your
engine could get too hot but you would
not get the overheat warning. Your engine
could catch fire and you or others could
be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
358
Checking Coolant
{CAUTION:
Turning the surge tank pressure cap when
the engine and radiator are hot can allow
steam and scalding liquids to blow out
and burn you badly. Never turn the surge
tank pressure cap — even a little — when
the engine and radiator are hot.
The vehicle must be on a level surface. When
your engine is cold, the coolant level should be at
the FULL COLD/FROID line on the side of the
surge tank. Follow the arrow from the top of
the tank down the side to the horizontal mark.
The coolant surge tank and pressure cap are
located on the driver’s side of the vehicle, toward
the rear of the engine compartment. See
more information on location.
359
Adding Coolant
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap
If you need more coolant, add the proper
DEX-COOL® coolant mixture at the surge tank,
but only when the engine is cool.
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly
installed, coolant loss and possible engine
damage may occur. Be sure the cap is properly
and tightly secured.
The coolant surge tank pressure cap must be fully
installed on the coolant surge tank. See Engine
information on location.
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant
on hot engine parts. Coolant contains
ethylene glycol, and it will burn if the
engine parts are hot enough. Do not spill
coolant on a hot engine.
Engine Overheating
There are two engine hot messages that may be
displayed in the Driver Information Center
page 228 for more information.
When replacing the pressure cap, make sure it is
hand-tight and fully seated.
360
Notice: If your engine catches fire because
you keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle
can be badly damaged. The costly repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. See
on page 363 for information on driving to a
safe place in an emergency.
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
{CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can
burn you badly, even if you just open the
hood. Stay away from the engine if you
see or hear steam coming from it. Turn it
off and get everyone away from the
vehicle until it cools down. Wait until
there is no sign of steam or coolant
before you open the hood.
If you keep driving when the vehicles
engine is overheated, the liquids in it can
catch fire. You or others could be badly
burned. Stop your engine if it overheats,
and get out of the vehicle until the engine
is cool.
information on driving to a safe place in
an emergency.
361
If you get the Engine Coolant Hot − Idle Engine
warning with no sign of steam, try this for a minute
or so:
If No Steam Is Coming From Your
Engine
An Engine Coolant Hot − Idle Engine warning,
along with a low coolant, can indicate a serious
problem.
1. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in
NEUTRAL (N) while stopped. If it is safe to
do so, pull off the road, shift to PARK (P)
or NEUTRAL (N) and let the engine idle.
If you get an Engine Coolant Hot − Idle Engine
warning, but see or hear no steam, the problem
may not be too serious. Sometimes the engine can
get a little too hot
2. Set the climate controls to the highest heat
setting and fan speed and open the windows,
as necessary.
when you:
If you no longer have the Engine Coolant Hot − Idle
Engine warning, you can drive. Just to be safe,
drive slower for about 10 minutes. If the warning
does not come back on, you can drive normally.
• Climb a long hill on a hot day.
• Stop after high-speed driving.
• Idle for long periods in traffic.
• Tow a trailer.
362
If the warning continues and you have not
stopped, pull over, stop, and park your vehicle
right away.
Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode
This operating mode allows your vehicle to be
driven to a safe place in an emergency. Should an
hot engine condition exist, an overheat protection
mode which alternates firing groups of cylinders
helps prevent engine damage. In this mode,
you will notice a loss in power and engine
performance. Driving extended miles (km) and/or
towing a trailer in the overheat protection mode
should be avoided.
If there is still no sign of steam, you can idle the
engine for three minutes while you are parked.
If you still have the warning, turn off the engine
and get everyone out of the vehicle until it
cools down.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get
service help right away.
Notice: After driving in the overheated engine
protection operating mode, to avoid engine
damage, allow the engine to cool before
attempting any repair. The engine oil will be
severely degraded. Repair the cause of coolant
page 346.
363
Cooling System
{CAUTION:
When you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here is
what you will see:
An electric engine cooling fan under the
hood can start up even when the engine
is not running and can injure you. Keep
hands, clothing and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is
boiling, do not do anything else until it cools down.
The vehicle should be parked on a level surface.
If the engine is warm or hot, the coolant level
should be at or above the FULL COLD/FROID line
on the side of the coolant surge tank. If the
engine is cold, the coolant level should be near
the FULL COLD/FROID line on the side of
the coolant surge tank. If it is not, you may have
a leak at the pressure cap or in the radiator hoses,
heater hoses, radiator, water pump or somewhere
else in the cooling system.
3.6L V6 Engine shown, 2.8L V6 and 6.0L V8
Engines similar
A. Electric Engine Cooling Fans
B. Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap
364
Notice: Engine damage from running your
engine without coolant is not covered by your
warranty. See Overheated Engine Protection
driving to a safe place in an emergency.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL®
may cause premature engine, heater core or
radiator corrosion. In addition, the engine
coolant may require changing sooner, at
30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,
whichever occurs first. Any repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your
vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other
engine parts, can be very hot. Do not
touch them. If you do, you can be burned.
Do not run the engine if there is a leak.
If you run the engine, it could lose all
coolant. That could cause an engine fire,
and you could be burned. Get any leak
fixed before you drive the vehicle.
If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on,
check to see if the electric engine cooling fans
are running. If the engine hot light is on, both fans
should be running. If they are not, your vehicle
needs service.
365
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Surge Tank
{CAUTION:
If you have not found a problem yet, check to see
if coolant is visible in the surge tank. If coolant
is visible but the coolant level is not at the FULL
COLD/FROID line on the side of the coolant
surge tank, add a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and DEX-COOL® coolant at the coolant
surge tank, but be sure the cooling system,
including the coolant surge tank pressure cap, is
page 357 for more information.
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot
cooling system can blow out and burn
you badly. They are under pressure, and if
you turn the coolant surge tank pressure
cap — even a little — they can come out at
high speed. Never turn the cap when the
cooling system, including the coolant
surge tank pressure cap, is hot. Wait for
the cooling system and coolant surge
tank pressure cap to cool if you ever have
to turn the pressure cap.
366
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can
boil before the proper coolant mixture will.
Your vehicle’s coolant warning system is
set for the proper coolant mixture. With
plain water or the wrong mixture, your
engine could get too hot but you would
not get the overheat warning. Your engine
could catch fire and you or others could
be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
You can be burned if you spill coolant
on hot engine parts. Coolant contains
ethylene glycol and it will burn if the
engine parts are hot enough. Do not spill
coolant on a hot engine.
If no coolant is visible in the surge tank, add
coolant as follows:
1. You can remove the coolant surge tank
pressure cap when the cooling system,
including the coolant surge tank pressure cap
and upper radiator hose, is no longer hot.
Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise
about one-quarter turn and then stop.
Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and
crack the engine, radiator, heater core and
other parts. Use the recommended coolant and
the proper coolant mixture.
If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss
means there is still some pressure left.
367
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly,
and remove it.
3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper
mixture, to slightly above the FULL
COLD/FROID line on the side of the coolant
surge tank.
368
4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off,
start the engine and let it run until you can
feel the upper radiator hose getting hot. The
upper radiator hose is the top hose coming
out of the radiator, on the passenger’s side of
the vehicle. Watch out for the engine
cooling fans.
Power Steering Fluid
See Engine
on page 342 for the
location of the power
steering fluid reservoir.
By this time, the coolant level inside the
coolant surge tank may be lower. If the level is
lower, add more of the proper mixture to the
coolant surge tank until the level reaches
the FULL COLD/FROID line on the side of the
coolant surge tank.
5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure the
pressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated.
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
It is not necessary to regularly check power
steering fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in
the system or you hear an unusual noise. A
fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem.
Have the system inspected and repaired.
Recheck the coolant level in the bottle, the next
time you use your vehicle to insure the system is
369
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
What to Use
To check the power steering fluid, do the following:
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the
proper fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses
and seals.
1. Turn the key off and let the engine
compartment cool down.
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir
clean.
3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a
clean rag.
Windshield Washer Fluid
What to Use
4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure
to read the manufacturer’s instructions before
use. If you will be operating your vehicle in an area
where the temperature may fall below freezing,
use a fluid that has sufficient protection against
freezing.
5. Remove the cap again and look at the
fluid level on the dipstick.
The level should be at the FULL COLD mark. If
necessary, add only enough fluid to bring the level
up to the mark.
370
Notice:
Adding Washer Fluid
• When using concentrated washer fluid,
follow the manufacturer’s instructions
for adding water.
The CHECK WASHER FLUID message will
appear on the Driver Information Center (DIC)
when the fluid level is low. See DIC Warnings and
• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer
fluid. Water can cause the solution to
freeze and damage your washer fluid tank
and other parts of the washer system.
Also, water does not clean as well
as washer fluid.
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it.
Add washer fluid
until the tank is full. See
Overview on page 342
for reservoir location.
• Fill your washer fluid tank only
three-quarters full when it is very cold.
This allows for expansion if freezing
occurs, which could damage the tank if it
is completely full.
• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in
your windshield washer. It can damage
your washer system and paint.
371
So, it is not a good idea to top off your brake fluid.
Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If you add
fluid when your linings are worn, then you will have
too much fluid when you get new brake linings. You
should add or remove brake fluid, as necessary,
only when work is done on the brake hydraulic
system.
Brakes
Brake Fluid
Your brake master
cylinder reservoir is
filled with DOT-3 brake
fluid. See Engine
on page 342 for the
location of the reservoir.
{CAUTION:
If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill
on the engine. The fluid will burn if the
engine is hot enough. You or others could
be burned, and your vehicle could be
damaged. Add brake fluid only when work
is done on the brake hydraulic system.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid
level in the reservoir might go down. The first
is that the brake fluid goes down to an acceptable
level during normal brake lining wear. When
new linings are put in, the fluid level goes back
up. The other reason is that fluid is leaking out of
the brake system. If it is, you should have your
brake system fixed, since a leak means that
sooner or later your brakes will not work well, or
will not work at all.
If the ignition is in ON and the brake fluid is low,
the “Check Brake Fluid” message will be displayed
in the DIC. See “Check Brake Fluid Message”
When your brake fluid falls to a low level, your
brake warning light will come on. See Brake
372
What to Add
When you do need brake fluid, DOT-3 brake fluid
is recommended for use. DOT-4 brake fluid is
also compatible with your vehicle’s brake system
parts. However, if you choose to use DOT-4
fluid, it is recommended that you flush your brake
hydraulic system and refill it with new DOT-4
fluid at a regular maintenance service every
page 466. Use new brake fluid from a sealed
container only. See Recommended Fluids
{CAUTION:
With the wrong kind of fluid in your brake
system, your brakes may not work well, or
they may not even work at all. This could
cause a crash. Always use the proper
brake fluid.
Notice:
• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage
brake system parts. For example, just a
few drops of mineral-based oil, such
as engine oil, in your brake system can
damage brake system parts so badly that
they will have to be replaced. Do not
let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the
area around the cap before removing it. This
will help keep dirt from entering the reservoir.
• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s
painted surfaces, the paint finish can
be damaged. Be careful not to spill brake
fluid on your vehicle. If you do, wash it
off immediately. See Washing Your Vehicle
on page 439.
373
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out
Brake Wear
brake pads could result in costly brake repair.
Your vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes.
Some driving conditions or climates may cause
a brake squeal when the brakes are first applied or
lightly applied. This does not mean something is
wrong with your brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that
make a high-pitched warning sound when the
brake pads are worn and new pads are needed.
The sound may come and go or be heard all
the time your vehicle is moving, except when you
are pushing on the brake pedal firmly.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated,
inspect brake pads for wear and evenly tighten
wheel nuts in the proper sequence to GM torque
specifications.
{CAUTION:
Brake linings should always be replaced as
complete axle sets.
The brake wear warning sound means that
soon your brakes will not work well. That
could lead to an accident. When you hear
the brake wear warning sound, have your
vehicle serviced.
374
Brake Pedal Travel
Replacing Brake System Parts
See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return
to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase
in pedal travel. This could be a sign of brake
trouble.
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its
many parts have to be of top quality and work
well together if the vehicle is to have really good
braking. Your vehicle was designed and tested with
top-quality GM brake parts. When you replace parts
of your braking system — for example, when your
brake linings wear down and you need new ones
put in — be sure you get new approved GM
replacement parts. If you do not, your brakes may
no longer work properly. For example, if someone
puts in brake linings that are wrong for your vehicle,
the balance between your front and rear brakes can
change — for the worse. The braking performance
you have come to expect can change in many other
ways if someone puts in the wrong replacement
brake parts.
Brake Adjustment
Every time you apply the brakes, with or without
the vehicle moving, your brakes adjust for wear.
375
After a power loss, such as disconnecting the
battery or removing the maxi fuses in the power
distribution fuse block, the following steps must
be performed to calibrate the electronic throttle
control. If this is not done, the engine will not run
properly.
Battery
Your vehicle has a maintenance free battery.
When it is time for a new battery, get one that has
the replacement number shown on the original
battery’s label. We recommend an ACDelco®
replacement battery. See Engine Compartment
Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer and reproductive harm. Wash
hands after handling.
1. Turn the ignition key to ON. Do not start the
engine.
2. Leave the ignition in ON for at least three
minutes so that the electronic throttle
control will cycle and re-learn its home
position.
3. Turn the ignition to OFF.
4. Start and run the engine for at least
30 seconds.
{CAUTION:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and
gas that can explode. You can be badly
hurt if you are not careful. See Jump
around a battery without getting hurt.
376
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in
costly damage to your vehicle that would
not be covered by your warranty.
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or
pulling it will not work, and it could damage
your vehicle.
Jump Starting
If your vehicle’s battery has run down, you may
want to use another vehicle and some jumper
cables to start your vehicle. Be sure to use
the following steps to do it safely.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a
12-volt battery with a negative ground system.
{CAUTION:
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not
a 12-volt system with a negative ground, both
vehicles can be damaged. Only use vehicles
with 12-volt systems with negative grounds to
jump start your vehicle.
Batteries can hurt you. They can be
dangerous because:
• They contain acid that can burn you.
• They contain gas that can explode or
ignite.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper
cables can reach, but be sure the vehicles are
not touching each other. If they are, it could
cause a ground connection you do not
want. You would not be able to start your
vehicle and the bad grounding could damage
the electrical systems.
• They contain enough electricity to
burn you.
If you do not follow these steps exactly,
some or all of these things can hurt you.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling,
set the parking brake firmly on both vehicles
involved in the jump start procedure. Put
an automatic transmission in PARK (P) or a
manual transmission in NEUTRAL before
setting the parking brake.
377
Notice: If you leave your radio or other
accessories on during the jump starting
procedure, they could be damaged. The repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always
turn off your radio and other accessories when
jump starting your vehicle.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the
cigarette lighter or the accessory power
outlets. Turn off the radio and all lamps that
are not needed. This will avoid sparks
and help save both batteries. And it could
save the radio!
4. Open the hoods and locate the positive (+)
and negative (−) terminal locations of the
other vehicle, as well as the positive (+)
terminal location on your vehicle’s battery.
page 342 for more information on the location
of the battery.
378
Notice: If you connect a negative cable to the
ECM, ECM mounting bracket, or any cables
that attach to the ECM bracket, you may
damage the ECM. Always attach the negative
cable to your vehicle’s remote negative ground
location, instead of the ECM, ECM bracket,
or any cables attached to the ECM bracket.
{CAUTION:
An electric fan can start up even when the
engine is not running and can injure you.
Keep hands, clothing and tools away from
any underhood electric fan.
Your vehicle has a remote negative (−) ground
location, as shown in the illustration. It is
located between the battery and the underhood
fuse block. You should always use this remote
ground location, instead of the terminal on the
battery.
379
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause
battery gas to explode. People have been
hurt doing this, and some have been
blinded. Use a flashlight if you need more
light.
Fans or other moving engine parts can
injure you badly. Keep your hands away
from moving parts once the engine is
running.
Be sure the battery has enough water. You
do not need to add water to the battery
installed in your new vehicle. But if a
battery has filler caps, be sure the right
amount of fluid is there. If it is low, add
water to take care of that first. If you do not,
explosive gas could be present.
5. Check that the jumper cables do not have
loose or missing insulation. If they do, you
could get a shock. The vehicles could
be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+)
will go to positive (+) or to a remote positive (+)
terminal if the vehicle has one. Negative (−)
will go to a heavy, unpainted metal engine part
or to a remote negative (−) terminal if the
vehicle has one.
Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) or
you will get a short that would damage
the battery and maybe other parts too. And do
not connect the negative (−) cable to the
negative (−) terminal on the dead battery
because this can cause sparks.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn
you. Do not get it on you. If you
accidentally get it in your eyes or on your
skin, flush the place with water and get
medical help immediately.
380
8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to
the negative terminal of the good battery. Use
a remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle
has one.
Do not let the other end touch anything until
the next step. The other end of the negative (−)
cable does not go to the dead battery. It
goes to a heavy, unpainted metal engine part
or to a remote negative (−) terminal on the
vehicle with the dead battery.
9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable
at least 18 inches (45 cm) away from the dead
battery, but not near engine parts that move.
The electrical connection is just as good there,
and the chance of sparks getting back to the
battery is much less.
6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the
positive (+) terminal of the dead battery.
Use a remote positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one.
Use a remote negative (−) terminal if the
vehicle has one. Your vehicle’s remote
negative (−) ground location is for this purpose.
7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect
it to the positive (+) terminal of the good
battery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one.
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery
and run the engine for a while.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead
battery. If it will not start after a few tries, it
probably needs service.
381
Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or
removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting
may occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always
connect and remove the jumper cables in the
correct order, making sure that the cables do
not touch each other or other metal.
To disconnect the jumper cables from both
vehicles, do the following:
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from
the vehicle that had the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from
the vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
other vehicle.
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or
Remote Negative (−) Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and
Remote Negative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
382
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug
hole, located on the rear axle, you’ll need to add
some lubricant. Add enough lubricant to raise
the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole.
Rear Axle
When to Check Lubricant
It is not necessary to regularly check rear axle
fluid unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear
an unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a
problem. Have it inspected and repaired.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine
what kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended
How to Check Lubricant
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be
on a level surface.
383
The vehicle should be properly prepared as
follows:
Headlamp Aiming
The vehicle has a visual optical headlamp aiming
system. The aim has been preset at the factory
and should need no further adjustment.
• The vehicle should be placed so the
headlamps are 25 ft. (7.6 m) from a light
colored wall.
However, if the vehicle is damaged in an accident,
the headlamp aim may be affected and adjustment
may be necessary.
• The vehicle must have all four tires on a level
surface which is level all the way to the wall.
• The vehicle should be placed so it is
perpendicular to the wall.
If oncoming vehicles flash their high beams at
you, this may also mean the vertical aim needs to
be adjusted.
• The vehicle should not have any snow, ice, or
mud on it.
It is recommended that the vehicle is taken to your
dealer for service if the headlamps need to be
re-aimed. It is possible however, to re-aim
the headlamps as described in the following
procedure.
• The vehicle should be fully assembled and all
other work stopped while headlamp aiming is
being performed.
• The vehicle should be normally loaded with a
full tank of fuel and one person or 160 lbs
(75 kg) sitting on the driver’s seat.
• Tires should be properly inflated.
• The spare tire is in its original location in the
vehicle.
384
Headlamp aiming is done with the vehicle’s
low-beam headlamps. The high-beam headlamps
will be correctly aimed if the low-beam headlamps
are aimed properly.
To adjust the vertical aim, do the following:
page 341 for more information.
4. At the wall measure from the ground
upward (A) to the recorded distance from
Step 3 and mark it.
5. Draw or tape a horizontal line (B) the width of
the vehicle at the wall where it was marked
it Step 4.
Notice: Do not cover a headlamp to improve
beam cut-off when aiming. Covering a
headlamp may cause excessive heat build-up
which may cause damage to the headlamp.
6. Turn on the low-beam headlamps and place a
piece of cardboard or equivalent in front of
the headlamp not being aimed. This should
allow only the beam of light from the headlamp
being aimed to be seen on the flat surface.
2. Locate the aim dot on the lens of the
low-beam headlamp.
3. Measure the distance from the ground to the
aim dot on the low-beam headlamp. Record
the distance.
385
8. Turn the vertical aiming screw until the
headlamp beam is aimed to the horizontal tape
line. If you turn it clockwise, it will raise the
beam and if you turn it counterclockwise, it will
lower the beam.
The top edge of the cut-off should be
positioned at the bottom edge of the horizontal
tape line.
Passenger’s Side Shown
7. Locate the vertical headlamp aiming screws,
which are under the hood near each headlamp
assembly.
The adjustment screw can be turned with a
6 mm hex socket.
9. Make sure that the light from the headlamp is
positioned at the bottom edge of the horizontal
tape line. The lamp on the left (A) shows
the correct headlamp aim. The lamp on the
right (B) shows the incorrect headlamp aim.
10. Repeat Steps 7 through 9 for the opposite
headlamp.
386
Halogen Bulbs
Bulb Replacement
For the proper type of replacement bulbs, see
{CAUTION:
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your dealer.
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas
inside and can burst if you drop or
scratch the bulb. You or others could be
injured. Be sure to read and follow the
instructions on the bulb package.
High Intensity Discharge (HID)
Lighting
{CAUTION:
The low beam high intensity discharge
lighting system operates at a very high
voltage. If you try to service any of the
system components, you could be
seriously injured. Have your dealer or a
qualified technician service them.
Your vehicle has HID headlamps. After your
vehicle’s HID headlamp bulb has been replaced,
you may notice that the beam is a slightly different
shade than it was originally. This is normal.
387
4. Remove the electrical connector from the bulb
by lifting the two plastic clips.
Front Turn Signal and Fog Lamps
A. Turn Signal Lamp
B. Fog Lamp
5. Pull the old bulb from the bulb socket keeping
the bulb straight as you pull it out.
6. Install a new bulb.
7. Reverse the steps to reinstall the lamp
assembly.
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps
and Sidemarker Lamps
A. Taillamps and
Stoplamps
B. Turn Signal Lamp
C. Sidemarker Lamp
To replace a turn signal or fog lamp bulb, do the
following:
1. Remove the protection shield located on the
underside of the front of the vehicle by pulling
out the push-pins located on the underside
of the protection shield.
2. Reach up behind the front bumper area from
under the vehicle to access the lamp housing.
3. Remove the bulb socket from the housing by
turning the bulb socket one-quarter turn
counterclockwise.
388
Back-Up and License Plate Lamps
more information.
2. Remove the compact spare tire cover by
turning the wing nut counterclockwise.
3. Remove the four convenience net wing nuts.
4. Pull the carpet back away from the body
of the vehicle on the side with the burned
out bulb.
5. Remove the two mounting screws from the
lamp assembly.
6. Pull out the lamp assembly to expose the bulb
sockets.
A. Back-Up Lamps
B. License Plate Lamps
7. Turn the bulb socket one-quarter turn
counterclockwise and pull the bulb socket
out of the lamp reflector.
To replace a back-up or license plate bulb, do the
following:
8. Pull the old bulb from the bulb socket keeping
the bulb straight as you pull it out.
more information.
9. Install a new bulb.
2. Remove the cloth cover on the trunk lid by
pulling out the three push-pins located on
the underside of the trunk lid.
10. Reverse the steps to reinstall the lamp
assembly.
3. Remove the eight mounting nuts from the
underside of the trunk lid by turning the
nuts counterclockwise.
389
4. Pull the lamp assembly away from the vehicle
to expose the bulb sockets.
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for
wear or cracking. See Owner Checks and Services
on page 469.
5. Turn the bulb socket one-quarter turn
counterclockwise and pull the bulb and socket
out of the lamp reflector.
6. Pull the old bulb from the bulb socket keeping
the bulb straight as you pull it out.
It is a good idea to clean or replace the wiper
blade assembly on a regular basis or when worn.
For proper windshield wiper blade length and
type, see Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
on page 476.
7. Install a new bulb.
8. Reverse the steps to reinstall the lamp
assembly.
To replace the wiper blade assembly, do the
following:
Replacement Bulbs
Exterior Lamp
Back-Up, Front/Rear Turn Signal,
Stoplamp and Taillamp
Fog Lamp
License Plate Lamp
Rear Sidemarker Lamp
Bulb Number
1. Turn the ignition to ON with the engine off.
3157K
2. Turn on the windshield wipers and turn them
off again when the wipers are in the out-wipe
position. The driver’s side blade will be
9145
W5WLL
W5WLL
straight up and down on the windshield.
3. Pull the windshield wiper assembly away from
the windshield.
For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact
your dealer.
390
6. Replace the blade with a new one.
4. Lift the wiper blade assembly up so it is in a
T-shaped position. You should be able to
see a tab.
7. Reinstall the wiper blade assembly by sliding
it over the wiper arm to engage the J-hooked
end. Pull up on the assembly to lock it into
place.
5. Squeeze the tab together and pull the wiper
blade assembly down far enough to release it
from the J-hooked end of the wiper arm.
Slide the assembly away from the arm.
8. Repeat the steps for the other wiper.
Allowing the wiper blade arm to touch the
windshield when no wiper blade is installed
could damage the windshield. Any damage
that occurs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not allow the wiper blade arm to
touch the windshield.
391
Tires
CAUTION: (Continued)
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires
made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever
have questions about your tire warranty and where
to obtain service, see your GM Warranty booklet for
details. For additional information refer to the tire
manufacturer’s booklet included with your vehicle.
• Underinflated tires pose the same
danger as overloaded tires. The
resulting accident could cause serious
injury. Check all tires frequently to
maintain the recommended pressure.
Tire pressure should be checked when
your tires are cold. See Inflation - Tire
{CAUTION:
• Overinflated tires are more likely
to be cut, punctured, or broken by a
sudden impact — such as when you
hit a pothole. Keep tires at the
recommended pressure.
• Worn, old tires can cause accidents.
If your tread is badly worn, or if
your tires have been damaged,
replace them.
• Poorly maintained and improperly
used tires are dangerous.
• Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result of too much
friction. You could have an air-out and
a serious accident. See Loading Your
CAUTION: (Continued)
inflation pressure adjustment for high
speed driving.
392
Notice: If your vehicle has 245/45R18,
Winter tires, in general, are designed for increased
traction on snow and ice covered roads. With winter
tires, there may be decreased dry road traction,
increased road noise, and shorter tread life. After
switching to winter tires, be alert for changes in
vehicle handling and braking.
P245/45ZR18 or P225/50R18 size tires, they
are classified as low-profile tires. Low-profile
tires are more susceptible to damage from road
hazards or curb impact than standard profile
tires. Tire and or wheel assembly damage
can occur when coming into contact with
road hazards like, potholes, or sharp edged
objects or when sliding into a curb. Your
GM warranty does not cover this type of
damage. Keep tires set to the correct inflation
pressure and when possible avoid contact
with curbs, potholes and other road hazards.
See your dealer for details regarding winter tire
availability and proper tire selection. Also,
If you choose to use winter tires:
• Use tires of the same brand and tread type on
all four wheel positions.
• Use only radial ply tires of the same size, load
range, and speed rating as the original
equipment tires.
Winter Tires
If you expect to drive on snow or ice covered
roads often, you may want to get winter tires for
your vehicle. All season tires provide good overall
performance on most surfaces but they may
not offer the traction you would like or the same
level of performance as winter tires on snow or ice
covered roads.
Winter tires with the same speed rating as your
original equipment tires may not be available for H,
V, W, Y, and ZR speed rated tires. If you choose
winter tires with a lower speed rating, never
exceed the tire’s maximum speed capability.
393
(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination of
letters and numbers used to define a particular
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type,
and service description. See the “Tire Size”
illustration later in this section for more detail.
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is molded into its
sidewall. The examples below show a typical
passenger vehicle tire and a compact spare tire
sidewall.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have
a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all
federal safety guidelines.
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation): The
Department of Transportation (DOT) code
indicates that the tire is in compliance with the
U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards.
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following DOT (Department of
Transportation) code is the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer
and plant code, tire size, and date the tire
was manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both
sides of the tire, although only one side may have
the date of manufacture.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example
394
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under
the tread.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire
manufacturers are required to grade tires
based on three performance factors: treadwear,
traction, and temperature resistance. For more
page 414.
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load
Limit: Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that load.
Compact Spare Tire Example
(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact spare
tire or temporary use tire has a tread life of
approximately 3,000 miles (5 000 km) and should
not be driven at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h).
The compact spare tire is for emergency use when
a regular road tire has lost air and gone flat. If
your vehicle has a compact spare tire, see
Compact Spare Tire (CTS Only) on page 434
395
(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under
the tread.
(G) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have
a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all
federal safety guidelines.
(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following the DOT (Department of
Transportation) code is the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer
and plant code, tire size, and date the tire
was manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both
sides of the tire, although only one side may have
the date of manufacture.
Tire Size
The following illustration shows an example of a
typical passenger vehicle tire size.
(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load
Limit: Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that load.
(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire or
compact spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi
(420 kPa). For more information on tire pressure
page 402.
(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United
States version of a metric tire sizing system. The
letter P as the first character in the tire size
means a passenger vehicle tire engineered to
standards set by the U.S. Tire and Rim
Association.
(F) Tire Size: A combination of letters and
numbers define a tire’s width, height, aspect ratio,
construction type, and service description. The
letter T as the first character in the tire size means
the tire is for temporary use only.
396
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates
the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall
to sidewall.
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire
pressing outward on each square inch of the
tire. Air pressure is expressed in pounds
per square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that
indicates the tire height-to-width measurements.
For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is
60, as shown in item C of the illustration, it would
mean that the tire’s sidewall is 60 percent as
high as it is wide.
Accessory Weight: This means the combined
weight of optional accessories. Some examples
of optional accessories are, automatic
transmission/transaxle, power steering, power
brakes, power windows, power seats, and
air conditioning.
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire.
The letter R means radial ply construction;
the letter D means diagonal or bias ply
construction; and the letter B means belted-bias
ply construction.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height
to its width.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is
located between the plies and the tread. Cords
may be made from steel or other reinforcing
materials.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in
inches.
(F) Service Description: These characters
represent the load range and speed rating of the
tire. The load index represents the load carry
capacity a tire is certified to carry. The load index
can range from 1 to 279. The speed rating is
the maximum speed a tire is certified to carry a
load. Speed ratings range from A to Z.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped
by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies
are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees
to the centerline of the tread.
397
Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressure
in a tire, measured in pounds per square inch
(psi) or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up
heat from driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 402.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward
when mounted on a vehicle.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
light duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger
vehicles.
Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motor
vehicle with standard and optional equipment
including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and
coolant, but without passengers and cargo.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging
from 1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying
capacity of a tire.
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall
of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance
with the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)
motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT code
includes the Tire Identification Number (TIN),
an alphanumeric designator which can also identify
the tire manufacturer, production plant, brand,
and date of production.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air
pressure to which a cold tire may be inflated.
The maximum air pressure is molded onto
the sidewall.
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire
at the maximum permissible inflation pressure
for that tire.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. See
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of
curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacity
weight, and production options weight.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of
occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied
by 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 321.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the
398
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating
positions.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread
and the bead.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that
faces outward when mounted on a vehicle.
The side of the tire that contains a whitewall, bears
white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand,
and/or model name molding that is higher
or deeper than the same moldings on the other
sidewall of the tire.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned
to a tire indicating the maximum speed at
which a tire can operate.
Traction: The friction between the tire and the
road surface. The amount of grip provided.
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into
contact with the road.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
passenger cars and some light duty trucks and
multipurpose vehicles.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called wear bars, that show across the tread of
a tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread
page 411.
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation
pressure as shown on the tire placard. See
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards): A tire information system that
provides consumers with ratings for a tire’s
traction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings
are determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The ratings are
molded into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the
ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at
90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which
the tire beads are seated.
399
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of
designated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs
(68 kg) plus the rated cargo load. See Loading
{CAUTION:
When the low tire warning light is
displayed on the instrument panel cluster,
your vehicle’s handling capabilities will be
reduced during severe maneuvers. If you
drive too fast, you could lose control of
your vehicle. You or others could be
injured. Do not drive over 55 mph
(90 km/h) when the low tire warning light
is displayed. Drive cautiously and check
your tire pressures as soon as you can.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on
an individual tire due to curb weight, accessory
weight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to
a vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weight
and the original equipment tire size and
recommended inflation pressure. See “Tire and
Loading Information Label” under Loading
Run-Flat Tires (CTS-V)
If a tire goes flat, you will not need to stop on the
side of the road to change the tire. You can just
keep on driving. The tire can operate effectively
with no air pressure for up to 65 miles (105 km) at
speeds up to 55 mph (90 km/h). The shorter the
distance you drive and the slower the speed, the
greater the chance that the tire will not have to be
replaced. When a tire is filled with air, it provides a
cushion between the road and the wheel. Because
you will not have this cushion when driving on a
deflated run-flat tire, try to avoid potholes that could
damage your wheel and require replacement of it.
If your vehicle has run-flat tires, there is no spare
tire and no tire changing equipment. Your
vehicle also has a Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
which will alert you if there is a loss of tire pressure
in any of the tires. See Tire Pressure Monitor
400
Some road hazards can damage a tire beyond
repair. This damage could occur even before you
have driven on the tire in a deflated condition.
When a tire has been damaged, or if you
{CAUTION:
Run-flat tires are constructed differently
than other tires and could explode during
improper service. You or others could be
injured or killed if you attempt to repair,
replace, dismount, or mount a run-flat tire.
Let only an authorized run-flat service
center repair, replace, dismount, and
mount run-flat tires.
have driven any distance on a run-flat tire, check
with an authorized run-flat tire service center
to determine whether the tire can be repaired or
should be replaced. To maintain your vehicle’s
run-flat feature, all replacement tires must
be self-supporting tires. As soon as possible,
contact the nearest authorized GM or run-flat
servicing facility for inspection and repair or
replacement. To locate the nearest GM or run-flat
servicing facility, call Roadside Service. See
The valve stems on your run-flat tires have
sensors that are part of the Tire Pressure Monitor
System (TPMS). These sensors contain batteries
which are designed to last for 10 years under
normal driving conditions. See your dealer if you
ever need to have a wheel replaced, or if the
sensors ever need replacement.
Notice: Using liquid sealants can damage the
tire valves and tire pressure monitor sensors in
your vehicle’s run-flat tires. This damage would
not be covered by warranty. Do not use liquid
sealants in your vehicle’s run-flat tires.
401
A Tire and Loading Information label is attached to
the vehicle’s center pillar, below the driver’s door
latch. This label lists your vehicle’s original
equipment tires and shows the correct inflation
pressures for your tires when they are cold. The
recommended cold tire inflation pressure, shown on
the label, is the minimum amount of air pressure
needed to support your vehicle’s maximum load
carrying capacity.
Inflation - Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to
operate effectively.
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that
under-inflation or over-inflation is all right.
It is not. If your tires do not have enough air
(under-inflation), you can get the following:
• Too much flexing
• Too much heat
• Tire overloading
• Premature or irregular wear
• Poor handling
• Reduced fuel economy
For additional information regarding how much
weight your vehicle can carry, and an example
of the tire and loading information label, see
your vehicle affects vehicle handling and ride
comfort, never load your vehicle with more weight
than it was designed to carry.
If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),
you can get the following:
• Unusual wear
• Poor handling
• Rough ride
• Needless damage from road hazards
402
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.
Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to
get a pressure measurement. If the cold tire
inflation pressure matches the recommended
pressure on the Tire and Loading Information
label, no further adjustment is necessary. If the
inflation pressure is low, add air until you reach
the recommended amount.
When to Check
Check your tires once a month or more. Do not
forget to check the compact spare tire, if your
vehicle has one. The compact spare should be
at 60 psi (420 kPa). For additional information
regarding the compact spare tire, see Compact
How to Check
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on
the metal stem in the center of the tire valve.
Re-check the tire pressure with the tire gage.
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check
tire pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are
properly inflated simply by looking at them. Radial
tires may look properly inflated even when they
are underinflated. Check the tire’s inflation
pressure when the tires are cold. Cold means your
vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours
or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve
stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt
and moisture.
403
The CTS-V high-performance tires, size
245/45R18 96V and P245/45ZR18 96W require
inflation pressure adjustment when driving
your vehicle at speeds of 100 mph (160 km/h) or
higher. Set the cold tire inflation pressure to
the maximum inflation pressure shown on the tire
sidewall, or 41 psi (282 kPa), whichever is
lower. See the example following.
High-Speed Operation
{CAUTION:
Driving at high speeds, 100 mph
(160 km/h) or higher, puts an additional
strain on tires. Sustained high-speed
driving causes excessive heat build up
and can cause sudden tire failure. You
could have a crash and you or others
could be killed. Some high-speed rated
tires require inflation pressure adjustment
for high speed operation. When speed
limits and road conditions are such that
a vehicle can be driven at high speeds,
make sure the tires are rated for high
speed operation, in excellent condition,
and set to the correct cold tire inflation
pressure for the vehicle load.
Example:
You will find the maximum load and inflation
pressure molded on the tire’s sidewall, in small
letters, near the rim flange. It will read something
like this: Maximum load 710 kg (1565 lbs)
350 kPa (51 psi) Max. Press.
For this example, you would set the cold
inflation pressure for high-speed driving at
41 psi (282 kPa)
When you end high-speed driving, return the tires
to the cold inflation pressures shown on the
tire and loading information label. See Loading
404
The high-performance tires, size P225/55R16,
P225/50R17 or P2225/50R18 require inflation
pressure adjustment when driving your vehicle at
speeds of 100 mph (160 km/h) or higher. Set
the cold tire inflation pressure to the maximum
inflation pressure shown on the tire sidewall,
or 38 psi (262 kPa), whichever is lower. See the
example following.
Tire Pressure Monitor System
Your vehicle may have a Tire Pressure Monitor
System (TPMS). This system uses radio and
sensor technology to check tire pressure levels.
If your vehicle has this feature, sensors are
mounted on each the tire and wheel assembly,
except for the spare tire. The TPMS sensors
monitor the air pressure in the vehicle’s tires and
transmits the tire pressure readings to a receiver
located in the vehicle.
Example:
You will find the maximum load and inflation
pressure molded on the tire’s sidewall, in small
letters, near the rim flange. It will read something
like this: Maximum load 710 kg (1565 lbs)
350 kPa (51 psi) Max. Press.
If your vehicle has the base audio system, the
Driver Information Center (DIC) displays TPMS
warnings and messages on the radio’s display
additional information and details about the DIC
operation and displays. If your vehicle has
the Navigation system, TPMS warnings and
messages are displayed on the message center
screen, located inside the tachometer. See
information about the message center operation
and displays.
For this example, you would set the cold
inflation pressure for high-speed driving at
38 psi (262 kPa)
When you end high-speed driving, return the tires
to the cold inflation pressures shown on the
tire and loading information label. See Loading
405
If a low tire pressure condition is detected, the
TPMS will display the Check Tire Pressure
message on the DIC or message center and, at
the same time, illuminate the low tire pressure
warning symbol on the instrument panel cluster.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check your tires
as soon as possible, and inflate them to the
proper pressure. Driving on a significantly
under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and
can lead to the tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should
be checked monthly when cold and inflated to
the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle
manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires
of a different size than the size indicated on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label,
you should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute
for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
even if under-inflation has not reached the level to
trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure
telltale.
The Tire and Loading Information label shows the
size of your vehicle’s original tires and their
recommended cold inflation pressures. See
of the tire and loading information label. Also
As an added safety
feature, your vehicle
has been equipped
with a tire pressure
monitoring system
(TPMS) that illuminates
a low tire pressure
telltale when one or
more of your tires
is significantly
The tire pressure warning light may come on in
cool weather when the vehicle is first started, and
then turn off as you start to drive. This could
be an early indicator that the tire pressures are
getting low and need to be inflated to the
proper pressure.
under-inflated.
406
Your vehicle’s TPMS can alert you about a low
tire pressure condition but it does not replace
normal tire maintenance. See Tire Inspection and
You will have two minutes to match the first tire
and wheel position, and five minutes overall
to match all four tire and wheel positions. If it takes
longer than two minutes, to match the first tire
and wheel, or more than five minutes to match
all four tire and wheel positions the matching
process stops and you will need to start over.
Notice: Do not use a tire sealant if your
vehicle has Tire Pressure Monitors. The liquid
sealant can damage the tire pressure monitor
sensors.
The TPM matching process is outlined below:
1. Set the parking brake.
Resetting the TPMS Identification
Codes
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON with the
engine off.
Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification
code. Any time you replace one or more of the
TPMS sensors or rotate the tires, the identification
codes will need to be matched to the new tire and
wheel position. The sensors are matched to the tire
and wheel positions in the following order: driver’s
side front tire, passenger’s side front tire,
passenger’s side rear tire, and driver’s side rear tire
using a TPMS diagnostic tool. See your GM dealer
for service.
3. Using the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter, lock and unlock the vehicle’s
doors.
4. Press the lock and unlock buttons, at the same
time, on the RKE transmitter. A single horn
chirp will sound, indicating that the TPMS
system is ready, and the sensor matching
process can begin.
5. Start with the driver’s side front tire.
The TPMS sensors may also be matched to each
tire and wheel position by increasing or decreasing
the tire’s air pressure. When increasing tire
pressure do not exceed the maximum inflation
pressure indicated on the tire’s sidewall.
407
6. Remove the valve cap from the valve stem.
Activate the TPMS sensor by increasing
or decreasing the tire’s air pressure for
five seconds, or until a horn chirp sounds. The
horn chirp, which may take up to 30 seconds,
confirms that the sensor identification code has
been matched to this tire position. To decrease
the tire’s air-pressure use the pointed end of
the valve cap, a pencil-style air pressure gage,
or a key.
The TPMS will not function properly, if one or
more of the TPMS sensors are missing or
inoperable. If your vehicle has a compact spare
tire, the spare tire and wheel assembly does
not contain a TPMS sensor. If you replace one of
the road tires with the spare, or if the system
detects a missing or inoperable sensor, the
Service Tire Monitor System message will be
displayed on the DIC. If you have replaced a tire
and wheel assembly without transferring the
TPMS sensors, the error message will be
displayed. Once you re-install the TPMS sensors,
the message should go off. See your GM
7. Proceed to the passenger’s side front tire, and
repeat the procedure in Step 6.
8. Proceed to the passenger’s side rear tire, and
repeat the procedure in Step 6.
dealer for service if all TPMS sensors are installed
and the error message comes on and stays on.
Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible.
9. Proceed to the driver’s side rear tire, and
repeat the procedure in Step 6.
If your vehicle has a message center and the
system detects a missing or inoperable sensor an
error message of several dashes – – – will be
shown on the message center display. If you have
replaced a tire and wheel assembly without
transferring the TPMS sensors, the error message
will be displayed. Once you re-install the TPMS
sensors, the error message should go off.
See your GM dealer for service if all TPMS
sensors are installed and the error message
comes on and stays on.
10. After hearing the confirming double horn
chirp, for the left rear tire, exit the matching
process by turning the ignition switch to OFF.
11. Set all four tires to the recommended
air pressure level as indicated on the tire
and loading information label.
12. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
408
Federal Communications Commission
(FCC) and Industry and Science
Canada
Tire Inspection and Rotation
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km).
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
If your vehicle has P245/45ZR18 96W size tires,
GM recommends rotating these tires at 3,000 mile
(4 800 km) intervals. These tires are optimized
for dry traction and handling performance. Tread
life may be 15,000 miles (24 140 km) or less
for these tires, depending on how and where
you drive.
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your
vehicle’s tires as soon as possible and check
wheel alignment. Also check for damaged tires or
more information.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more
uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The
first rotation is the most important. See Scheduled
Changes or modifications to this system by other
than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
409
Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly
tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” under
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel
could come off and cause an accident.
When you change a wheel, remove any
rust or dirt from places where the wheel
attaches to the vehicle. In an emergency,
you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do
this; but be sure to use a scraper or wire
brush later, if needed, to get all the rust
or dirt off. See Changing a Flat Tire
When rotating your vehicle’s tires, always use the
correct rotation pattern shown here.
If your vehicle has a compact spare tire, do not
include it in the tire rotation.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front
and rear inflation pressures as shown on the
Tire and Loading Information label. See Loading
the tire and loading information label and
its location on your vehicle.
If your vehicle has the Tire Pressure Monitor
System (TPMS) the TPMS sensors will need to be
reset and matched to the tire/wheel position. A
special TPMS diagnostic tool is used to reset the
sensor identification codes. See your dealer
for service.
410
• The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage
that cannot be repaired well because of the
size or location of the damage.
When It Is Time for New Tires
One way to tell when it
is time for new tires is
to check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires
have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of tread
remaining.
Buying New Tires
GM has developed and matched specific tires
for your vehicle. The original equipment tires
installed on your vehicle, when it was new,
were designed to meet General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec)
system rating. If you need replacement tires, GM
strongly recommends that you get tires with
the same TPC Spec rating. This way, your vehicle
will continue to have tires that are designed to
give the same performance and vehicle safety,
during normal use, as the original tires.
You need a new tire if any of the following
statements are true:
GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers over
a dozen critical specifications that impact the
overall performance of your vehicle, including
brake system performance, ride and handling,
traction control, and tire pressure monitoring
performance. GM’s TPC Spec number is molded
onto the tire’s sidewall by the tire manufacturer.
If the tires have an all-season tread design,
the TPC Spec number will be followed by a MS
page 394 for additional information.
• You can see the indicators at three or more
places around the tire.
• You can see cord or fabric showing through
the tire’s rubber.
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or
snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric.
• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.
411
The 18-inch performance tires, size
245/45R18 96V, used on some vehicles, meet
the General Motors Tire Performance Criteria
Specification (TPC Spec) rating but the TPC Spec
code has not been molded onto the tire’s
sidewall. If your vehicle has these tires, and you
need to replace them, you can still get these TPC
Spec rated tires by asking your GM dealer.
Your GM dealer can order these tires by part
number. This way, your vehicle will continue to
give the proper endurance, handling, traction, and
ride as the original tires.
{CAUTION:
Mixing tires could cause you to lose
control of your vehicle while driving. If
you mix tires of different sizes, brands,
or types (radial and bias-belted tires) the
vehicle may not handle properly, and
you could have a crash. Using tires of
different sizes, brands, or types may also
cause damage to your vehicle. Be sure to
use the correct size, brand, and type of
tires on all wheels.
Winter tires with the same speed rating as your
vehicle’s original equipment tires may not be
available for H, V, W, and ZR speed rated tires.
If you choose snow tires with a lower speed rating,
never exceed the tire’s maximum speed capability.
Your vehicle may have a compact spare
tire and wheel assembly. It is all right to
drive with your vehicle’s compact spare
tire temporarily. It was developed for use
on your vehicle. See Compact Spare Tire
412
Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoring
system may give an inaccurate low-pressure
warning if non-TPC Spec rated tires are installed
on your vehicle. Non-TPC Spec rated tires
may give a low-pressure warning that is higher or
lower than the proper warning level you would
get with TPC Spec rated tires. See Tire Pressure
{CAUTION:
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle,
the wheel rim flanges could develop
cracks after many miles of driving. A tire
and/or wheel could fail suddenly, causing
a crash. Use only radial-ply tires with the
wheels on your vehicle.
Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed
on the Tire and Loading Information Label.
This label is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar
for more information about the Tire and Loading
Information Label and its location on your vehicle.
If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with those
that do not have a TPC Spec number, make
sure they are the same size, load range, speed
rating, and construction type (radial and
bias-belted tires) as your vehicle’s original tires.
413
additional information.
Different Size Tires and Wheels
If you add wheels or tires that are a different size
than your original equipment wheels and tires,
this may affect the way your vehicle performs,
including its braking, ride and handling
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
characteristics, stability, and resistance to rollover.
Additionally, if your vehicle has electronic
systems such as, anti-lock brakes, traction control,
and electronic stability control, the performance
of these systems can be affected.
Quality grades can be found where applicable on
the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), which
grades tires by treadwear, traction, and
{CAUTION:
temperature performance. This applies only to
vehicles sold in the United States. The grades are
molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car
tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver, or temporary use
spare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of
10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some
limited-production tires.
If you add different sized wheels, your
vehicle may not provide an acceptable
level of performance and safety if tires
not recommended for those wheels are
selected. You may increase the chance
that you will crash and suffer serious
injury. Only use GM specific wheel and
tire systems developed for your vehicle,
and have them properly installed by a GM
certified technician.
414
While the tires available on General Motors
passenger cars and light trucks may vary with
respect to these grades, they must also conform
to federal safety requirements and additional
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC)
standards.
Traction – AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the
tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.
A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and a half (1.5) times
as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from
the norm due to variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road characteristics
and climate.
Warning: The traction grade assigned to this
tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
415
Temperature – A, B, C
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
and C, representing the tire’s resistance to
the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under
the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels
of performance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.
The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned
and balanced carefully at the factory to give you
the longest tire life and best overall performance.
Adjustments to wheel alignment and tire
balancing will not be necessary on a regular basis.
However, if you notice unusual tire wear or your
vehicle pulling to one side or the other, the
alignment may need to be checked. If you notice
your vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth
road, your tires and wheels may need to be
rebalanced. See your dealer for proper diagnosis.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly
rusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming
loose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel
nuts should be replaced. If the wheel leaks air,
replace it (except some aluminum wheels,
which can sometimes be repaired). See your
dealer if any of these conditions exist.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated
and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.
Each new wheel should have the same
load-carrying capacity, diameter, width, offset and
be mounted the same way as the one it replaces.
416
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel
bolts, or wheel nuts, replace them only with
new GM original equipment parts. This way,
you will be sure to have the right wheel, wheel
bolts, and wheel nuts for your vehicle.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause
problems with bearing life, brake cooling,
speedometer or odometer calibration,
headlamp aim, bumper height, vehicle ground
clearance, and tire or tire chain clearance
to the body and chassis.
for more information.
{CAUTION:
Used Replacement Wheels
Using the wrong replacement wheels,
wheel bolts, or wheel nuts on your vehicle
can be dangerous. It could affect the
braking and handling of your vehicle,
make your tires lose air and make you
lose control. You could have a collision in
which you or others could be injured.
Always use the correct wheel, wheel bolts,
and wheel nuts for replacement.
{CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You cannot know how it has
been used or how far it has been driven. It
could fail suddenly and cause a crash. If
you have to replace a wheel, use a new
GM original equipment wheel.
417
Tire Chains
Lifting Your Vehicle (CTS-V)
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Do not use tire chains. There is not
enough clearance. Tire chains used on a
vehicle without the proper amount of
clearance can cause damage to the
brakes, suspension, or other vehicle
parts. The area damaged by the tire
chains could cause you to lose control of
your vehicle and you or others may be
injured in a crash. Use another type of
traction device only if its manufacturer
recommends it for use on your vehicle
and tire size combination and road
conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s
instructions. To help avoid damage to
your vehicle, drive slowly, re-adjust or
remove the device if it is contacting your
vehicle, and do not spin your wheels. If
you do find traction devices that will fit,
install them on the rear tires.
Lifting a vehicle can cause an injury. The
vehicle can slip off the jack and roll over
you or other people. You and they could
be badly injured. Find a level place to lift
your vehicle. To help prevent the vehicle
from moving:
1. Place the shift lever in REVERSE (R)
and firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Turn off the engine.
To be even more certain the vehicle will
not move, you can put blocks in front of
and behind the wheels. Also see Parking
for additional information.
418
Notice: Lifting your vehicle improperly can
damage your vehicle and result in costly repairs
not covered by your warranty. To lift your
vehicle properly, follow the advice in this part.
{CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked
up is dangerous. If the vehicle slips off
the jack, you could be badly injured or
killed. Never get under a vehicle when it is
supported only by a jack.
To help prevent vehicle damage:
• Be sure the jack you are using meets the
weight standards for your vehicle and is
in good working order.
• Be sure to place a block or pad between
the jack and the vehicle.
• Make sure the jack you are using only
contacts the jacking location lift points
and is not leaning on any other vehicle
components such as the rocker panels, the
floor pan, or the stone guard moldings.
{CAUTION:
Raising your vehicle with the jack
improperly positioned can damage the
vehicle and even make the vehicle fall. To
help avoid personal injury and vehicle
damage, be sure to place the jack in the
proper location before raising the vehicle.
• Lift only in the areas shown in the following
pictures.
If you ever use a jack to lift your vehicle, follow
the instructions that came with the jack, and
be sure to use the correct lifting points to avoid
damaging your vehicle.
419
1. Locate the front lifting points using the
diagram shown above and corresponding
triangular-shaped hoisting notches located in
the plastic molding. The front lifting location
is about 14 inches (35.6 cm) from the
rear edge of the front wheel well.
Lifting From the Front
The front lifting points can be accessed from
either side of your vehicle, behind the front tires.
2. Be sure to place a block or pad between the
jack and the vehicle.
3. Lift the vehicle with the jack, making sure the
jack is centered on the front lifting point.
420
1. Locate the rear lifting points using the
diagram shown above and corresponding
triangular-shaped hoisting notches located in
the plastic molding. The rear lifting location
is about 7 inches (17.8 cm) from the
front edge of the rear wheel well.
Lifting From the Rear
The rear lifting points can be accessed from either
side of your vehicle, in front of the rear tires.
2. Be sure to place a block or pad between the
jack and the vehicle.
3. Lift the vehicle with the jack, making sure the
jack is centered on the rear lifting point.
for additional information.
421
If a tire goes flat, and your vehicle has a spare
page 424. This information shows you how to
use your vehicle’s tire changing equipment
and how to change a flat tire safely.
If a Tire Goes Flat
It is unusual for a tire to “blowout” while you are
driving, especially if you maintain your tires
a tire, it is much more likely to leak out slowly.
But if you should ever have a “blowout”,
here are a few tips about what to expect and
what to do:
{CAUTION:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag
that pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take
your foot off the accelerator pedal and grip the
steering wheel firmly. Steer to maintain lane
position, and then gently brake to a stop well out
of the traffic lane.
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous
without the appropriate safety equipment
and training. The jack provided with your
vehicle is designed only for changing a
flat tire. If it is used for anything else, you
or others could be badly injured or killed
if the vehicle slips off the jack. Use the
jack provided with your vehicle only for
changing a flat tire.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much
like a skid and may require the same correction
you’d use in a skid. In any rear blowout, remove
your foot from the accelerator pedal. Get the
vehicle under control by steering the way you want
the vehicle to go. It may be very bumpy and
noisy, but you can still steer. Gently brake to a
stop — well off the road if possible.
Run-Flat Tires (CTS-V)
If your vehicle has run-flat tires, there is no spare
tire and no tire changing equipment. Run-flat
tires can operate effectively with no air pressure
for a limited distance and speed.
422
Your vehicle also has a Tire Pressure Monitor
(TPM) which will alert you if there is a loss of tire
pressure in any of the tires. These tires perform
so well without any air pressure that a Tire
Pressure Monitor (TPM) is used to alert you when
there is a low tire condition.
{CAUTION:
Special tools and procedures are required
to service a run-flat tire. If these special
tools and procedures are not used you or
others could be injured and your vehicle
could be damaged. Always be sure the
proper tools and procedures, as described
in the service manual, are used.
{CAUTION:
When the low tire warning light is
displayed on the instrument panel cluster,
your vehicle’s handling capabilities will be
reduced during severe maneuvers. If you
drive too fast, you could lose control of
your vehicle. You or others could be
injured. Do not drive over 55 mph
To order a service manual see Service
(90 km/h) when the low tire warning light
is displayed. Drive cautiously and check
your tire pressures as soon as you can.
for additional information.
423
Changing a Flat Tire (CTS Only)
CAUTION: (Continued)
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel
damage by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on
your hazard warning flashers.
3. Turn off the engine and do not restart
while the vehicle is raised.
4. Do not allow passengers to remain in
the vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Put the wheel blocks at the front and rear
of the tire farthest away from the one
being changed. That would be the tire on
the other side, at the opposite end of the
vehicle.
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The
vehicle can slip off the jack and roll over
or fall on you or other people. You and
they could be badly injured or even killed.
Find a level place to change your tire. To
help prevent the vehicle from moving:
When you have a flat tire, use the following
example as a guide to assist you in the placement
of wheel blocks.
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put an automatic transmission shift
lever in PARK (P), or shift a manual
transmission to FIRST (1) or
REVERSE (R).
CAUTION: (Continued)
424
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
(CTS Only)
The equipment you will need is in the trunk.
To gain access to the spare tire and jacking
equipment, do the following:
1. Turn the center nut
on the compact
spare tire cover
counterclockwise to
remove it. Then
remove the cover.
The following information will tell you next how to
use the jack and change a tire.
425
4. The tools you will be using next include the
jack (A) and the wheel wrench (B).
2. Turn the nut holding the jack counterclockwise
and remove it. Then remove the jack and
wheel wrench.
information about the compact spare tire.
426
{CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked
up is dangerous. If the vehicle slips off
the jack you could be badly injured or
killed. Never get under a vehicle when it
is supported only by a jack.
{CAUTION:
2. Find the jacking location using the diagram
above and corresponding triangular-shaped
hoisting notches located in the plastic molding.
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to
do maintenance or repairs is dangerous
without the appropriate safety equipment
and training. The jack provided with your
vehicle is designed only for changing a
flat tire. If it is used for anything else, you
or others could be badly injured or killed
if the vehicle slips off the jack. Use the
jack provided with your vehicle only for
changing a flat tire.
The front location (A) is about 14 inches
(35.6 cm) from the rear edge of the front
wheel well, and the rear location (B) is about
7 inches (17.8 cm) from the front edge of
the rear wheel well.
3. Attach the wheel wrench to the jack.
428
{CAUTION:
Raising your vehicle with the jack
improperly positioned can damage the
vehicle and even make the vehicle fall. To
help avoid personal injury and vehicle
damage, be sure to fit the jack lift head
into the proper location before raising the
vehicle.
Notice: If you position the jack under the
rocker molding and attempt to raise the
vehicle, you could break the molding and/or
cause other damage to your vehicle. Always
position the jack so that when the jack head is
raised, it will fit firmly in the notch located
inboard from the rocker molding.
5. Raise the jack by turning the wheel wrench
clockwise until the slots in the jack head fit
into the metal flange located behind the
triangle on the plastic molding as shown.
6. Put the compact spare tire near you.
4. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to
lower the jack lift head until the jack fits
under the vehicle.
429
8. Remove all the
wheel nuts and take
off the flat tire.
7. Raise the vehicle by turning the wheel wrench
clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off
the ground for the compact spare tire to
fit under the vehicle.
430
9. Remove any rust or
dirt from the wheel
bolts, mounting
surfaces, and spare
wheel.
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts
to which it is fastened, can make the
wheel nuts become loose after a time.
The wheel could come off and cause an
accident. When you change a wheel,
remove any rust or dirt from the places
where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In
an emergency, you can use a cloth or a
paper towel to do this; but be sure to use
a scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to
get all the rust or dirt off.
10. Install the spare tire.
11. Put the wheel nuts back on with the rounded
end of the nuts toward the wheel.
12. Tighten each wheel nut by turning it clockwise
with your hand until the wheel is held against
the hub.
{CAUTION:
Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts.
If you do, the nuts might come loose.
Your wheel could fall off, causing a
serious accident.
431
{CAUTION:
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly
tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel
to come loose and even come off. This
could lead to an accident. Be sure to use
the correct wheel nuts. If you have to
replace them, be sure to get new GM
original equipment wheel nuts. Stop
somewhere as soon as you can and have
the nuts tightened with a torque wrench
to the proper torque specification. See
Capacities and Specifications on page 457
for wheel nut torque specification.
13. Lower the vehicle by turning the wheel
wrench counterclockwise. Lower the jack
completely.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can
lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage.
To avoid expensive brake repairs, evenly
tighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequence
and to the proper torque specification. See
the wheel nut torque specification.
432
14. Tighten the wheel
nuts firmly in a
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and
Tools (CTS Only)
crisscross sequence
as shown.
{CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment
in the passenger compartment of the
vehicle could cause injury. In a sudden
stop or collision, loose equipment could
strike someone. Store all these in the
proper place.
Notice: Wheel covers will not fit on your
compact spare. If you try to put a wheel cover
on the compact spare, you could damage
the cover or the spare.
After you have put the compact spare tire on your
vehicle, you will need to store the flat tire in
your trunk.
Do not try to put a wheel cover on your compact
spare tire. It will note fit. Store the wheel cover
in the trunk until you have the flat tire repaired or
replaced.
Remove the foam support so that the flat tire will
fit in the storage area. Place the flat tire with
the appearance-side face down and store the
jack container in the center of the tire. See
the diagram for more information.
The compact spare is for temporary use only.
Replace the compact spare tire with a full-size tire
as soon as you can.
433
Use the following diagram as a guide for storing
the compact spare tire in the trunk:
Compact Spare Tire (CTS Only)
Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated
when the vehicle was new, it can lose air after
a time. Check the inflation pressure regularly. It
should be 60 psi (420 kPa).
After installing the compact spare on the vehicle,
stop as soon as possible and make sure the
spare tire is correctly inflated. The compact spare
is made to perform well at speeds up to 65 mph
(105 km/h) for distances up to 3,000 miles
(5 000 km), so you can finish your trip and have
the full-size tire repaired or replaced at your
convenience. Of course, it is best to replace the
spare with a full-size tire as soon as possible. The
spare tire will last longer and be in good shape
in case it is needed again.
A. Compact Spare
Tire Cover
Wing Nut
B. Compact Spare
Tire Cover
C. Plastic Wing Nut
D. Retainer
E. Jack Container
with Wheel
F. Flat Road Tire
G. Compact
Spare Tire
H. Foam Insert
I. Bolt
J. Wheel Wrench
K. Jack
L. Jack Container
Notice: When the compact spare is installed,
do not take your vehicle through an automatic
car wash with guide rails. The compact
spare can get caught on the rails. That can
damage the tire and wheel, and maybe
other parts of your vehicle.
Do not use the compact spare on other vehicles.
Wrench and Jack
434
And do not mix the compact spare tire or wheel
with other wheels or tires. They will not fit.
Keep the spare tire and its wheel together.
Lighter colored interiors may require more
frequent cleaning. Use care because newspapers
and garments that transfer color to your home
furnishings may also transfer color to your
vehicle’s interior.
Notice: Tire chains will not fit your compact
spare. Using them can damage your vehicle
and can damage the chains too. Do not use tire
chains on your compact spare.
When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only use
cleaners specifically designed for the surfaces
being cleaned. Permanent damage may result
from using cleaners on surfaces for which
they were not intended. Use glass cleaner only on
glass. Remove any accidental over-spray from
other surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray,
apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.
Appearance Care
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
Your vehicle’s interior will continue to look its
best if it is cleaned often. Although not always
visible, dust and dirt can accumulate on your
upholstery. Dirt can damage carpet, fabric, leather,
and plastic surfaces. Regular vacuuming is
recommended to remove particles from your
upholstery. It is important to keep your upholstery
from becoming and remaining heavily soiled.
Soils should be removed as quickly as possible.
Your vehicle’s interior may experience extremes of
heat that could cause stains to set rapidly.
Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when
cleaning glass surfaces on your vehicle, you
could scratch the glass and/or cause damage
to the integrated radio antenna and the
rear window defogger. When cleaning the
glass on your vehicle, use only a soft cloth and
glass cleaner.
435
Many cleaners contain solvents that may become
concentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space.
Before using cleaners, read and adhere to
all safety instructions on the label. While cleaning
your vehicle’s interior, maintain adequate
ventilation by opening your vehicle’s doors and
windows.
• Never apply heavy pressure or rub
aggressively with a cleaning cloth. Use of
heavy pressure can damage your interior and
does not improve the effectiveness of soil
removal.
• Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Avoid
laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps with
degreasers. Using too much soap will leave a
residue that leaves streaks and attracts dirt.
For liquid cleaners, about 20 drops per gallon
(3.78 L) of water is a good guide.
Dust may be removed from small buttons and
knobs using a small brush with soft bristles.
Your GM dealer has a product for cleaning your
vehicle’s glass. Should it become necessary,
you can also obtain a product from your GM dealer
to remove odors from your vehicle’s upholstery.
• Do not heavily saturate your upholstery while
cleaning.
• Damage to your vehicle’s interior may result
from the use of many organic solvents such as
naptha, alcohol, etc.
Do not clean your vehicle using the following
cleaners or techniques:
• Never use a knife or any other sharp object to
remove a soil from any interior surface.
• Never use a stiff brush. It can cause damage
to your vehicle’s interior surfaces.
436
To clean, use the following instructions:
Fabric/Carpet
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with
water or club soda.
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush
attachment frequently to remove dust and loose
dirt. A canister vacuum with a beater bar in
the nozzle may only be used on floor carpet and
carpeted floor mats. For soils, always try to remove
them first with plain water or club soda. Before
cleaning, gently remove as much of the soil
as possible using one of the following techniques:
2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.
3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently
rub toward the center. Continue cleaning,
using a clean area of the cloth each time it
becomes soiled.
4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the
cleaning cloth remains clean.
• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil
with a paper towel. Allow the soil to absorb
into the paper towel until no more can
be removed.
5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a
mild soap solution and repeat the cleaning
process that was used with plain water.
• For solid dry soils: remove as much as
possible and then vacuum.
If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric
cleaner or spot lifter may be necessary. When a
commercial upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be
used, test a small hidden area for colorfastness
first. If the locally cleaned area gives any
impression that a ring formation may result, clean
the entire surface.
After the cleaning process has been completed, a
paper towel can be used to blot excess moisture
from the fabric or carpet.
437
Leather
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is
necessary, a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap
solution can be used. Allow the leather to dry
naturally. Do not use heat to dry. Never use steam
to clean leather. Never use spot lifters or spot
removers on leather. Many commercial leather
cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve
and protect leather may permanently change
the appearance and feel of your leather and are
not recommended. Do not use silicone or
wax-based products, or those containing organic
solvents to clean your vehicle’s interior because
they can alter the appearance by increasing
the gloss in a non-uniform manner. Never use
shoe polish on your leather.
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is
necessary, a clean soft cloth dampened with a
mild soap solution can be used to gently remove
dust and dirt. Never use spot lifters or removers
on plastic surfaces. Many commercial cleaners and
coatings that are sold to preserve and protect
soft plastic surfaces may permanently change the
appearance and feel of your interior and are
not recommended. Do not use silicone or
wax-based products, or those containing organic
solvents to clean your vehicle’s interior because
they can alter the appearance by increasing
the gloss in a non-uniform manner.
Some commercial products may increase gloss on
your instrument panel. The increase in gloss
may cause annoying reflections in the windshield
and even make it difficult to see through the
windshield under certain conditions.
438
Wood Panels
Weatherstrips
Use a clean cloth moistened in warm, soapy water
(use mild dish washing soap). Dry the wood
immediately with a clean cloth.
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them
last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.
Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth. During
very cold, damp weather frequent application
may be required. See Recommended Fluids and
Speaker Covers
Vacuum around a speaker cover gently, so that
the speaker will not be damaged. Clean spots with
just water and mild soap.
Washing Your Vehicle
The paint finish on the vehicle provides beauty,
depth of color, gloss retention, and durability.
Care of Safety Belts
The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is to
keep it clean by washing it often with lukewarm
or cold water.
Keep belts clean and dry.
Do not wash the vehicle in the direct rays of
{CAUTION:
the sun. Use a car washing soap. Do not use strong
soaps or chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the
vehicle well, removing all soap residue completely.
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you
do, it may severely weaken them. In a
crash, they might not be able to provide
adequate protection. Clean safety belts
only with mild soap and lukewarm water.
439
GM-approved cleaning products can be obtained
from your dealer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance
that are petroleum based, or that contain acid or
abrasives. All cleaning agents should be flushed
promptly and not allowed to dry on the surface, or
they could stain. Dry the finish with a soft, clean
chamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid surface
scratches and water spotting.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint
finish may damage it. Use only non-abrasive
waxes and polishes that are made for a
basecoat/clearcoat paint finish on your vehicle.
The vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint
finish. The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss
to the colored basecoat. Always use waxes
and polishes that are non-abrasive and made
for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish.
High pressure car washes may cause water to
enter the vehicle.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and
other salts, ice melting agents, road oil and
tar, tree sap, bird droppings, chemicals from
industrial chimneys, etc., can damage the vehicle’s
finish if they remain on painted surfaces. Wash
the vehicle as soon as possible. If necessary, use
non-abrasive cleaners that are marked safe for
painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and
a car washing soap to clean exterior lamps
and lenses. Follow instructions under Washing
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging,
weather, and chemical fallout that can take their
toll over a period of years. To help keep the
paint finish looking new, keep the vehicle in a
garage or covered whenever possible.
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicle
by hand may be necessary to remove residue
from the paint finish. GM-approved cleaning
products can be obtained from your dealer. See
440
Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,
abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, or
cleaners that contain acid on aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels, you could damage the
surface of the wheel(s). The repairs would
not be covered by your warranty. Use
only GM-approved cleaners on aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels.
Windshield and Wiper Blades
If the windshield is not clear after using the
windshield washer, or if the wiper blade chatters
when running, wax, sap, or other material may
be on the blade or windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a glass
cleaning liquid or powder and water solution.
The windshield is clean if beads do not form when
it is rinsed with water.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the
painted surface of your vehicle. Do not use strong
soaps, chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive
cleaners, cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning
brushes on them because you could damage
the surface. Do not use chrome polish on
aluminum wheels.
Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper
blades and affect their performance. Clean
the blade by wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked
in full-strength windshield washer solvent. Then
rinse the blade with water.
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum
wheels could damage the wheels. The repairs
would not be covered by your warranty.
Use chrome polish on chrome wheels only.
Check the wiper blades and clean them as
necessary; replace blades that look worn.
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels
Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels,
but avoid any painted surface of the wheel, and
buff off immediately after application.
Your vehicle may have either aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth
with mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water.
After rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean
towel. A wax may then be applied.
441
Notice: If you drive your vehicle through an
automatic car wash that has silicone carbide
tire cleaning brushes, you could damage
the aluminum or chrome-plated wheels.
The repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Never drive a vehicle equipped with
aluminum or chrome-plated wheels through
an automatic car wash that uses silicone
carbide tire cleaning brushes.
Sheet Metal Damage
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet
metal repair or replacement, make sure the body
repair shop applies anti-corrosion material to
parts repaired or replaced to restore corrosion
protection.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will
provide the corrosion protection while maintaining
the warranty.
Do not take your vehicle through an automatic
car wash that has silicone carbide tire cleaning
brushes. These brushes can also damage
the surface of these wheels.
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in
the finish should be repaired right away. Bare
metal will corrode quickly and may develop into
major repair expense.
Tires
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire
cleaner.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with
touch-up materials available from your GM dealer.
Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected
in your GM dealer’s body and paint shop.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on your vehicle may damage the
paint finish and/or tires. When applying a tire
dressing, always wipe off any overspray
from all painted surfaces on your vehicle.
442
Underbody Maintenance
Chemical Paint Spotting
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and
dust control can collect on the underbody. If these
are not removed, corrosion and rust can develop
on the underbody parts such as fuel lines,
frame, floor pan, and exhaust system even though
they have corrosion protection.
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can
create a chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can
fall upon and attack painted surfaces on the
vehicle. This damage can take two forms: blotchy,
ring-shaped discolorations, and small, irregular
dark spots etched into the paint surface.
At least every spring, flush these materials from
the underbody with plain water. Clean any
areas where mud and debris can collect. Dirt
packed in close areas of the frame should
be loosened before being flushed. Your dealer or
an underbody car washing system can do this
for you.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GM
will repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces
of new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition
within 12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of
purchase, whichever occurs first.
443
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
Description
Usage
Removes swirl marks, fine
scratches, and other light
surface contamination.
Removes light scratches
and protects finish.
Cleans, shines, and
protects in one step. No
wiping necessary.
Description
Usage
Swirl Remover Polish
Polishing Cloth
Wax-Treated
Interior and exterior
polishing cloth.
Cleaner Wax
Tar and Road Oil
Remover
Removes tar, road oil,
and asphalt.
Foaming Tire Shine
Low Gloss
Chrome Cleaner and
Polish
Use on chrome or
stainless steel.
White Sidewall Tire
Cleaner
Vinyl Cleaner
Removes soil and black
marks from whitewalls.
Cleans vinyl.
Removes dirt, grime,
smoke and fingerprints.
Removes dirt and grime
from chrome wheels and
wire wheel covers.
Medium foaming
shampoo. Cleans and
lightly waxes.
Wash Wax Concentrate
Biodegradable and
phosphate free.
Glass Cleaner
Quickly removes spots
and stains from carpets,
vinyl, and cloth
Chrome and Wire Wheel
Cleaner
Spot Lifter
upholstery.
Removes dust,
Odorless spray odor
eliminator used on fabrics,
vinyl, leather and carpet.
fingerprints, and surface
contaminants. Spray on
and wipe off.
Finish Enhancer
Odor Eliminator
444
Engine Identification
Vehicle Identification
The eighth character in the VIN is the engine
code. This code will help you identify your vehicle’s
engine, specifications, and replacement parts.
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Service Parts Identification Label
You will find this label on your spare tire cover.
It is very helpful if you ever need to order parts.
On this label, you will find the following:
• VIN
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It
appears on a plate in the front corner of the
instrument panel, on the driver’s side. You can see
it if you look through the windshield from outside
your vehicle. The VIN also appears on the Vehicle
Certification and Service Parts labels and the
certificates of title and registration.
• Model designation
• Paint information
• Production options and special equipment
Do not remove this label from the vehicle.
445
Windshield Wiper Fuses
Electrical System
The windshield wiper motor is protected by an
internal circuit breaker. If the wiper motor
overheats due to heavy snow, the wipers will stop
until the motor cools and will then restart.
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Notice: Do not add anything electrical to your
vehicle unless you check with your dealer
first. Some electrical equipment can damage
your vehicle and the damage would not
be covered by your warranty. Some add-on
electrical equipment can keep other
Power Windows and Other Power
Options
Circuit breakers protect the power windows and
power seats. When the current load is too
heavy, the circuit breaker opens and closes,
protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed or
goes away.
components from working as they should.
Add-on equipment can drain your vehicle’s battery,
even if your vehicle is not operating.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before
attempting to add anything electrical to your
vehicle, see Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
446
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
Underhood Fuse Block
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected
from short circuits by a combination of fuses
and circuit breakers. This greatly reduces
the chance of fires caused by electrical problems.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse.
If the band is broken or melted, replace the fuse.
Be sure you replace a bad fuse with a new
one of the identical size and rating. If a fuse blows,
see your dealer for service immediately.
If you ever have a problem on the road and
don’t have a spare fuse, you can “borrow” one
that has the same amperage. Pick some
feature of your vehicle that you can get along
without – like the radio or cigarette lighter – and
use its fuse, if it is the correct amperage. Replace
it as soon as you can.
The underhood fuse block is located in the engine
compartment on the passenger’s side of the
page 342 for more information on location.
The fuses are located in three fuse blocks, one
located in the engine compartment on the
passenger’s side and the other two under the
rear seat.
To access the fuses, push in the two tabs located
on each side of the fuse block cover. Then lift
the cover off.
447
Relays
Usage
HI BEAM
RELAY MICRO
High-Beam Headlamps
DRL RELAY
MICRO-OPT
LO BEAM
RELAY/HID
MINI-OPT
Daytime Running Lamps
Low-Beam Headlamps
HDLP WASH
RELAY
MINI-OPT
Headlamp Washer Motor
SPARE
Not Used
BLOWER
RELAY MINI
Front Blower
FOG LAMP
Relays
Usage
Fog Lamps
RELAY MICRO
LO SPEED
FAN
RELAY MINI
HI SPEED FAN
RELAY MINI
ACCESSORY
RELAY MINI
S/P FAN
RELAY MINI
PARK LAMP
RELAY MICRO
MAIN RELAY Powertrain/Engine Control
Low Speed Fan Motor
MICRO
STARTER
RELAY MINI
CMP CLU
RELAY MICRO
IGN-1 RELAY
MICRO
Module (ECM)
Starter Solenoid
High Speed Fan Motor
Wipe-Wash
Compressor Clutch
Ignition Switch (ON)
Series/Parallel Fan
Parking Lamps
Horn
HORN RELAY
MICRO
448
Wiring
Fuses
RT PARK
HORN
Usage
Usage
Harnesses
Passenger’s Side Taillamp
Assembly, Front Sidemarker and
Front Parking Lamp Assembly
BODY W/H
BODY W/H
ENG W/H
Wiring Harness Connection
Wiring Harness Connection
Engine Wiring Harness Connection
Dual Horn Assembly
LT HI BEAM Driver’s Side High-Beam Headlamp
LT LOW BEAM Driver’s Side Low-Beam Headlamp
J Cases
Usage
Passenger’s Side Low-Beam
RT LOW BEAM
Headlamp
RRPDB (Passenger’s Side Rear
Power Distribution Box)
RRPDB (Passenger’s Side Rear
Power Distribution Box)
LRPDB (Driver’s Side Rear Power
Distribution Box)
LRPDB (Driver’s Side Rear Power
Distribution Box)
High Cooling Fan Motor
Low Cooling Fan Motor
PWM Fan Motor Assembly
Starter Solenoid
R REAR
Passenger’s Side High-Beam
RT HI BEAM
Headlamp
R REAR
L REAR
L REAR
Manual Transmission Output Speed
TOS
Sensor
Not Used
SPARE
THEFT
ECM (Engine Control Module), TCM
(Transmission Control Module),
PASS-Key® III+ Module
Driver’s Side Taillamp Assembly,
Front Sidemarker and Front Parking
Lamp Assembly
Rear License Plate Assembly, Dash
Integrated Module (DIM)
DIM, ALDL (Assembly Line
Data Link)
HI FAN
LO FAN
BLOWER
STARTER
ABS
LT PARK
DIMMING
DIM/ALDL
Anti-Lock Brake System
FLASHER
ECM
Turn Signal/Hazard Flasher Module
Electronic Control Module
449
Fuses
Usage
Fuses
Usage
Turn Signal Switch, Cruise Control
Switch
Odd Ignition Coils, Fuel Injectors,
Odd Injection Coils
STRG CTLS
ODD INJ/COIL
Clutch Switch (Normal Closed),
Clutch Switch (Normal Open),
Jumper to Start Relay Coil for
Automatic Transmission
Driver’s and Passenger’s Side
Heated Washer Nozzles
COMP CLUTCH Compressor Clutch
HTR VLV/
CLTCH
WPR SW
Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch
FOG LAMP
Fog Lamps
Center Console Accessory Power
Outlet
OUTLET
WASH NOZ
Driver’s and Passenger’s Side
Oxygen Sensors, LRPDB (Pusher
Cooling Fan Relay)
Instrument Panel Accessory Power
Outlet
Driver’s & Passenger’s Side Oxygen
POST 02
PRE O2/CAM Sensors, CAM Phaser, Canister
Purge
Transmission Control Module,
Engine Control Module, Instrument
Panel Cluster
I/P OUTLET
CCP
TCM/IPC
SPARE
Climate Control
Not Used
EVEN INJ/COIL Even Injection Coils
IGN MOD/MAF Mass Airflow Sensor
ELEC PRNDL Electronic PRNDL (Export)
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
SPARE
SPARE
Not Used
Not Used
Ignition Switch (Power to IGN-3 and
CRANK)
Circuit
Breakers
IGN SW
Usage
VOLT CHECK DIM (Dash Integration Module)
TCM (Transmission Control Module),
HDLP WASH
C/B-OPT
Headlamp Washer Motor
ECM (Engine Control Module), IPC
ECM/TCM
(Instrument Panel Cluster),
Misc.
Usage
PASS-Key® III+ Module
FUSE PULLER Fuse Puller
WPR MOD
450
Windshield Wiper Module Assembly
To remove the rear seat cushion, do the following:
Rear Underseat Fuse Block
1. Pull up on the front of the cushion to release
the front hooks.
To access the rear underseat fuse blocks, you will
have to first remove the rear seat cushion.
2. Pull the cushion up and out toward the front
of the vehicle.
Removing the Rear Seat Cushion
Notice: If, when removing or reinstalling the
rear seat, you do not do it carefully, you
could damage the fuse center. Avoid contact
between the rear seat and the fuse center
whenever you remove or reinstall the rear seat.
3. Slide the cushion out one of the rear doors
and set it aside.
Rear Pass-Through Seat
451
{CAUTION:
A safety belt that is not properly routed
through the seat cushion or is twisted will
not provide the protection needed in a
crash. If the safety belt has not been
routed through the seat cushion at all, it
will not be there to work for the next
passenger. The person sitting in that
position could be badly injured. After
reinstalling the seat cushion, always
check to be sure that the safety belts are
properly routed and are not twisted.
Split-Folding Rear Seat
To reinstall the rear seat cushion, do the following:
1. Position the seat cushion so that you can
route the safety belts through the proper
slots in the seat cushion.
2. Slide the rear of the cushion up and under the
seatback so the rear-locating guides hook into
the wire loops on the back frame.
452
3. With the seat cushion lowered, push rearward
and then press down on the seat cushion until
the seat cushion snaps into place.
To access the fuse block, push in the two tabs
located at each end of the fuse block cover. Then
lift the cover off.
4. Push and pull on the seat cushion to make
sure it is locked into place.
5. Check to make sure the safety belts are
properly routed and that no portion of any
safety belt is trapped under the seat cushion.
Rear Underseat Fuse Block
(Driver’s Side)
Fuses
SPARE
SPARE
AUDIO
SPARE
Usage
Not Used
Not Used
Radio, OnStar Module
Not Used
REAR DR MOD Rear Door Modules
SPARE
Not Used
DRIVER
DR MOD
Driver’s Door Module
The driver’s side rear fuse block is located under
the rear seat on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
The rear seat cushion must be removed to access
the rear fuse block. See “Removing the Rear
Seat Cushion” listed previously.
Taillamps, Center High-Mounted
Stoplamp, Flasher Module, ABS
Module, Trailer Lamps
Headlamp Leveling System Chassis
Sensors (Export Only)
BAS
HDLP LEVELING
SPARE
CCP
Not Used
CCP (Climate Control Panel)
453
Fuses
Usage
Relays
Usage
Heated Seat Modules, Air Inlet
Motor, Shifter Assembly
Not Used
Not Used
PUSHER FAN Pusher Fan (Export Only)
L POSITION Driver’s Side Position Lamp
RELAY MICRO (Export Only)
IGN 3
SPARE
SPARE
TRK DR REL
SOL RELAY
MICRO
Trunk Release Motor
FUSE PULLER Fuse Puller
L FRT HTD
Driver’s Heated Seat Module
REV LAMP
ISRVM (Inside Rearview Mirror),
SEAT MOD
RELAY MICRO License Plate Lamp Assembly
MEM/ADAPT Driver’s Power Seat Switch, Memory
R POSITION Passenger’s Side Position Lamp
RELAY MICRO (Export Only)
SEAT
TRUNK
DR RELEASE
REVERSE
LAMP
SPARE
POSITION
LAMP
Seat Module
Trunk Release Motor
IGN 3 RELAY Heated Seat Modules, Air Inlet
MICRO
Motor, Shifter Assembly
ISRVM (Inside Rearview Mirror),
License Plate Lamp Assembly
Not Used
Taillamp Assemblies, Front Position
Lamp Assemblies (Export Only)
STANDING
LAMP
RLY MICRO
Control for Position Lamp Relays
(Export Only)
Circuit
Breakers
Usage
J Cases
AMP
Usage
Audio Amplifier
Power Seat Switches, Memory Seat
Module
SEAT C/B
PUSHER FAN Pusher Fan (Export Only)
Misc.
Usage
Relays
BAS RELAY
MINI
Usage
Brake Apply Sensor
JOINT
CONNECTOR
Joint Connector
454
Rear Underseat Fuse Block
(Passenger’s Side)
Fuses
Usage
TRUNK DIODE Trunk Lamp
POWER
SOUNDER
Power Sounder, Inclination Sensor
(Export Only)
SPARE
Not Used
CANISTER
VENT
Canister Vent Solenoid
FUEL
Fuel Pump Motor
Not Used
PUMP MTR
SPARE
R FRT HTD
SEAT MOD
SPARE
Passenger’s Side Heated Seat
Module
Not Used
SDM (Sensing Diagnostic Module)
ISRVM (Inside Rearview Mirror),
Power Sounder, RIM
Anti-Lock Brake System
Not Used
Not Used
The passenger’s side rear fuse block is located
under the rear seat on the passenger’s side of the
vehicle. The rear seat cushion must be removed
to access the rear fuse block. See “Removing
the Rear Seat Cushion” listed previously.
AIR BAG
RIM
To access the fuse block, push in the two tabs
located at each end of the fuse block cover. Then
lift the cover off.
ABS
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
Not Used
FUSE PULLER Fuse Puller
455
Fuses
INTERIOR
LAMP
Usage
Relays
Usage
Fuel Pump Motor
Hush Panel Lamps, Puddle Lamps,
Overhead Courtesy Lamp Assembly
FUEL PUMP
MOTOR
RLY MICRO
PSGR DR MOD Right Front Passenger Door Module
INT LAMP
Hush Panel Lamps, Puddle Lamps,
RIM (Rear Integration Module),
Ignition Switch, Key Lock Cylinder
RIM/IGN SW
RELAY MICRO Overhead Courtesy Lamp Assembly
IGN 1 RELAY
Ignition Switch
MICRO
REAR FOG
Rear Fog Lamps (Export Only)
LAMP
SPARE
Not Used
SPARE
Not Used
TV Tuner Assembly (Export Only),
VICS (Vehicle Information
TV/VICS
Circuit
Communication System) Module
Usage
Usage
Breakers
DR MOD
PWR C/B
Door Modules
J Cases
Usage
REAR DEFOG Rear Window Defogger Element
SUNROOF
Misc.
JOINT
CONNECTOR
Power Sunroof Module
MOD
Joint Connector
Relays
Usage
SPARE
Not Used
REAR DEFOG
RELAY MINI
Rear Window Defogger
Not Used
SPARE
REAR FOG
LAMP
RLY MICRO
Rear Fog Lamps (Export Only)
456
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See Recommended
Capacities
Application
English
Metric
For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge
amount, see the refrigerant caution label located
under the hood. See your dealer for more
information.
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a
Cooling System
2.8L HFV6 Engine
3.6L HFV6 Engine
6.0L V8 Engine
Engine Oil with Filter
2.8L HFV6 Engine
3.6L HFV6 Engine
6.0L V8 Engine
Fuel Tank
11.7 qt
12.1 qt
13.4 qt
11.1 L
11.8 L
12.7 L
6.0 qt
6.0 qt
5.7 L
5.7 L
5.7 L
66.2 L
6.0 qt
17.5 gal
457
Capacities
Application
English
Metric
Transmission (Pan Removal and Replacement)
Automatic
7.4 qt
1.9 qt
7.0 L
1.8 L
6-Speed Manual – CTS
6-Speed Manual – CTS-V
Wheel Nut Torque
3.7 qt
3.5 L
100 lb ft
(140 Y)
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.
Engine Specifications
Engine
VIN Code
Transmission
Spark Plug Gap
2.8L HFV6
T
Automatic Manual
0.043 inches (1.1 mm)
Automatic
Manual
3.6L HFV6
6.0L V8
7
0.043 inches (1.1 mm)
0.040 inches (1.02 mm)
U
Manual
CTS-V Engine Data
Engine
6.0L V8 (LS2)
Horsepower
Torque
Displacement
Compression Ratio
400 hp (298 kW) @
6000 rpm
395 ft lb (536 Nm) @
4400 rpm
6.0 L
10.9:1
458
Maintenance Requirements
Maintenance Schedule
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks,
inspections, replacement parts, and
recommended fluids and lubricants as
prescribed in this manual are necessary to
keep your vehicle in good working condition.
Any damage caused by failure to follow
scheduled maintenance may not be covered
by warranty.
Introduction
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level
and change as recommended.
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The
Plan supplements your new vehicle warranties.
See your Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet
or your dealer for details.
460
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Using the Maintenance Schedule
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep
your vehicle in good working condition, but also
helps the environment. All recommended
maintenance is important. Improper vehicle
maintenance can even affect the quality of the air
we breathe. Improper fluid levels or the wrong
tire inflation can increase the level of emissions
from your vehicle. To help protect our environment,
and to keep your vehicle in good condition, be
sure to maintain your vehicle properly.
We at General Motors want to help you keep your
vehicle in good working condition. But we do
not know exactly how you will drive it. You may
drive very short distances only a few times a week.
Or you may drive long distances all the time in
very hot, dusty weather. You may use your vehicle
in making deliveries. Or you may drive it to
work, to do errands, or in many other ways.
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may
need more frequent checks and replacements.
So please read the following and note how
you drive. If you have any questions on how to
keep your vehicle in good condition, see your
GM Goodwrench® dealer.
461
This schedule is for vehicles that:
• carry passengers and cargo within
{CAUTION:
recommended limits. You will find these limits
on the Tire and Loading Information label.
Performing maintenance work on a
vehicle can be dangerous. In trying to do
some jobs, you can be seriously injured.
Do your own maintenance work only if
you have the required know-how and the
proper tools and equipment for the job.
If you have any doubt, see your GM
Goodwrench® dealer to have a qualified
technician do the work.
• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within
legal driving limits.
page 463 should be performed when indicated.
information.
Some maintenance services can be complex.
So, unless you are technically qualified and have
the necessary equipment, you should have
your GM Goodwrench® dealer do these jobs.
When you go to your GM Goodwrench® dealer for
your service needs, you will know that GM-trained
and supported service technicians will perform
the work using genuine GM parts.
462
If you want to purchase service information, see
page 501.
Scheduled Maintenance
When the Change Engine Oil message in the
Driver Information Center (DIC) comes on,
it means that service is required for your vehicle.
Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible
within the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible
that, if you are driving under the best conditions,
the engine oil life system may not indicate
that vehicle service is necessary for over a year.
However, your engine oil and filter must be
changed at least once a year and at this time the
system must be reset. Your GM Goodwrench®
dealer has GM-trained service technicians who will
perform this work using genuine GM parts and
reset the system.
what should be checked, when to check it, and
what you can easily do to help keep your vehicle in
good condition.
The proper replacement parts, fluids, and
lubricants to use are listed in Recommended
When your vehicle is serviced, make sure these
are used. All parts should be replaced and all
necessary repairs done before you or anyone else
drives the vehicle. We recommend the use of
genuine GM parts.
463
If the engine oil life system is ever reset
Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the
change engine oil message comes on within
10 months since the vehicle was purchased or
Maintenance II was performed.
accidentally, you must service your vehicle within
3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your last service.
Remember to reset the oil life system whenever
page 350 for information on the Engine Oil Life
System and resetting the system.
Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the
previous service performed was Maintenance I.
Always use Maintenance II whenever the message
comes on 10 months or more since the last
service or if the message has not come on at all
for one year.
When the Change Engine Oil message appears,
certain services, checks, and inspections are
required. Required services are described in the
following for “Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II.”
Generally, it is recommended that your first
service be Maintenance I, your second service
be Maintenance II, and that you alternate
Maintenance I and Maintenance II thereafter.
However, in some cases, Maintenance II may be
required more often.
464
Scheduled Maintenance
Service
Maintenance I Maintenance II
•
•
•
•
•
Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (k).
Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine Air
Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection and
on page 470.
•
•
Inspect brake system. See footnote (a).
•
•
•
•
Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid
as needed.
Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services”
in this section.
•
•
Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b).
Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c).
Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d).
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e).
Lubricate body components. See footnote (f).
Replace passenger compartment air filter. See footnote (g).
465
Additional Required Services
The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated
miles (kilometers) shown for each item.
Additional Required Services
25,000
(40 000)
50,000
75,000
100,000
125,000
150,000
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
(80 000) (120 000) (160 000) (200 000) (240 000)
Inspect fuel system for damage
or leaks.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect exhaust system for loose or
damaged components.
Replace engine air cleaner filter. See
Change automatic transmission fluid
and filter (severe service only).
See footnote (h).
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
CTS-V Only: Change 6-speed manual
transmission fluid (severe service only).
See footnotes (l) and (m).
CTS-V Only: Change hydraulic clutch
fluid (severe service only).
See footnote (l).
•
•
•
CTS-V Only: Change rear axle fluid
(severe service only).
See footnotes (l) and (m).
466
Additional Required Services (cont’d)
25,000
(40 000)
50,000
75,000
100,000
125,000
150,000
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
(80 000) (120 000) (160 000) (200 000) (240 000)
CTS-V Only: Change brake fluid
(severe service only). See footnote (l).
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Replace spark plugs. An Emission
Control Service.
Engine cooling system service (or every
five years, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (i).
•
•
Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (p).
If using DOT-4 brake fluid, change
brake fluid at a regular maintenance
service every two years.
See footnote (j).
(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension and
steering system for damaged, loose, or missing
parts or signs of wear. Inspect power steering lines
and hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks,
cracks, chafing, etc.
Maintenance Footnotes
(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for
proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing,
etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors
for surface condition. Inspect other brake
parts, including calipers, parking brake, etc.
467
(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced
if they are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated.
Inspect all pipes, fittings and clamps; replace with
genuine GM parts as needed. To help ensure
proper operation, a pressure test of the cooling
system and pressure cap and cleaning the outside
of the radiator and air conditioning condenser is
recommended at least once a year.
(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders. Lubricate all
body door hinges. Lubricate all hinges and latches,
including those for the hood, rear compartment,
console door, and any folding seat hardware.
More frequent lubrication may be required when
exposed to a corrosive environment. Applying
silicone grease on weatherstrips with a clean cloth
will make them last longer, seal better, and not
stick or squeak.
(d) Visually inspect wiper blades for wear or
cracking. Replace wiper blades that appear worn
or damaged or that streak or miss areas of
the windshield.
(g) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions,
the filter may require replacement more often.
(h) Change automatic transmission fluid and filter
if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or
more of these conditions:
(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all
your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, and
anchorages are working properly. Look for
any other loose or damaged safety belt system
parts. If you see anything that might keep a safety
belt system from doing its job, have it repaired.
Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced. Also
look for any opened or broken airbag coverings,
and have them repaired or replaced. The
− In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C)
or higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Uses such as high performance operation.
airbag system does not need regular maintenance.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, the fluid and filter do not require
changing.
468
(i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. This
service can be complex; you should have
your dealer perform this service. See Engine
Coolant on page 357 for what to use. Inspect
hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure
cap, and filler neck. Pressure test the cooling
system and pressure cap.
(n) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions,
inspect the filter at each engine oil change.
(p) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessive
cracks, or obvious damage. Replace belt if
necessary.
Owner Checks and Services
(j) If using DOT-4 brake fluid only: Drain, flush,
and refill brake hydraulic system at a regular
maintenance service (I or II) every two years.
This service can be complex; you should
have your dealer perform this service. See
These owner checks and services should be
performed at the intervals specified to help ensure
the safety, dependability, and emission control
performance of your vehicle. Your GM
Goodwrench® dealer can assist you with these
checks and services.
(k) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could
indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired and the fluid level checked. Add
fluid if needed.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at
once. Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added
to your vehicle, make sure they are the proper
ones, as shown in Recommended Fluids and
(l) Change fluid if the vehicle is used for high
performance operation.
(m) Change fluid whenever the vehicle has been
driven for 3,000 miles (5 000 km) with the
transmission temperature at 290°F (143°C) or
higher without using an auxiliary fluid cooler. See
469
At Each Fuel Fill
At Least Once a Month
It is important to perform these underhood checks
at each fuel fill.
Tire Inflation Check
Visually inspect your vehicle’s tires and make
sure they are inflated to the correct pressures.
page 392 for further details. Check to make
sure the spare tire is stored securely. See
Engine Oil Level Check
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil
further details.
Notice: It is important to check your oil
regularly and keep it at the proper level. Failure
to keep your engine oil at the proper level
can cause damage to your engine not covered
by your warranty.
Tire Wear Inspection
Tire rotation may be required for high mileage
highway drivers prior to the Engine Oil Life System
service notification. Check the tires for wear
and, if necessary, rotate the tires. See Tire
Engine Coolant Level Check
Check the engine coolant level and add
DEX-COOL® coolant mixture if necessary. See
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Check the windshield washer fluid level in
the windshield washer fluid reservoir and add
the proper fluid if necessary.
470
3. On automatic transmission vehicles, try to start
the engine in each gear. The vehicle should
start only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). If the
vehicle starts in any other position, contact
your GM Goodwrench® dealer for service.
At Least Once a Year
Starter Switch Check
{CAUTION:
On manual transmission vehicles, put the shift
lever in NEUTRAL, push the clutch pedal
down halfway, and try to start the engine.
The vehicle should start only when the clutch
pedal is pushed down all the way to the
floor. If the vehicle starts when the clutch pedal
is not pushed all the way down, contact your
GM Goodwrench® dealer for service.
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the
vehicle moves, you or others could be
injured.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough
room around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the
page 124.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be
ready to turn off the engine immediately if
it starts.
471
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock
Control System Check
Ignition Transmission Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set,
try to turn the ignition to OFF in each shift lever
position.
{CAUTION:
• With an automatic transmission, the ignition
should turn to OFF only when the shift lever
is in PARK (P). The ignition key should
come out only in OFF.
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
• With a manual transmission, the ignition
should turn to OFF only when the key release
button is pressed. The ignition key should
come out only in OFF.
Contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer if service
is required.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough
room around the vehicle. It should be parked
on a level surface.
Be ready to apply the regular brake
immediately if the vehicle begins to move.
3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON,
but do not start the engine. Without applying
the regular brake, try to move the shift
lever out of PARK (P) with normal effort. If the
shift lever moves out of PARK (P), contact
your GM Goodwrench® dealer for service.
472
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular
brake, set the parking brake.
Parking Brake and Automatic
Transmission Park (P) Mechanism Check
• To check the parking brake’s holding ability:
With the engine running and transmission in
NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure
from the regular brake pedal. Do this until the
vehicle is held by the parking brake only.
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, your
vehicle could begin to move. You or
others could be injured and property
could be damaged. Make sure there is
room in front of your vehicle in case it
begins to roll. Be ready to apply the
regular brake at once should the vehicle
begin to move.
• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding
ability: With the engine running, shift to
PARK (P). Then release the parking brake
followed by the regular brake.
Contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer if service
is required.
Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush
any corrosive materials from the underbody.
Take care to clean thoroughly any areas where
mud and other debris can collect.
473
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name,
part number, or specification may be obtained
from your dealer.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Hydraulic Brake Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or
System
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
Windshield
Washer
GM Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
Hydraulic Clutch Fluid. Use only
GM Part No. U.S. 88958860,
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Hydraulic
Clutch System in Canada 88901244, Super DOT-4
brake fluid.
The engine requires a special
engine oil meeting GM Standard
GM4718M. Oils meeting this
standard may be identified as
synthetic, and should also be
identified with the American
Petroleum Institute Certified for
Gasoline Engines starburst symbol.
However, not all synthetic API oils
with the starburst symbol will meet
this GM standard. You should
look for and use only an oil that
meets GM Standard GM4718M.
GM Goodwrench® oil meets all
the requirements for your vehicle.
For the proper viscosity, see
Chassis Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985, in
Parking Brake
Canada 88901242) or lubricant
Cable Guides
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Engine Oil
GM Power Steering Fluid
Power Steering
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021184,
System
in Canada 89021186).
Manual
SAE 75W-90 Gear Oil
Transmission (GM Part No. U.S. 89021806,
(CTS)
in Canada 89021807).
Manual
Transmission
(CTS-V)
DEXRON®-VI Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and use only DEX-COOL®
Coolant. See Engine Coolant
on page 357.
Engine Coolant
Automatic
DEXRON®-VI Automatic
Transmission Transmission Fluid.
474
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Secondary
Key Lock
Cylinders
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,
Latch, Pivots, in Canada 992723) or lubricant
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,
in Canada 992723) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Spring
Anchor, and
Release Pawl
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Floor Shift
Linkage
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Hood and Door
Hinges
SAE 75W-90 Synthetic
Axle Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12378261,
in Canada 10953455) meeting
GM Specification 9986115.
Rear Axle
Weatherstrip Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,
Weatherstrip in Canada 10953518) or
Conditioning
Dielectric Silicone Grease
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,
in Canada 992887).
SAE 75W-90 Synthetic
Axle Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12378261,
in Canada 10953455) meeting
GM Specification 9986115.
With a complete drain and refill
add 4 ounces (118 ml) of
Rear Axle
(Limited-Slip
Differential)
Limited-Slip Axle Lubricant Additive
(GM Part No. U.S. 1052358,
in Canada 992694) where required.
475
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
ACDelco® Part
Part
GM Part Numbers
Numbers
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
2.8L V6 and 3.6L V6 Engines
6.0L V8 Engine
25728874
25750701
A2029C
A1623C
Engine Oil Filter
2.8L V6 and 3.6L V6 Engines
6.0L V8 Engine
25177917
89017524
25740404
PF2129
PF48
Passenger Compartment Air Filter Element
Spark Plugs
CF133
2.8L and 3.6L HFV6 Engines
6.0L V8 Engine
12597464
12571164
41-990
41-985
Wiper Blades (Hook Type)
Driver’s Side – 22 inches (56.5 cm)
Passenger’s Side – 21 inches (53.3 cm)
12487636
12487638
—
—
476
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
479
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
480
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of
dealership management, it appears your concern
cannot be resolved by the dealership without
further help, in the United States, contact the
Cadillac Customer Assistance Center, 24 hours
a day, by calling 1-800-458-8006. In Canada,
contact the Canadian Cadillac Customer
Customer Assistance and
Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important
to your dealer and to Cadillac. Normally, any
concerns with the sales transaction or the
operation of your vehicle will be resolved by your
dealer’s sales or service departments. Sometimes,
however, despite the best intentions of all
concerned, misunderstandings can occur. If your
concern has not been resolved to your
Communication Centre by calling 1-888-446-2000.
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in
order to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please
have the following information available to give the
Customer Assistance Representative:
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
This is available from the vehicle registration
or title, or the plate at the top left of the
instrument panel and visible through the
windshield.
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member
of dealership management. Normally, concerns
can be quickly resolved at that level. If the
matter has already been reviewed with the sales,
service or parts manager, contact the owner
of the dealership or the general manager.
• Dealership name and location.
• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.
When contacting Cadillac, please remember
that your concern will likely be resolved at
a dealer’s facility. That is why we suggest you
follow Step One first if you have a concern.
482
STEP THREE (United States Owners): Both
General Motors and your dealer are committed
to making sure you are completely satisfied
with your new vehicle. However, if you continue
to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure
outlined in Steps One and Two, you should file
with the Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto Line
Program to enforce your rights.
You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using
the toll-free telephone number or write them at the
following address:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court
program administered by the Council of Better
Business Bureaus to settle automotive disputes
regarding vehicle repairs or the interpretation
of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Although you
may be required to resort to this informal dispute
resolution program prior to filing a court action,
use of the program is free of charge and your case
will generally be heard within 40 days. If you do
not agree with the decision given in your case, you
may reject it and proceed with any other venue
for relief available to you.
This program is available in all 50 states and
the District of Columbia. Eligibility is limited
by vehicle age, mileage and other factors.
General Motors reserves the right to change
eligibility limitations and/or discontinue its
participation in this program.
483
STEP THREE (Canadian Owners):
For further information concerning eligibility in
the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan
(CAMVAP), call toll-free 1-800-207-0685.
Alternatively you may call the General Motors
Customer Communication Centre, 1-800-263-3777
(English), 1-800-263-7854 (French), or you may
write to the Mediation/Arbitration Program at
the following address. Your inquiry should
be accompanied by your Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN).
General Motors Participation in the
Mediation/Arbitration Program
In the event that you do not feel your concerns
have been addressed after the following the
procedure outlined in Steps One and Two.
General Motors of Canada Limited wants you
to be aware of its participation in a no-charge
mediation/Arbitration program. General Motors
of Canada Limited has committed to binding
arbitration of owner disputes involving
factory-related vehicle service claims. The
program provides for the review of the facts
involved by an impartial third party arbiter, and
may include an informal hearing before the arbiter.
The program is designed so that the entire
dispute settlement process, from the time you file
your complaint to the final decision, should be
completed in approximately 70 days. We believe
our impartial program offers advantages over
courts in most jurisdictions because it is informal,
quick, and free of charge.
Mediation/Arbitration Program
c/o Customer Communication Centre
General Motors of Canada Limited
Mail Code: CA1–163–005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
484
Refer to www.MyGMLink.com on the web for
updated information and to register your vehicle.
Online Owner Center
Online Owner Center
(United States only)
My GM Canada (Canada only)
My GM Canada is a password-protected section
of gmcanada.com where you can save information
on GM vehicles, get personalized offers, and
use handy tools and forms with greater ease.
The Owner Center is a resource for your GM
ownership needs. Specific vehicle information
can be found in one place.
The Online Owner Center allows you to:
Here are a few of the valuable tools and services
you will have access to:
• Get e-mail service reminders.
− My Showroom: Find and save information on
vehicles and current offers in your area.
− My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such as
address and phone number for each of
your preferred GM Dealers or Retailers.
• Access information about your specific
vehicle, including tips and videos and
an electronic version of this owner manual.
• Keep track of your vehicle’s service history
and maintenance schedule.
− My Driveway: Receive service reminders and
helpful advice on owning and maintaining
your vehicle.
− My Preferences: Manage your profile,
subscribe to E-News and use tools and forms
with greater ease.
• Find GM dealers for service nationwide.
• Receive special promotions and privileges
only available to members.
To sign up to My GM Canada, visit the My GM
Canada section within www.gmcanada.com.
485
www.Cadillac.com
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
1-800-458-8006
1-800-833-2622 (For Text Telephone
devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-882-1112
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of
hearing, or speech-impaired and who use
Text Telephones (TTYs), Cadillac has TTY
equipment available at its Customer Assistance
Center. Any TTY user can communicate with
Cadillac by dialing: 1-800-833-CMCC (2622).
(TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
From Puerto Rico:
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
Customer Assistance Offices
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
Cadillac encourages customers to call the toll-free
number for assistance. However, if a customer
wishes to write or e-mail Cadillac, the letter should
be addressed to:
Canada — Customer Assistance
General Motors of Canada Limited
Canadian Cadillac Customer Communication
Centre, CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
United States — Customer Assistance
Cadillac Customer Assistance Center
Cadillac Motor Car Division
P.O. Box 33169
www.gmcanada.com
1-888-446-2000
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone
devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-882-1112
Detroit, MI 48232-5169
486
Overseas — Customer Assistance
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program
Please contact the local General Motors
Business Unit.
Mexico, Central America and
Caribbean Islands/Countries
(Except Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin
Islands) — Customer Assistance
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
This program, available to qualified applicants,
can reimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost
of eligible aftermarket adaptive equipment required
for your vehicle, such as hand controls or a
wheelchair/scooter lift.
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800
The offer is available for a very limited period of
time from the date of vehicle purchase/lease.
For more details, or to determine your vehicle’s
eligibility, visit gmmobility.com or call the GM
Mobility Assistance Center at 1-800-323-9935.
Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935.
General Motors of Canada also has a Mobility
Program. Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483)
for details. TTY users call 1-800-263-3830.
487
Who Is Covered?
Roadside Service
Roadside Assistance coverage is for the vehicle
operator, regardless of ownership. A person driving
this vehicle without the consent of the owner is
not eligible for coverage.
In the United States or Canada, call
1-800-882-1112
Service available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year
Cadillac’s exceptional Roadside Service is more
than an auto club or towing service. It provides
every Cadillac owner with the advantage of
contacting a Cadillac advisor and, in the United
States, where available, a Cadillac trained dealer
technician who can provide on-site service.
The following services are provided in the United
States during the Bumper-to-Bumper warranty
period and in Canada, during the Base Warranty
coverage period of the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty, up to a maximum coverage of $100.
These services are provided at a nominal charge
if the Cadillac is no longer covered by the
Each United States technician travels with a
specially equipped service vehicle complete with
the necessary Cadillac parts and tools required to
handle most roadside repairs.
warranties listed previously. Roadside Service is
available only in the United States and Canada.
Cadillac Owner Privileges™
Roadside Service provides several Cadillac
Owner Privileges™ at “no charge,” throughout
your Cadillac Warranty Period — 48 months/
50,000 miles (80 000 km).
488
Emergency Road Service is performed on site for
the following situations:
• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel for the
customer to get to the nearest service station
(approximately $5 in the United States and
10 litres in Canada). Service to provide diesel
may be restricted. For safety reasons,
• Towing Service: Emergency towing from a
public roadway or highway to the nearest
dealership for warranty service or in the event
of a vehicle-disabling accident. Winch-out
assistance when the vehicle is mired in sand,
mud, or snow.
propane and other alternative fuels will not be
provided through this service.
• Flat Tire Change (Covers change only):
Installation of your spare tire, in good
condition, will be covered at no charge. The
customer is responsible for the repair or
replacement of the tire if not covered by a
warrantable failure.
• Battery Jump Starting: No-start occurrences
which require a battery jump start will be
covered at no charge.
• Lock Out Assistance: To ensure security,
the driver must present the vehicle registration
and personal ID before lock-out service is
provided. Lock-out service will be covered at
no charge if you are unable to gain entry
into your vehicle. If your vehicle will not
start, Roadside Service will arrange to have
your vehicle towed to the nearest authorized
dealership. In the United States, replacement
keys made at the customer’s expense will
be delivered within 10 miles.
• Trip Interruption: If your trip is interrupted
due to a warranty failure, incidental expenses
may be reimbursed during the
48 months/50,000 miles (80 000 km) warranty
period. Items covered are hotel, meals,
and rental car.
489
Additional Services for Canadian
Customers
Roadside Service Availability
Wherever you drive in the United States or
Canada, an advisor is available to assist you over
the phone. A dealer technician, if available, can
travel to your location within a 30 mile (50 km)
radius of a participating Cadillac dealership.
If beyond this radius, we will arrange to have your
car towed to the nearest Cadillac dealership.
• Trip Routing Service: Upon request, Cadillac
Roadside Service will send you detailed,
computer-personalized maps, highlighting
your choice of either the most direct route or
the most scenic route to your destination,
anywhere in North America, along with any
helpful travel information we may have
For prompt and efficient assistance when calling,
please provide the following to the Roadside
Service Representative:
pertaining to your trip. To request this service,
please call us toll-free at 1-800-268-6800.
We will make every attempt to send your
personalized trip routing as quickly as possible,
but it is best to allow three weeks before your
planned departure date. Trip routing requests
will be limited to six per calendar year.
• A description of the problem
• Name, home address, home
telephone number
• Location of your Cadillac and number you
are calling from
• Alternative Service: There may be times
when Roadside Service cannot provide timely
assistance. Your advisor may authorize you to
secure local emergency road service, and you
will be reimbursed up to $100 upon submission
of the original receipt to Cadillac Roadside
Service®.
• The model year, Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN), odometer reading, and date of delivery
While we hope you never have the occasion to use
our service, it is added security while traveling
for you and your family. Remember, we are only a
phone call away. In the United States or Canada,
customers call Roadside Service: 1-800-882-1112.
490
Any customer who has access to a (TTY) or a
conventional teletypewriter can communicate with
Cadillac by dialing from the United States or
Canada 1-888-889-2438 — daily, 24 hours.
Courtesy Transportation
To enhance your ownership experience, we and
our participating dealers are proud to offer
Courtesy Transportation, a customer support
program for new vehicles.
Cadillac and General Motors of Canada Limited
reserve the right to limit services or reimbursement
to an owner or driver when, in their sole
discretion, the claims become excessive in
frequency or type of occurrence.
For warranty repairs during the Bumper-to-Bumper
(United States) or Base Warranty Coverage
period (Canada), provided by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty, interim transportation may
be available under the courtesy transportation
program. Several courtesy transportation options
are available when warranty repairs are required
to assist in reducing your inconvenience.
Roadside Service is not part of or included in the
coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. Cadillac and General Motors of Canada
Limited reserve the right to make any changes
or discontinue the Roadside Service program
at any time without notification.
Courtesy Transportation is not part of the new
Vehicle Limited Warranty and is available only at
participating dealers. A separate booklet entitled
“Warranty and Owner Assistance Information”
furnished with each new vehicle provides detailed
warranty coverage information.
Towing and Road Service Exclusions
Specifically excluded from Roadside Service
coverage are towing or services for vehicles
operated on a non-public roadway or highway,
fines, impound towing caused by a violation
of local, Municipal, State, Provincial or Federal
law, and mounting, dismounting or changing
of snow tires, chains, or other traction devices.
491
Scheduling Service Appointments
Transportation Options
When your vehicle requires warranty service,
you should contact your dealer and request an
appointment. By scheduling a service appointment
and advising your service consultant of your
transportation needs, your dealer can help
minimize your inconvenience.
Warranty service can generally be completed
while you wait. However, if you are unable to wait,
GM helps to minimize your inconvenience by
providing several transportation options.
Depending on the circumstances, your dealer
can offer you one of the following:
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the
service department immediately, keep driving it
until it can be scheduled for service, unless,
of course, the problem is safety-related. If it is,
please call your dealership, let them know this,
and ask for instructions.
Shuttle Service
Shuttle Service is the preferred means of offering
Courtesy Transportation and participating
dealers can provide you with shuttle service to get
you to your destination with minimal interruption
of your daily schedule. This includes one-way
or round trip shuttle service within reasonable time
and distance parameters for the dealer’s area.
If the dealer requests that you simply drop the
vehicle off for service, you are urged to do so as
early in the work day as possible to allow for
the same day repair.
492
This requires that you sign and complete a rental
agreement and meet state/provincial, local and
rental vehicle provider requirements. Requirements
vary and may include minimum age requirements,
insurance coverage, credit card, etc. You are
responsible for fuel usage charges and may also
be responsible for taxes, levies, usage fees,
excessive mileage, or rental usage beyond the
completion of the repair.
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires warranty repairs, and
public transportation is used as “shuttle service,”
the reimbursement is limited to the associated
shuttle allowance (contact your dealer) and must
be supported by original receipts. In addition,
in the United States, should you arrange
transportation through a friend or relative, limited
reimbursement for reasonable fuel expenses
may be available. Claim amounts should reflect
actual costs and be supported by original receipts.
Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicle
as a courtesy rental.
Additional Program Information
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
All program options, such as shuttle service,
may not be available at every dealer. Please
contact your dealer for specific information
about availability. All Courtesy Transportation
arrangements will be administered by appropriate
dealer personnel.
Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a
courtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you for
a rental vehicle that you obtain if your vehicle is
kept for a warranty repair. Taxi reimbursement
may also be available if you meet the eligibility for
a courtesy rental and a rental vehicle is not
practical for your requirements. Rental and taxi
reimbursement will be limited (contact your dealer)
and must be supported by original receipts.
Cadillac and General Motors of Canada reserve
the right to unilaterally modify, change or
discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any time
and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to the terms and conditions described
herein at their sole discretion.
493
This information has been used to improve vehicle
crash performance and may be used to improve
crash performance of future vehicles and
driving safety. Unlike the data recorders on many
airplanes, these on-board systems do not
record sounds, such as conversation of vehicle
occupants.
Vehicle Data Collection and Event
Data Recorders
Your vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles,
has a number of sophisticated computer systems
that monitor and control several aspects of the
vehicle’s performance. Your vehicle uses on-board
vehicle computers to monitor emission control
components to optimize fuel economy, to monitor
conditions for airbag deployment and, if the
vehicle has the Anti-lock Brake System (ABS),
to provide anti-lock braking and to help the driver
control the vehicle in difficult driving situations.
Some information may be stored during regular
operations to facilitate repair of detected
To read this information, special equipment is
needed and access to the vehicle or the device
that stores the data is required. GM will not access
information about a crash event or share it with
others other than:
• with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the
vehicle is leased, with the consent of the
lessee,
malfunctions; other information is stored only in a
crash event by computer systems, such as those
commonly called Event Data Recorders (EDR).
• in response to an official request of police or
similar government office,
• as part of GM’s defense of litigation through
the discovery process, or
In a crash event, computer systems, such as the
airbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM)
in your vehicle may record information about the
condition of the vehicle and how it was operated,
such as data related to engine speed, brake
application, throttle position, vehicle speed, safety
belt usage, airbag readiness, airbag performance,
and the severity of a collision.
• as required by law.
494
In addition, once GM collects or receives data,
GM may:
Collision Damage Repair
If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is
damaged, have the damage repaired by a qualified
technician using the proper equipment and
quality replacement parts. Poorly performed
collision repairs will diminish your vehicle’s resale
value, and safety performance can be
• use the data for GM research needs,
• make it available for research where
appropriate confidentiality is to be maintained
and need is shown, or
• share summary data which is not tied to a
specific vehicle with non-GM organizations
for research purposes.
compromised in subsequent collisions.
Collision Parts
Others, such as law enforcement, may have
access to the special equipment that can read the
information if they have access to the vehicle
or the device that stores the data.
If your vehicle has OnStar®, please check the
OnStar® subscription service agreement or manual
for information on its operations and data
collection.
Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made
with the same materials and construction methods
as the parts with which your vehicle was
originally built. Genuine GM Collision parts are
your best choice to assure that your vehicle’s
designed appearance, durability and safety are
preserved. The use of Genuine GM parts can help
maintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty.
495
Recycled original equipment parts may also
be used for repair. These parts are typically
removed from vehicles that were total losses in
prior accidents. In most cases, the parts being
recycled are from undamaged sections of
the vehicle. A recycled original equipment
GM part, may be an acceptable choice to maintain
your vehicle’s originally designed appearance
and safety performance, however, the history of
these parts is not known. Such parts are not
covered by your GM New Vehicle Limited
Warranty, and any related failures are not
covered by that warranty.
Repair Facility
GM also recommends that you choose a collision
repair facility that meets your needs before you
ever need collision repairs. Your GM dealer
may have a collision repair center with GM-trained
technicians and state of the art equipment, or
be able to recommend a collision repair center that
has GM-trained technicians and comparable
equipment.
Insuring Your Vehicle
Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with
comprehensive and collision insurance coverage.
There are significant differences in the quality
of coverage afforded by various insurance policy
terms. Many insurance policies provide reduced
protection to your GM vehicle by limiting
compensation for damage repairs by using
aftermarket collision parts. Some insurance
companies will not specify aftermarket collision
parts. When purchasing insurance, we recommend
that you assure your vehicle will be repaired
with GM original equipment collision parts. If such
insurance coverage is not available from your
current insurance carrier, consider switching
to another insurance carrier.
Aftermarket collision parts are also available.
These are made by companies other than GM
and may not have been tested for your vehicle.
As a result, these parts may fit poorly, exhibit
premature durability/corrosion problems, and may
not perform properly in subsequent collisions.
Aftermarket parts are not covered by your GM New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any vehicle
failure related to such parts are not covered by
that warranty.
496
If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company
may require you to have insurance that assures
repairs with Genuine GM Original Equipment
Manufacturer (OEM) parts or Genuine
Manufacturer replacement parts. Read your
lease carefully, as you may be charged at the
end of your lease for poor quality repairs.
• Give only the necessary and requested
information to police and other parties involved
in the accident. Do not discuss your personal
condition, mental frame of mind, or anything
unrelated to the accident. This will help guard
against post-accident legal action.
• If you need roadside assistance, call
GM Roadside Assistance. See Roadside
If an Accident Occurs
Here is what to do if you are involved in an
accident.
• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know where
the towing service will be taking it. Get a
card from the tow truck operator or write down
the driver’s name, the service’s name, and
the phone number.
• Try to relax and then check to make sure you
are all right. If you are uninjured, make sure
that no one else in your vehicle, or the
other vehicle, is injured.
• Remove any valuables from your vehicle
before it is towed away. Make sure this
includes your insurance information and
registration if you keep these items in your
vehicle.
• If there has been an injury, call 911 for help.
Do not leave the scene of an accident until
all matters have been taken care of. Move
your vehicle only if its position puts you
in danger or you are instructed to move it by a
police officer.
497
• Gather the important information you will
need from the other driver. Things like name,
address, phone number, driver’s license
number, vehicle license plate, vehicle make,
model and model year, Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN), insurance company and
policy number, and a general description of
the damage to the other vehicle.
• Choose a reputable collision repair facility for
your vehicle. Whether you select a GM dealer
or a private collision repair facility to fix the
damage, make sure you are comfortable with
them. Remember, you will have to feel
comfortable with their work for a long time.
• Once you have an estimate, read it carefully
and make sure you understand what work will
be performed on your vehicle. If you have a
question, ask for an explanation. Reputable
shops welcome this opportunity.
• If possible, call your insurance company from
the scene of the accident. They will walk you
through the information they will need. If
they ask for a police report, phone or go to
the police department headquarters the
next day and you can get a copy of the report
for a nominal fee. In some states/provinces
with “no fault” insurance laws, a report may not
be necessary. This is especially true if there
are no injuries and both vehicles are driveable.
498
Remember if your vehicle is leased you may be
obligated to have the vehicle repaired with
Genuine GM parts, even if your insurance
coverage does not pay the full cost.
Managing the Vehicle Damage
Repair Process
In the event that your vehicle requires damage
repairs, GM recommends that you take an active
role in its repair. If you have a pre-determined
repair facility of choice, take your vehicle there, or
have it towed there. Specify to the facility that
any required replacement collision parts be original
equipment parts, either new Genuine GM parts
or recycled original GM parts. Remember, recycled
parts will not be covered by your GM vehicle
warranty.
If another party’s insurance company is paying for
the repairs, you are not obligated to accept a
repair valuation based on that insurance
company’s collision policy repair limits, as you
have no contractual limits with that company. In
such cases, you can have control of the repair and
parts choices as long as cost stays within
reasonable limits.
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must
live with the repair. Depending on your policy
limits, your insurance company may initially value
the repair using aftermarket parts. Discuss this
with your repair professional, and insist on
Genuine GM parts.
499
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your
vehicle has a safety defect, you should
immediately notify Transport Canada, in addition
to notifying General Motors of Canada Limited.
You may call them at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which
could cause a crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately inform the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA),
in addition to notifying General Motors.
Transport Canada
Road Safety Branch
2780 Sheffield Road
Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open
an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a
recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual problems
between you, your dealer, or General Motors.
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport
Canada) in a situation like this, we certainly hope
you will notify us. Please call us at
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or
write to:
1-800-458-8006, or write:
Cadillac Customer Assistance Center
Cadillac Motor Car Division
P.O. Box 33169
Administrator, NHTSA
400 Seventh Street, SW.
Washington, D.C. 20590
Detroit, MI 48232-5169
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
500
In Canada, please call us at 1-888-446-2000. Or,
write:
Transmission, Transaxle, Transfer
Case Unit Repair Manual
Canadian Cadillac Customer Communication
Centre, CA1-163-005
General Motors of Canada Limited
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
This manual provides information on unit repair
service procedures, adjustments, and
specifications for GM transmissions, transaxles,
and transfer cases.
Service Bulletins
Service Publications Ordering
Information
Service Bulletins give technical service information
needed to knowledgeably service General
Motors cars and trucks. Each bulletin contains
instructions to assist in the diagnosis and service
of your vehicle.
In Canada, the service bulletin reference number
can be obtained by contacting your GM dealer
or by calling 1-800-GMDRIVE (1-800-463-7483).
This reference number is needed to order the
service bulletin from Helm, Inc.
Service Manuals
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle
suspension, brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $6.00 US + Processing Fee
501
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM
Eastern Time
Owner Information
Owner publications are written specifically for
owners and intended to provide basic operational
information about the vehicle. The owner
manual will include the Maintenance Schedule for
all models.
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on
the World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner Manual,
and Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 US +
Processing Fee
Without Portfolio: Owner Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00 US +
Processing Fee
Or you can write to:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Prices are subject to change without notice and
without incurring obligation. Allow ample time
for delivery.
Current and Past Model Order Forms
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are
to make checks payable in U.S. funds.
Technical Service Bulletins and Manuals are
available for current and past model GM vehicles.
To request an order form, please specify year
and model name of the vehicle.
502
Appearance Care (cont.)
504
Child Restraints (cont.)
C
505
Customer Assistance Information (cont.)
506
Driver Information Center (DIC) (cont.)
507
Fuel (cont.)
F
508
M
511
O
512
Q
513
Seats (cont.)
S
514
515
Tires (cont.)
Traction (cont.)
516
V
517
518
|
Briggs Stratton 127700 User Manual
Cornelius A8530 User Manual
Dakota Digital 3X User Manual
Danby DPAC9010 User Manual
Fisher Price V4341 User Manual
Fujitsu Air Conditioner Room Air Conditioner Wall Mounted Type User Manual
Fujitsu RY 36UA User Manual
GE General Electric Air Conditioner AGX10 User Manual
Gravely 927064 RM1440 User Manual
HP Hewlett Packard Hewlett Packard All in One Printer L1945WV User Manual